APOCALYPSIS
.
A
BRIEFE
AND
LEARNED
COMMENTARIE
VPON
THE
REVELATION
OF
SAINT
Iohn
the
Apostle
and
Euangelist
,
applyed
vnto
the
history
of
the
Catholicke
and
Christian
Church
.
Written
in
Latine
by
M.
FRANCIS
IVNIVS
Doctor
of
Diuinitie
,
and
professor
in
the
Vniuersitie
of
Heidelberge
:
And
translated
into
English
for
the
benefit
of
those
that
vnderstand
not
the
Latine
.
DEVT.
29.
v.
29.
The
things
that
are
secret
,
let
them
remaine
vnto
the
Lord
our
God
:
but
the
things
that
are
reuealed
,
are
reuealed
for
vs
and
for
our
children
for
euer
:
that
we
may
do
all
the
words
of
this
law
.
Imprinted
at
London
by
Richard
Field
for
Robert
Dexter
,
dwelling
in
Paules
Church
yard
at
the
signe
of
the
brasen
serpent
.
1592.
VNTO
THE
RIGHT
NOBLE
PERSONAGE
OTHO
GRINALDIVS
,
FRANCISCVS
IVNIVS
SENDETH
GREETING
.
NAture
it selfe
(
most
noble
Grinald
)
hath
taught
the
husbandmen
that
are
skilfull
in
grafting
,
&
inoculation
,
to
fence
the
imps
engrafted
into
the
stocke
,
with
clay
,
straw
,
morter
or
lome
mixt
with
chaffe
vntill
the
plant
haue
got
a
just
strength
,
left
by
anie
iniurie
of
the
wether
it
might
receiue
hurt
.
The
same
thing
hath
God
,
the
author
of
all
wisdome
&
of
euerie
good
gift
,
of
his
exceeding
mercie
,
towards
all
mankind
,
prouided
continually
in
the
husbandrie
of
his
Church
.
For
he
hath
both
infused
inwardly
into
his
most
excellent
plants
,
that
vi●al
sap
which
is
necessarie
vnto
continuance
,
or
rather
vnto
eternitie
,
as
those
which
are
borne
againe
of
his
mightie
word
:
&
also
by
the
couert
of
the
same
word
,
hath
fenced
those
that
are
planted
in
Christ
against
the
iniuries
that
outwardly
might
happen
vnto
them
.
In
this
manner
was
that
auncient
Church
of
the
Iewes
confirmed
of
old
by
the
holy
seruaunt
of
God
Daniell
a
most
faithfull
Prophet
,
against
the
violence
&
fraud
of
tyrants
and
of
false
prophets
that
were
to
come
:
And
so
also
this
our
Church
since
the
first
comming
of
Christ
,
remaining
in
expectance
of
his
second
and
glorious
appearance
,
hath
euermore
by
all
his
good
seruants
,
and
especially
by
this
most
holy
Apostle
and
Euangelist
S.
Iohn
,
the
disciple
whom
Christ
loued
,
bin
preserued
against
like
,
or
also
greater
tempests
:
strengthened
with
his
owne
forces
,
and
couered
as
with
certaine
eaues
least
by
this
perpetuall
shower
of
incommodities
,
it
should
rot
,
or
anie
way
drop
through
.
For
this
Apostle
,
vndoubtedly
inspired
of
God
,
hath
both
mightily
defended
the
truth
of
the
doctrine
,
and
person
of
Christ
,
and
the
loue
of
the
Church
from
the
venimous
teeth
and
bitings
of
heretickes
by
his
Gospell
,
thereby
adding
an
accomplishment
vnto
the
other
holy
and
diuine
Gospels
:
and
also
hath
in
this
booke
of
Reuelation
maintained
the
faith
and
pacience
of
the
saints
,
from
the
violent
inuasions
of
most
cruell
enimies
,
and
of
most
false
hypocrites
.
This
diuine
and
wholesome
prouidence
,
most
familiarly
layd
out
vnto
vs
in
this
booke
,
Satan
hath
not
ceassed
from
the
beginning
to
oppugne
,
that
he
might
plucke
the
same
(
if
it
were
possible
)
out
of
the
mindes
of
the
godly
and
elect
.
For
as
he
hath
striuen
against
the
credit
and
authoritie
of
this
booke
verie
much
:
so
(
when
the
authoritie
thereof
was
established
)
he
went
about
by
all
possible
meanes
to
corrupt
the
sence
and
meaning
of
the
Authour
.
What
and
howe
mightie
engines
,
howe
cunning
and
daungerous
vnderminings
he
hath
employed
to
shake
and
ouerthrow
the
authority
of
this
booke
,
many
godly
&
learned
men
haue
long
since
declared
.
He
hath
pretended
the
vncertaintie
of
the
Author
,
the
phrase
,
stile
,
and
arguments
,
and
hath
abused
the
labour
of
some
good
men
to
bring
this
his
purpose
to
passe
.
What
?
is
the
Author
vncertain
of
that
booke
which
was
committed
vnto
the
custodie
of
seuen
Churches
,
and
those
the
most
noble
and
renowned
of
all
Asia
,
and
preserued
of
them
most
religiously
?
It
is
a
fable
.
For
shall
those
Epistles
which
were
written
vnto
the
onely
Church
of
Rome
,
of
Corinth
,
and
the
like
,
be
of
certaine
and
constant
authoritie
from
the
testimonie
of
that
one
Church
vnto
which
they
were
written
,
and
shall
the
authority
of
that
booke
be
called
into
question
(
if
God
will
)
which
was
written
vnto
seuen
Churches
?
They
that
pretend
incongruity
of
speech
,
verily
shew
themselues
to
be
of
rude
and
rusticall
iudgement
:
who
do
not
thinke
that
our
speech
,
as
much
as
may
be
,
ought
to
be
attempered
vnto
the
heauenly
lawes
.
They
obiect
strangenesse
of
the
stile
,
the
publication
of
his
own
name
,
&
the
often
repetition
of
the
same
things
.
O
worthie
thetoricians
!
who
wil
not
haue
the
stile
to
differ
in
a
different
matter
.
They
thinke
it
agreeth
with
the
modestie
of
S.
Iohn
to
haue
concealed
his
name
:
as
if
S.
Iohn
in
this
argument
did
not
see
it
more
materiall
,
that
by
diuerse
times
expressing
of
his
name
,
he
should
(
as
Daniell
did
of
old
time
)
commend
the
credit
and
authority
of
the
booke
vnto
posteritie
of
time
to
come
:
then
by
suppressing
his
name
to
prouide
for
this
imaginarie
modestie
whereof
they
speake
.
Is
it
not
as
modestly
done
of
S.
Iohn
,
that
he
doth
in
expresse
wordes
professe
him selfe
the
Author
of
this
booke
:
as
when
in
the
last
chapter
of
his
Gospell
,
he
doth
by
circumlocution
describe
him selfe
?
Verely
in
neither
booke
did
he
erre
from
modestie
:
but
did
in
both
of
them
,
by
addition
of
his
name
,
confirme
the
credit
and
authoritie
of
his
writing
,
necessarily
&
for
the
publicke
good
of
the
Church
.
That
they
thinke
the
same
thing
is
often
repeated
,
is
partly
false
,
and
partly
where
any
such
repetition
is
,
necessarie
:
which
thing
our
interpretation
shal
declare
.
How
necessarie
this
argument
was
in
the
Church
of
God
,
we
declared
in
the
verie
entraunce
:
and
no
man
will
denie
,
that
with
cleane
eys
shal
looke
vnto
the
history
of
the
Christian
church
.
Wherefore
,
albeit
the
authoritie
of
this
booke
seemed
not
so
great
vnto
some
good
and
godly
men
in
times
past
,
yet
can
not
their
particular
iudgement
ouerthrow
the
publike
credit
therof
:
but
it
is
necessarie
that
the
authoritie
thereof
should
in
the
Catholicke
Church
be
accompted
entire
,
beleeued
,
professed
,
and
preserued
.
As
for
the
meaning
and
sence
of
the
Author
,
what
need
many
words
?
Here
verely
if
any
where
else
,
that
saying
is
true
,
how
many
heads
,
so
many
opinions
.
But
this
euill
of
ignorance
,
and
dissenting
in
iudgement
,
is
partly
borne
with
vs
from
the
darknesse
and
infirmitie
of
our
nature
:
and
partly
increased
or
heaped
vp
by
singularitie
of
affection
:
which
inconuenience
that
common
aduersarie
of
our
saluation
hath
much
increased
,
both
by
his
owne
practise
,
and
by
the
indeuor
of
his
ministers
and
instruments
.
Therefore
the
darkenesse
of
that
ignorance
infused
into
our
minds
within
,
and
scattered
abroade
without
,
hath
for
the
most
part
affrayed
good
men
,
otherwise
excelling
in
pietie
,
learning
,
vtterance
,
art
,
and
authoritie
,
from
writing
any
thing
in
this
argument
,
or
at
least
from
publishing
the
same
.
This
modestie
I
commend
;
but
I
follow
it
not
.
Why
so
?
wilt
thou
say
;
I
will
shew
in
few
wordes
what
cause
mooued
both
others
to
require
it
of
me
,
&
me
to
write
of
this
argument
.
So
shall
I
(
as
I
hope
)
both
approue
mine
enterprisevnto
good
men
:
&
take
away
the
suspition
of
immodestie
.
There
were
therfore
some
good
persons
that
required
this
dutie
at
my
hands
,
for
that
(
I
will
vse
their
owne
words
)
they
esteemed
me
to
abound
with
good
meanes
to
interpret
this
prophecie
of
the
newe
Testament
,
by
reason
of
my
continuall
reading
and
diligent
exercise
in
the
old
Testament
.
I
as
priuie
vnto
mine
owne
pouerty
,
excused
my self
,
refused
the
worke
,
and
denied
it
earnestly
.
But
they
replyed
,
that
this
modestie
was
counterfaited
,
appealed
vnto
their
owne
iudgements
of
me
,
and
flatly
charged
me
to
do
it
of
enuie
.
The
importunitie
of
these
men
forced
me
much
,
especially
when
I
considered
,
that
both
in
conference
with
my
friends
,
&
in
scholasticall
disputations
(
which
I
oftentimes
held
in
mine
owne
house
)
I
knew
that
some
things
had
bene
vttered
by
me
,
and
both
noted
and
taken
in
writing
by
mine
auditours
without
my
priuitie
.
Nowe
,
I
see
what
happened
in
old
time
to
the
holy
fathers
,
&
what
now
a
dayes
also
vnto
some
good
men
.
They
of
modestie
withdrew
and
suppressed
their
meditations
,
words
,
&
writings
:
but
by
that
means
they
opened
a
large
field
vnto
the
impudencie
and
audaciousnesse
of
others
.
For
when
yet
their
corps
was
scarcely
buried
,
writings
,
capsodies
&
comments
were
published
in
their
names
,
as
if
they
had
bin
authors
of
them
,
which
either
they
neuer
bred
,
or
the
other
vnskilfully
gathered
,
or
impudently
counterfaited
.
A
most
vnworthie
act
,
and
to
be
repressed
by
reuenge
of
the
Magistrat
.
I
had
rather
once
be
immodest
in
the
iudgement
of
these
men
,
then
beget
anie
immodest
person
,
which
should
attribute
vnto
me
his
own
inuentions
and
dreames
.
Of
this
exposition
I
will
say
nothing
,
saue
that
I
will
acknowledge
it
to
be
mine
owne
,
and
that
with
mind
not
to
boast
my self
:
but
to
prouide
for
afterwards
,
that
no
man
ascribe
vnto
me
that
which
him selfe
hath
fained
.
I
promise
to
say
the
truth
wheresoeuer
by
the
grace
of
God
I
am
able
:
and
to
be
brief
in
all
things
:
lest
either
I
in
writing
,
or
good
men
in
reading
,
should
be
said
to
loose
their
time
.
If
any
thinke
otherwise
then
I
do
,
their
libertie
of
iudgement
shall
for
me
remaine
vnto
them
.
For
I
do
not
,
as
a
iudge
,
giue
sentence
vpon
the
worke
of
others
:
but
as
one
that
would
furnish
the
same
feast
,
bring
in
my
dish
amongst
them
.
This
litle
worke
(
most
noble
Grinald
)
I
thought
good
to
dedicate
vnto
you
,
for
your
owne
sake
,
for
the
publike
,
and
for
my selfe
.
For
your
sake
,
that
you
may
know
and
find
,
that
I
do
with
the
consent
of
many
good
men
,
vnfaynedly
reioyce
in
your
behalfe
,
for
that
godly
care
wherewith
you
are
wont
to
examine
both
the
word
and
iudgements
of
God
,
of
which
this
booke
is
as
a
most
plentifull
treasurie
.
For
the
publike
cause
,
that
the
same
your
most
holy
studie
,
which
shortly
(
as
I
trust
)
shall
be
profitable
to
this
country
,
to
all
Germanie
,
and
to
the
church
,
may
by
this
small
light
of
my
dedication
be
set
in
the
sight
of
all
men
,
and
may
be
of
glorie
vnto
God
most
gracious
and
mightie
,
of
example
vnto
good
men
,
and
of
ornament
vnto
your selfe
.
For
mine
owne
sake
,
because
I
am
bound
hauing
bene
honoured
of
you
to
honor
you
againe
,
a
man
most
honorable
by
your
owne
desert
,
and
an
ornament
of
your
countrey
of
Germanie
.
Farewell
.
the
17.
of
March
1591.
AN
ADMONITION
VNTO
THE
READER
.
LEast
the
shortnesse
of
this
Commentarie
(
gentle
Reader
)
and
thereby
perhaps
the
hardnesse
of
the
same
,
might
either
hinder
or
discorage
thee
in
the
reading
therof
,
I
thought
good
to
admonish
thee
of
these
few
things
.
First
,
the
meaning
of
the
Author
was
not
to
write
any
large
or
full
volume
at
this
time
,
but
briefly
,
yet
exactly
,
to
set
downe
the
method
and
order
,
&
as
it
were
the
frame
of
this
Prophecie
:
and
so
to
distribute
the
same
into
diverse
branches
and
members
,
that
all
confusion
auoyded
,
thou
mightest
distinctly
see
to
what
part
of
the
storie
of
the
Church
,
and
to
what
point
of
time
,
euerie
thing
is
to
be
referred
.
As
for
the
matters
contained
herein
,
he
thought
it
sufficient
in
few
words
to
note
and
interpret
the
same
.
Notwithstannding
my
hope
is
,
thou
shalt
find
so
much
expressed
briefly
,
as
may
in
good
part
satisfie
thy
desire
,
and
giue
thee
occasion
to
consider
further
of
the
particulars
themselues
,
when
thou
shalt
see
the
sence
and
meaning
of
them
for
thy
direction
.
Many
I
know
haue
written
more
largely
of
this
booke
,
whose
labours
are
not
to
be
contenned
.
Here
breuity
was
sought
,
that
all
things
,
that
all
things
being
in
a
maner
at
once
set
before
thine
eye
,
thou
mightest
both
more
easily
comprehend
that
which
is
sayd
,
and
better
imprint
it
in
thy
memory
.
If
thou
shalt
here
find
any
thing
different
from
the
iudgement
of
others
,
let
it
not
offend
thee
:
considering
that
in
mysteries
of
this
sort
,
it
hath
alwayes
bene
free
for
men
of
learning
,
and
excelling
in
gifts
,
without
either
disgrace
to
those
that
went
before
them
,
or
preiudice
to
them
that
follow
after
them
,
to
deliuer
that
which
they
have
receiued
,
and
to
commend
the
same
vnto
the
iudgement
of
the
Church
.
Now
that
thy
labour
may
be
with
more
ease
,
and
with
greater
frute
and
delight
;
reade
not
the
commentarie
alone
,
but
with
present
view
and
consideration
of
that
part
of
the
text
wherunto
it
doth
appertaine
:
for
which
cause
thou
shalt
finde
the
text
and
the
commentarie
belonging
vnto
it
,
alwayes
printed
vpon
the
same
page
.
As
for
certaine
words
of
Art
which
could
not
be
auoyded
,
and
some
other
vnwonted
speech
,
they
shall
I
trust
nothing
hinder
thy
proceeding
,
because
that
which
is
obscure
in
them
at
the
first
sight
,
will
by
that
which
followeth
be
made
lightsome
and
plaine
vnto
thee
.
It
shall
also
be
profitable
for
thee
,
when
thou
art
entred
into
the
reading
of
this
litle
worke
,
not
to
suffer
thy selfe
to
be
distracted
or
carried
away
by
wearinesse
or
vnconstancie
,
vntill
thou
haue
seene
the
end
of
the
booke
:
that
comparing
all
things
together
,
thou
mayest
make
accompt
of
thy
labour
and
profiting
herein
:
both
for
the
truth
of
the
matter
propounded
,
and
for
thine
vse
and
frute
by
the
same
.
Also
it
shall
not
repent
thee
,
if
not
attaining
to
vnderstand
all
things
at
the
first
reading
,
thou
shalt
for
the
excellencie
of
the
matter
,
which
alwayes
bringeth
some
difficultie
with
it
,
not
refuse
to
repeat
it
the
second
,
and
if
need
rquire
the
third
time
.
The
often
noting
of
the
particular
Chapters
and
verses
is
more
certainly
to
direct
thee
to
that
,
the
knowledge
or
remembrance
whereof
is
necessarie
vnto
the
present
place
,
for
thy
further
instruction
.
For
the
Tables
I
haue
contracted
them
as
I
thought
might
be
more
commodious
for
thee
.
Vnto
this
commentarie
of
Iunius
is
added
the
briefe
notes
of
Beza
and
others
in
a
diuerse
character
,
and
that
in
the
margent
of
the
text
,
whereunto
thou
art
directed
by
the
letters
of
the
alphabet
:
as
vnto
the
commentarie
by
arithmeticall
figures
.
For
the
translation
of
the
text
,
I
haue
in
a
maner
wholly
vsed
that
which
is
most
common
and
in
euery
mans
hand
:
onely
for
plainnesse
sake
and
more
euidencie
,
I
haue
in
some
few
places
,
framed
the
same
vnto
that
later
edition
of
the
Latine
,
which
as
I
thought
,
did
more
nearely
approch
vnto
the
originall
Greeke
copie
.
Thus
commending
thy
studies
vnto
the
direction
of
Gods
most
holy
spirit
,
I
bid
thee
farewell
in
the
Lord
Iesus
.
The
5.
of
Februarie
,
1591.
|
The
order
of
time
whereunto
the
contents
of
this
booke
are
to
be
referred
.
|
The
yeare
of
Christ
.
|
|
THe
dragon
watcheth
the
Church
of
the
Iewes
,
which
was
readie
to
trauaile
:
She
bringeth
forth
,
flieth
,
and
hideth
herselfe
,
whilest
Christ
was
yet
vpon
the
earth
.
|
1.
&c
|
|
The
dragon
persecuteth
Christ
ascending
into
heauen
,
he
fighteth
and
is
throwne
downe
:
and
after
persecuteth
the
Church
of
the
Iewes
.
|
34.
|
|
The
Church
of
the
Iewes
is
receaued
into
the
wildernesse
,
for
three
yeares
and
an
halfe
.
|
67.
|
|
When
the
Church
of
the
Iewes
was
ouerthrowne
,
the
dragon
inuaded
the
Catholique
Church
,
all
this
is
in
the
12.
chap.
The
dragon
is
bound
for
1000.
yeares
chap.
20.
The
dragon
raiseth
vp
the
beast
with
seuen
heads
,
and
the
beast
with
two
heads
,
which
make
hauocke
of
the
Church
Catholique
and
her
Prophets
for
1260.
yeares
after
the
Passion
of
Christ
.
chap.
13.
and.
11.
|
70.
|
|
The
seuen
Churches
are
admonished
of
things
present
,
somwhat
before
the
end
of
Domitian
his
raigne
,
and
are
forewarned
of
the
persecution
to
come
vnder
Traiane
for
ten
yeares
.
chap.
2.
and.
3.
God
by
word
and
signes
prouoketh
the
world
,
and
sealeth
the
godly
.
chap.
6.
and.
7.
He
sheweth
forth
exemplars
of
his
wrath
vpon
all
creatures
,
mankind
excepted
.
chap.
8.
|
97.
|
|
The
dragon
is
let
loose
after
1000.
yeares
,
and
Gregorie
the
vii
.
being
Pope
,
rageth
against
Henry
the
third
,
then
Emperout
.
chap.
20.
|
1073
|
|
The
dragon
vexeth
the
world
.
150.
yeares
,
vnto
Gregorie
the
ix
.
who
writ
the
Decretals
,
and
most
cruelly
persecuted
the
Emperour
Fridericke
the
2.
The
dragon
by
both
the
beasts
persecuteth
the
Church
,
&
putteth
the
godlie
to
death
chap.
9.
|
1217
|
|
The
dragon
killeth
the
Prophets
after
.
1260.
yeares
,
when
Boniface
the
viij
.
was
Pope
,
who
was
the
authour
of
the
vi
.
booke
of
the
Decretals
:
he
excommunicated
Philip
the
French
king
.
|
1295
|
|
Boniface
celebrateth
his
first
Iubiley
.
|
1300
|
|
About
this
time
was
a
great
earthquake
,
which
ouerthrew
many
houses
in
Rome
.
|
1301
|
|
Prophecie
ceasseth
for
three
yeares
&
half
,
vntill
Benedict
the
2.
succeeded
after
Boniface
viij
.
Prophecie
is
reuiued
.
chap.
11.
The
dragon
and
the
two
beasts
oppugne
Prophesie
.
chap.
13.
Christ
defendeth
his
Church
in
word
and
deede
.
chap.
14.
With
threats
and
armes
.
chap.
15.
With
singular
iudgements
.
chap.
16.
Christ
giueth
his
Church
victorie
ouer
the
harlot
.
chap.
17.
&
18.
Ouer
the
two
beasts
.
chap.
19.
Ouer
the
dragon
and
death
.
chap.
20.
The
Church
is
fullie
glorified
in
heauen
with
eternall
glorie
,
in
Christ
Iesus
.
chap.
21.
and
22.
|
1305
|
A
Table
containing
the
summe
of
this
booke
in
three
parts
.
-
1.
The
exordium
,
in
which
are
these
three
,
-
The
inscription
of
the
booke
,
chap.
1.
vers.
1.
2.
3.
-
The
salutation
,
vers.
4.
5.
6.
7.
-
The
calling
of
Iohn
,
and
the
authoritie
of
this
Reuelation
,
vers.
8.
18.
-
2.
The
argument
or
contentes
,
in
which
is
a
-
Diuision
of
the
whole
into
things
present
and
things
to
come
,
chap.
1.
vers.
19.
20.
-
Narration
of
things
-
Present
,
written
for
instruction
vnto
the
Churches
that
were
At
-
Ephesus
,
Smyrna
,
Chapter
2.
-
Pergamus
,
Thyatira
,
Chapter
2.
-
Sardis
,
Philadelphia
,
Chap.
3.
-
Laodicea
,
—
Chap.
3.
-
To
come
-
Generall
vnto
the
whole
world
wherein
is
-
The
calling
of
Iohn
,
&
the
authoritie
of
this
reuelation
confirmed
from
the
person
of
him
that
calleth
,
God
the
Father
,
chap.
4.
and
God
the
Sonne
,
chap.
5.
-
The
workes
of
God
,
which
are
of
three
sorts
-
Foretelling
&
foresignifying
of
the
miseries
that
should
come
vpon
the
world
,
chap.
6.
-
Deliuerance
of
the
elect
,
who
are
sealed
with
the
seale
of
God
before
the
euils
prefigured
shold
be
executed
,
chap.
7.
-
Execution
of
Gods
iudgements
vpon
-
Other
creatures
,
chap.
8.
-
Mankind
,
by
tribulation
and
slaughters
,
chap.
9.
-
Particular
.
As
in
the
second
Table
.
*
*
Particular
belonging
vnto
Gods
people
,
wherein
is
-
The
calling
of
S.
Iohn
,
and
the
authoritie
of
his
reuelation
,
from
the
person
of
the
Sonne
of
God
,
chap.
10.
-
The
historie
of
the
-
Prophets
,
fighting
for
the
space
of
1260.
yeares
:
slaine
,
and
raised
vp
againe
in
the
church
chap.
11
-
Church
-
Of
the
Iewes
,
oppugned
by
the
dragon
,
before
trauell
,
and
in
trauell
,
and
after
trauell
chapter
12.
-
Christian
&
Catholike
,
in
which
are
the
-
Battailes
-
Sustained
against
the
two
beasts
,
chap.
13.
-
Made
vpon
them
,
in
Christ
,
by
-
Preaching
,
and
working
,
chap.
14.
-
Threates
,
chap.
15.
-
Iudgements
,
chap.
16.
-
Victorie
gotten
by
Christ
ouer
the
-
Harlot
,
chap.
17.
18.
-
Two
beasts
,
chap.
19.
-
Dragon
,
both
before
and
after
the
thousand
yeares
.
chap.
20.
-
Glorie
,
of
the
Church
eternally
triumphing
,
chap
21.
and
22.
vnto
the
sixt
verse
.
-
3.
The
conclusion
,
which
hath
a
-
Confirmation
,
chap.
22.
6.
19.
-
Salutation
.
verse
20.
&c.
¶
I
HAVE
NOT
THOVGHT
GOOD
TO
PVT
forth
any
such
thing
as
yet
,
vpon
the
Reuelation
,
as
I
haue
vpon
the
former
bookes
:
notwithstanding
I
liked
well
to
set
downe
in
the
meane
season
that
,
that
I
wrote
a
fewe
yeeres
since
,
concerning
the
authoritie
of
this
booke
.
And
this
is
it
.
BEcause
some
men
haue
of
long
time
doubted
of
the
authoritie
of
this
booke
,
I
will
in
fewe
wordes
confute
those
argumentes
,
which
are
commonly
brought
to
thu
purpose
,
and
after
shewe
mine
owne
opinion
,
and
what
I
thinke
.
And
I
will
recite
the
arguments
in
such
order
,
as
Erasmus
hath
paynfully
and
diligently
gathered
them
together
:
whose
iudgement
seemeth
to
mee
so
vncertaine
in
this
point
(
as
it
is
also
in
many
other
)
that
no
man
can
readily
tell
what
opinion
he
was
of
,
saue
that
after
much
a
doe
,
he
seemeth
to
bende
this
way
,
that
hee
is
of
opinion
,
that
this
booke
is
of
some
authoritie
,
though
not
of
so
good
as
the
rest
of
the
bookes
are
which
we
receiue
without
any
gainesaying
.
Therefore
let
vs
heare
what
hee
sayth
.
Hierome
witnesseth
,
sayth
he
,
that
the
Grecians
in
his
time
did
not
receiue
the
Reuelation
.
Dorotheus
Byshoppe
of
Tyrus
,
and
a
Martyr
,
in
his
abbridgement
of
liues
recordeth
that
John
wrote
his
Gospell
in
the
Ile
of
Patmos
,
but
maketh
no
mention
of
this
booke
.
Athanasius
a
Grecian
in
his
catalogue
doeth
not
say
that
this
is
Johns
worke
.
Dionysius
of
Alexandria
,
as
Eusebius
reporteth
his
wordes
,
in
the
seuenth
booke
of
his
Ecclesiasticall
historie
,
thinketh
that
this
booke
was
written
of
some
other
John
,
who
was
a
godly
man
.
Eusebius
him selfe
so
citeth
this
booke
in
diuers
places
of
his
historie
,
that
hee
doeth
not
flatly
vouch
it
to
be
Iohns
:
but
alleageth
one
Caius
that
was
a
good
Christian
in
the
fourth
booke
of
his
historie
,
who
sayeth
it
was
written
of
one
Cerinthus
an
heretike
.
Let
this
bee
the
first
argument
which
I
answere
in
this
sort
.
If
we
weigh
the
reasons
that
moued
those
men
to
reiect
this
booke
,
then
wee
shall
see
howe
vndeseruedly
they
did
it
.
Againe
as
some
did
reiect
it
,
so
did
the
most
part
receiue
it
:
in
so
much
that
Epiphanius
reckoneth
them
amongst
heretikes
that
did
reiect
it
:
as
for
Iustine
the
philosopher
,
and
Irene
Byshoppe
of
Lions
which
were
both
martyrs
,
and
did
not
onely
allowe
it
,
but
also
wrote
commentaries
vpon
it
,
I
will
not
speake
of
them
.
As
for
that
that
is
alledged
of
Dorotheus
,
it
is
to
no
great
purpose
,
for
that
he
is
thought
to
reiect
it
,
because
hee
spake
not
of
it
.
As
touching
Athanasius
,
Erasmus
him selfe
witnesseth
that
it
is
doubtfull
whether
that
worke
be
his
or
no.
Concerning
Dionysius
wee
will
weigh
by
and
by
what
hee
sayeth
,
when
wee
come
to
consider
of
his
reasons
.
As
for
Catus
(
what
man
so
euer
hee
was
)
hee
is
easily
to
be
refuted
euen
by
Dionysius
his
wordes
in
the
third
booke
of
the
Ecclesiasticall
historie
.
As
for
Eusebius
I
make
no
account
of
him
,
for
there
are
none
learned
,
but
finde
want
of
iudgement
in
him
.
Nowe
let
vs
come
to
the
other
argument
.
Hierome
writeth
(
sayth
he
)
that
certaine
very
well
learned
men
found
great
fault
and
spake
sharply
against
the
whole
matter
of
this
booke
,
as
though
there
were
nothing
in
it
worthie
the
grauitie
of
an
Apostle
,
but
onely
a
common
historie
of
things
shadowed
with
certaine
darke
figures
and
hard
kinde
of
speaches
.
And
moreouer
that
in
the
very
sentences
them selues
there
was
nothing
that
becommed
the
grauitie
of
an
Apostle
.
Which
I
answere
in
this
sort
:
What
learned
men
so
euer
these
were
,
they
are
greatly
to
be
blamed
,
in
that
they
durst
be
so
bolde
to
speake
euill
of
that
booke
,
which
no
doubt
is
very
short
,
if
those
things
be
excepted
,
which
are
translated
worde
for
worde
out
of
the
Prophetes
.
Basil
,
Gregorie
,
Cyril
,
Epiphanius
,
Irene
,
Hippolite
,
as
Aretas
witnesseth
,
were
not
of
this
iudgement
,
which
thought
not
onely
as
Dionysius
of
Alexandria
did
,
that
some
godly
man
wrote
this
booke
,
but
also
plainely
vouched
it
to
be
Iohn
the
Apostle
,
which
no
doubt
they
would
neuer
haue
done
,
if
they
had
found
no
resemblance
of
the
grauitie
of
an
Apostle
in
it
.
And
whether
of
these
shall
J
count
for
the
better
learned
?
whether
these
men
,
which
haue
giuen
recorde
both
of
their
singular
godlinesse
,
and
excellent
learning
by
publishing
many
workes
,
or
those
men
rather
,
whose
onely
names
are
scarcely
heard
of
:
and
the
reasons
they
vse
,
giue
sufficient
proofe
howe
learned
they
were
?
They
say
there
appeared
no
grauitie
in
this
writer
,
and
yet
he
hath
taken
euery
what
almost
worde
for
worde
out
of
the
Prophets
:
they
say
he
hath
put
downe
a
common
historie
.
But
howe
can
that
be
,
seeing
(
a
fewe
things
onely
except
)
he
maketh
no
relation
of
things
past
,
but
foretelleth
things
to
come
?
And
therefore
they
doe
not
onely
not
speake
that
,
that
is
trueth
,
but
not
so
much
as
any
piece
or
resemblance
of
trueth
.
Nowe
let
vs
come
to
the
third
argument
:
Hee
is
very
curious
(
sayth
one
)
in
setting
downe
his
owne
name
,
as
though
he
should
indite
an
obligation
,
and
not
write
a
booke
,
which
is
not
onely
not
vsed
of
any
of
the
Apostles
,
but
is
also
vnaccustomed
of
him selfe
:
for
in
his
Gospel
where
he
entreateth
a
great
deale
more
modest
matters
,
then
these
are
,
he
neuer
nameth
himselfe
,
but
onely
pointeth
it
out
by
some
such
markes
as
these
,
the
disciple
whome
Jesus
loued
.
And
Paul
when
he
is
enforced
to
speake
of
his
Reuelations
,
setteth
out
the
matter
vnder
an
other
mans
person
.
And
yet
this
man
,
while
he
describeth
the
secrete
conference
which
he
had
with
Angels
,
hath
neuer
done
with
these
kinde
of
wordes
,
I
Iohn
.
This
reason
mooued
Dionysius
of
Alexandria
to
thinke
,
that
some
other
man
wrote
this
booke
.
But
what
weake
,
and
slender
coniectures
are
these
?
litle
did
these
good
men
consider
,
that
it
was
one
thing
to
write
an
historie
,
and
an
other
to
set
downe
a
prophecie
:
for
the
trueth
of
an
historie
hangeth
not
so
much
vpon
the
credite
of
the
writer
,
as
vpon
other
circumstances
,
but
a
prophecie
:
because
it
foretelleth
things
to
come
,
standeth
vpon
the
authoritie
of
him
that
reueileth
it
,
and
his
that
preacheth
it
,
so
that
it
is
of
necessitte
to
giue
vs
to
vnderstande
,
both
from
whence
that
forewarning
came
,
and
who
reueiled
it
,
and
who
wrote
it
.
Whereupon
we
see
,
that
not
onely
in
the
beginning
of
prophecies
,
but
also
almost
in
euery
vision
,
there
is
nothing
so
curiously
set
downe
as
the
Name
of
God
who
spake
it
,
and
the
name
of
the
Prophet
who
wrote
it
:
Take
for
example
,
onely
the
Prophet
Ieremie
,
who
maketh
mention
of
his
name
,
at
the
least
an
hundred
times
.
And
so
was
it
requisite
for
him
to
doe
,
that
hee
might
not
seeme
to
seeke
lurking
corners
to
hide
him selfe
in
as
the
false
prophets
did
.
And
what
?
doe
we
not
finde
from
the
seuenth
Chapter
of
Daniel
,
that
almost
in
euery
verse
hee
repeateth
his
owne
name
,
and
sayth
,
I
Daniel
?
And
howe
oft
doeth
Esay
repeate
these
wordes
,
Esay
the
sonne
of
Amos
?
But
Iohn
did
not
so
in
his
Gospell
.
J
graunt
:
for
he
wrote
an
historie
,
wherein
that
befell
him
,
which
befell
to
none
other
of
the
disciples
:
for
hee
was
occasioned
to
speake
many
things
of
himselfe
.
Nay
,
Paul
also
did
not
so
:
In
deede
hee
did
not
so
,
in
any
place
where
he
handled
not
his
visions
purposely
,
but
whensoeuer
hee
voucheth
the
excellencie
of
his
ministerie
,
howe
boldly
and
howe
magnifically
doeth
hee
call
himselfe
that
Paul
which
was
appointed
to
bee
an
Apostle
,
not
of
men
,
nor
by
men
,
but
by
Iesus
Christ
?
And
howe
?
when
hee
reporteth
those
his
great
combates
,
doeth
hee
take
vpon
him
anothers
man
person
?
Nay
let
vs
goe
further
:
Iohns
name
is
not
to
bee
found
(
vnlesse
I
be
deceiued
in
my
reckoning
)
aboue
fiue
times
in
all
this
worke
:
and
those
wordes
(
I
Iohn
)
but
onely
thrise
,
to
wit
,
chap.
1.
verse
9.
and
yet
with
an
explication
added
to
it
,
which
may
suffice
aboundantly
to
put
away
all
suspition
of
pride
:
and
againe
,
chap.
21.
verse
2.
and
chap.
22.
verse
8.
in
both
which
places
hee
reporteth
onely
simply
what
he
sawe
,
to
the
ende
,
that
no
man
might
doubt
of
the
trueth
of
his
prophecie
.
Therefore
,
to
make
an
ende
of
this
reason
in
fewe
wordes
,
that
argument
which
Dionysius
maketh
,
is
not
onely
vaine
,
but
also
argueth
want
of
skill
,
and
is
in
deede
very
slanderous
:
nay
,
I
may
say
more
,
and
say
truely
(
without
any
malice
to
any
as
the
Lorde
is
witnesse
)
that
this
was
too
vnaduisedly
spoken
,
where
hee
sayeth
,
that
the
Euangelist
is
as
curious
in
his
often
repeating
of
,
I
Iohn
,
as
if
he
had
bene
writing
an
obligation
,
and
no
booke
.
Nowe
to
the
fourth
Argument
:
In
all
the
Greeke
copies
that
I
haue
seene
,
saith
he
,
it
was
not
intituled
the
Reuelation
of
Iohn
the
Euangelist
,
but
,
of
Iohn
the
diuine
,
which
is
sufficient
to
prooue
it
was
Iohn
the
Euangelist
:
for
all
that
are
learned
knowe
that
he
was
by
excellencie
,
and
by
a
prerogatiue
as
it
were
,
called
by
this
name
The
Diuine
,
of
all
the
olde
writers
,
because
neuer
man
wrote
so
plainely
and
diuinely
of
the
diuinitie
of
Christ
as
he
did
.
As
for
the
other
Iohn
,
who
I
thinke
was
a
counterfaite
,
was
not
called
by
this
excellent
name
Diuine
,
but
an
Elder
.
Nowe
for
the
vnlikenes
of
his
stile
,
and
speach
,
which
that
Dionysius
of
Alexandria
prooueth
by
three
reasons
as
Nicephorus
recordeth
,
Eccle.
lib.
6.
cap.
23.
first
by
the
whole
course
and
nature
of
his
wordes
,
secondly
,
that
whereas
the
Gospell
and
Catholike
Epistle
of
Iohn
,
agree
in
very
many
pointes
,
this
booke
hath
not
one
worke
like
.
Lastly
,
because
Iohn
had
an
excellent
gift
of
speach
,
but
this
man
is
very
clownish
,
barbarous
,
and
tripped
oft
in
his
language
.
To
the
first
I
answere
,
that
in
so
diuers
a
matter
,
it
is
no
maruaile
,
to
see
so
diuers
a
kinde
of
stile
:
for
in
the
historie
of
the
Gospell
,
and
in
the
Epistles
,
though
he
spake
as
he
was
mooued
by
the
holy
Ghost
,
yet
he
spake
what
his
minde
led
him
:
and
here
he
is
but
the
writer
of
such
things
as
hee
heard
and
were
deliuered
him
:
In
the
other
he
somewhat
maketh
report
of
the
historie
,
and
sometime
teacheth
,
but
in
this
he
speaketh
of
things
to
come
,
and
in
such
order
of
wordes
as
he
is
appointed
:
And
shall
we
maruaile
then
that
hee
vseth
not
one selfe
same
kinde
of
sentences
?
Nay
,
what
writer
was
there
euer
that
was
tied
so
short
?
are
not
many
things
deliuered
to
him
in
the
very
wordes
of
the
olde
Prophets
,
euen
in
the
same
that
Ezechiel
,
Daniel
,
Zacharie
,
Esai
,
and
other
spake
withall
,
by
the
direction
of
the
selfe
same
Spirit
,
which
spake
the
selfe
same
in
them
in
olde
time
?
And
therefore
it
is
no
maruaile
that
he
vseth
not
so
refined
a
kinde
of
speach
,
as
happely
they
would
desire
,
seeing
he
swarueth
neither
in
speache
,
nor
in
characters
,
from
the
Prophets
which
wrote
in
the
Hebrewe
tongue
:
and
therefore
there
is
lesse
cause
of
suspicion
that
it
shoulde
be
any
counterfeite
worke
slily
crept
into
the
Church
.
Nowe
remaineth
the
last
Argument
,
which
seemeth
to
charge
him
that
hee
fauoureth
the
heresie
of
the
Chiliastes
,
whereupon
diuers
thought
that
Cerinthus
made
this
booke
and
fathered
it
vpon
some
of
the
Apostles
.
But
for
mine
owne
part
,
though
I
graunt
that
the
Chiliastes
haue
abused
many
testimonies
out
of
this
booke
,
yet
I
can
not
yeelde
to
that
,
and
thinke
that
some
heretikes
should
make
it
,
vnlesse
some
man
he
able
to
shewe
mee
,
that
those
places
can
not
sitly
he
taken
in
any
other
sense
:
or
els
what
booke
is
there
,
that
we
may
receiue
?
And
that
those
places
are
otherwise
to
be
taken
,
diuers
learned
men
haue
shewed
long
agoe
:
so
that
the
like
hath
be
fallen
this
booke
as
did
to
the
Epistle
to
the
Hebrewes
,
which
some
man
reiected
very
obstinately
,
because
it
seemed
to
make
for
the
Nouatians
:
where
as
in
deede
they
ought
rather
to
haue
accused
their
owne
ignorance
.
Moreouer
,
seeing
Cerinthus
had
many
other
mad
and
wicked
opinions
,
as
that
,
hee
denied
that
God
made
the
worlde
,
and
taught
that
Christ
was
borne
of
Marie
,
and
Ioseph
,
as
all
other
men
are
borne
,
and
maketh
Christ
,
and
Iesus
two
distinct
persons
:
howe
commeth
it
to
passe
that
hee
sprinkled
none
of
this
Foule
holy
water
amongst
the
rest
in
this
booke
?
But
he
was
so
farre
from
so
doing
,
that
contrariwise
there
may
be
diuers
arguments
taken
out
of
this
booke
against
those
errours
:
so
that
it
may
appeare
by
this
one
reason
,
that
Cerinthus
was
not
the
authour
of
this
booke
.
And
againe
,
where
as
hee
speaketh
of
the
thousand
yeeres
,
hee
mentioneth
no
one
iote
of
those
things
,
which
Cerinthus
so
impudently
chattred
of
.
For
where
is
there
any
mention
of
that
ryote
which
Ceriathus
talketh
of
?
where
is
that
cating
?
drinking
?
where
are
those
marriages
and
pastimes
?
where
are
the
sacrifices
and
holy
dayes
which
should
be
kept
at
Hierusalem
?
Therefore
this
is
a
vaine
and
a
foolish
argument
.
And
seeing
these
things
are
so
,
though
I
would
not
steffely
stand
in
contention
forthe
authours
name
,
yet
I
rather
iudge
it
to
be
Iohn
the
Apostle
,
then
any
other
mans
:
For
besides
that
it
appeareth
to
be
very
aunctent
,
and
the
learnedst
and
the
godliest
of
the
olde
Fathers
doubt
not
,
but
it
was
Iohns
.
These
coniectures
also
leade
me
to
thinke
so
:
for
that
I
finde
none
of
those
dayes
to
whome
either
prophecies
so
full
of
maiestie
,
or
so
honourable
a
name
of
a
diuine
,
may
be
ascribed
:
and
moreouer
,
that
it
sauoureth
of
the
worthinesse
and
excellencie
of
an
Apostle
,
to
write
to
the
Churches
of
Asia
,
and
not
to
one
Church
:
Lasily
,
because
those
thinges
which
are
here
spoken
of
Patmos
,
agree
wholy
with
that
which
the
olde
Fathers
haue
written
with
one
consent
,
concerning
Johns
bantshment
.
And
yet
notwithstanding
if
it
may
be
lawfull
to
coniecture
by
the
kiude
of
speach
it selfe
,
I
would
thinke
it
to
be
no
mans
sooner
then
Markes
,
who
was
also
called
Iohn
:
hee
is
so
like
not
onely
in
wordes
,
but
also
in
diuers
kindes
of
speach
,
to
the
Gospell
of
Saint
Marke
,
in
so
much
that
these
two
bookes
haue
almost
one
kinde
of
character
.
As
for
the
booke
it selfe
,
though
I
confesse
that
these
mysteries
are
as
yet
very
darke
to
me
,
yet
notwithstanding
,
seeing
there
appeareth
in
all
partes
of
it
a
great
maiestie
of
the
spirite
of
prophecie
,
and
the
very
steppes
and
sentences
,
yea
and
the
wordes
of
the
olde
Prphets
,
seeing
there
are
to
be
found
in
it
manifest
and
mightie
testimonies
,
both
of
the
Diuiniete
of
Christ
,
and
also
of
our
redemption
:
And
last
of
all
,
seeing
that
part
of
those
things
are
most
manifestly
come
to
passe
,
which
were
foretolde
by
him
,
as
those
things
which
hee
spake
of
the
destruction
of
the
Churches
of
Asia
,
and
of
the
kingdome
of
the
whore
,
which
sitteth
vpon
seuen
billes
,
I
am
perswaded
and
thinke
that
the
holy
Ghosts
meaning
was
to
heape
vp
together
,
in
this
most
precious
booke
,
all
such
things
,
as
by
the
forewarning
of
the
olde
Prophets
remained
to
be
fulfilled
after
the
comming
of
Christ
:
and
added
also
a
fewe
things
,
as
hee
thought
expedient
for
vs
.
I
graunt
they
are
very
darke
,
but
that
is
no
strange
thing
in
the
Prophets
writings
,
as
especially
in
Ezechiels
.
But
this
is
our
fault
,
because
we
take
not
diligent
heede
to
things
,
but
ouerslip
those
iudgements
of
Gods
prouidence
,
which
dayly
are
to
be
seene
in
his
gouerning
of
the
Church
,
by
hauing
our
hearts
too
much
set
vpon
our
owne
priuate
affaires
.
To
be
short
,
the
Lorde
knoweth
what
,
and
howe
farre
it
is
expedient
for
vs
to
knowe
,
and
therefore
in
times
past
,
he
so
disposed
the
light
of
his
Prophets
,
as
for
his
infinite
wisedome
he
sawe
it
would
bee
profitable
for
his
Church
.
And
therefore
godly
men
haue
to
searche
and
wade
in
these
mysteries
with
feare
and
reuerence
,
so
farre
forth
,
as
lawfully
and
profitably
they
may
:
and
let
all
men
reuerence
the
mysteries
of
God
,
which
are
comprehended
in
this
booke
,
whether
they
knowe
them
,
or
knowe
them
not
,
rather
then
as
many
doe
,
either
mocke
at
them
,
or
defile
them
with
their
fantasticall
commentaries
.
THE
REVELATION
OF
SAINT
IOHN
THE
APOSTLE
and
Euangelist
,
with
a
briefe
and
learned
commentarie
,
written
by
Franc.
Iunius
,
&c.
CHAP.
1.
1
He
declareth
what
kind
of
doctrine
is
here
handled
,
8
euen
his
,
that
is
the
beginning
and
ending
:
12
Then
the
mysterie
of
the
seuen
candlestickes
and
starres
20
is
expounded
.
THE
[
a
](A16102-e1650-b)
a
An
opening
of
secret
and
hidde
things
.
reuelation
of
[
b
](A16102-e1660-b)
b
Which
the
Sonne
opened
to
vs
out
of
his
Fathers
bosome
by
Angels
.
IESVS
2
Who
testified
the
word
of
God
,
and
the
[
1
](A16102-e1700-b)
1
This
chapter
hath
two
principall
parts
,
the
title
or
inscription
,
which
standeth
in
steed
of
an
exordium
;
&
a
narration
going
before
the
whole
prophesie
of
this
booke
.
The
inscription
is
double
,
general
and
particular
.
The
generall
containeth
the
kind
of
prophesie
,
the
author
,
end
,
matter
,
instruments
,
and
manner
of
communicating
the
same
,
in
the
first
verse
:
the
most
religious
faithfulnesse
of
the
Apostle
,
as
a
publike
witnesse
,
verse
2.
And
the
vse
of
communicating
the
same
,
taken
from
the
promise
of
God
,
&
from
the
circumstance
of
the
time
,
verse
,
3.
witnesse
of
Iesus
Christ
,
and
all
thinges
that
he
saw
.
3
Blessed
is
he
that
readeth
,
and
blessed
are
they
that
heare
the
words
of
this
prophecie
,
and
obserue
those
things
which
are
written
therein
:
for
the
time
appointed
is
at
hand
.
4
[
2
](A16102-e1740-b)
2
This
is
the
particular
or
singular
inscription
,
wherein
saluation
is
written
vnto
certaine
Churches
by
name
,
which
represent
the
Church
Catholike
:
and
the
certaintie
and
truth
of
the
same
is
declared
,
from
the
author
therof
,
vnto
the
8.
ver.
Iohn
to
the
seuen
Churches
which
are
in
Asia
;
Grace
be
vnto
you
,
and
peace
;
from
him
[
‖
](A16102-e1770-b)
‖
Exod.
3.
14.
is
,
and
Which
was
,
and
Which
is
[
3
](A16102-e1790-b)
3
That
is
,
from
God
the
Father
aeternal
,
immortal
,
immutable
;
whose
vnchangeablenes
S.
Iohn
declareth
by
a
forme
of
speech
which
is
vndeclined
.
For
there
is
no
incongruitie
in
this
place
,
where
,
of
necessitie
the
words
must
be
attempeted
vnto
the
mysteries
,
&
not
the
mysteries
corrupted
or
impaired
by
the
words
.
to
come
;
and
from
[
4
](A16102-e1800-b)
4
That
is
,
from
the
holy
Ghost
,
which
proceedeth
from
the
Father
and
the
Sonne
.
This
Spirit
is
one
in
person
according
to
his
subsistencie
;
but
in
communication
of
his
vertue
,
&
in
demonstration
of
his
diuine
works
in
those
seuen
Churches
,
doth
so
perfectly
manifest
himselfe
,
as
if
there
were
so
many
Spirits
,
euerie
one
perfectly
working
in
his
owne
Church
.
Wherefore
after
chap.
5.
6.
they
are
called
the
seuen
hornes
and
seuen
eyes
of
the
Lambe
,
as
much
to
say
,
as
his
most
absolute
power
&
wisedome
:
&
chap.
3.
1.
Christ
is
said
to
haue
those
seuen
Spirits
of
God
:
&
cha.
4.
5.
it
is
said
,
that
seuen
lamps
do
burne
before
his
throne
,
which
also
are
those
seuen
Spirits
of
God
.
That
this
place
ought
to
be
so
vnderstood
,
it
is
thus
proued
.
For
first
grace
and
peace
is
asked
by
prayer
of
this
Spirit
,
which
is
a
diuine
worke
,
&
an
action
incommunicable
in
respect
of
the
most
high
Deitie
Secondly
he
is
placed
between
the
Father
and
the
Sonne
,
as
set
in
the
same
degree
of
dignitie
and
operation
with
them
.
Besides
he
is
before
the
throne
as
of
the
same
substance
with
the
Father
&
the
Sonne
:
as
the
seuc̄
eyes
,
&
seuen
hornes
of
the
Lamb.
Moreouer
these
Spirits
are
neuer
said
to
adore
God
,
as
all
other
things
are
.
Finally
,
this
is
that
power
whereby
the
Lambe
opened
the
booke
,
and
loosed
the
seuen
seales
thereof
:
when
none
could
be
found
amongst
all
creatures
by
whom
the
booke
might
be
opened
cha.
5.
Of
these
things
long
agoe
M.
Iohn
Luide
of
Oxford
wrote
learnedly
vnto
me
.
Now
the
holy
Ghost
is
set
in
order
of
words
before
Christ
,
because
there
was
in
that
which
followeth
,
a
long
processe
of
speach
to
be
vsed
concerning
Christ
.
the
[
d
](A16102-e1810-b)
d
These
are
the
seuen
spirits
,
which
are
afterward
chap.
5
ver.
6.
called
the
hornes
and
eyes
of
the
Lambe
,
and
are
now
made
as
a
gard
waiting
vpon
God
.
seuen
Spirites
which
are
before
his
Throne
;
5
And
from
Iesus
Christ
,
[
5
](A16102-e1860-b)
5
A
most
ample
&
graue
commendation
of
Christ
,
first
from
his
offices
,
the
priesthood
and
kingdome
:
secondly
from
his
benefits
,
as
his
loue
towards
vs
,
and
washing
vs
with
his
bloud
,
in
this
verse
;
and
communication
of
his
kingdome
and
priesthood
with
vs
:
thirdly
from
his
eternall
glorie
and
power
,
which
is
alwayes
to
be
celebrated
of
vs
,
ver.
6.
Pinally
from
the
accomplishment
of
all
things
once
to
be
effected
by
him
,
at
his
second
comming
;
what
time
he
shall
openly
destroy
the
wicked
,
&
shall
comfort
the
godly
in
the
truth
ver.
7.
which
is
that
[
‖
](A16102-e1870-b)
‖
Psal.
89.
38.
faithfull
witnesse
,
[
‖
](A16102-e1890-b)
‖
1.
Cor.
15.
21.
Colos.
1.
18.
that
first
begotten
of
the
dead
,
and
that
Prince
of
the
Kings
of
the
earth
;
who
loued
vs
,
and
washed
vs
from
our
sinnes
with
his
owne
[
‖
](A16102-e1920-b)
‖
Heb
9.
14.
1.
Pet.
1.
19.
1.
Iohn
.
1.
9.
blood
:
6
And
made
vs
[
‖
](A16102-e1970-b)
‖
1.
Pet.
2.
5.
Kings
and
Priests
vnto
God
euen
his
Father
;
to
him
be
glorie
,
and
power
for
euermore
,
Amen
.
7
Behold
,
he
commeth
with
[
‖
](A16102-e2010-b)
‖
Esa.
3.
14.
Mat.
24.
30.
Iude.
14.
clouds
,
and
euery
[
e
](A16102-e2050-b)
e
All
men
.
eye
shall
see
him
:
yea
euen
they
which
pierced
him
through
:
and
all
the
kinreds
of
the
earth
shall
waile
before
him
:
Euen
so
,
Amen
.
8
[
6
](A16102-e2080-b)
6
A
confirmation
of
the
salutation
afore
going
,
taken
from
the
words
of
God
himselfe
:
in
which
he
auoucheth
his
operation
in
euerie
singular
creature
,
the
immutable
eternitie
that
is
in
himself
,
&
his
omnipotencie
in
all
things
:
and
concludeth
in
the
vnitie
of
his
owne
essence
,
that
Trinitie
of
persons
which
was
before
spoken
of
.
I
[
‖
](A16102-e2090-b)
‖
Chap.
21.
6.
&
22.
13.
am
[
f
](A16102-e2120-b)
f
I
am
he
,
before
who
there
is
nothing
;
yea
by
whom
euery
thing
that
is
made
,
was
made
and
who
shall
remaine
though
all
they
should
perish
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
that
is
,
the
beginning
and
the
ending
,
saith
the
Lord
,
that
is
,
he
Which
is
,
and
Which
was
,
and
Which
is
to
come
,
euen
that
Almightie
one
.
9
[
7
](A16102-e2170-b)
7
The
narration
,
opening
the
way
to
the
declaring
of
the
authoritie
and
calling
of
S.
Iohn
the
Euangelist
in
this
singular
Reuelation
;
and
to
procure
faith
and
credit
vnto
this
prophesie
.
This
is
the
second
part
of
this
Chapter
,
consisting
of
a
proposition
,
and
an
exposition
.
The
proposition
sheweth
,
first
who
was
called
vnto
this
Reuelation
,
in
what
place
,
and
how
occupied
.
vers.
9.
Then
at
what
time
,
and
by
what
meanes
,
namely
,
by
the
Spirit
and
the
word
;
&
that
on
the
Lords
day
;
which
day
euer
since
the
resurrection
of
Christ
was
consecrated
for
Christians
vnto
the
religion
of
the
Sabboth
:
that
is
to
say
,
to
be
a
day
of
rest
,
ver.
10.
Thirdly
,
who
is
the
author
that
calleth
him
,
and
what
is
the
somme
of
his
calling
.
I
Iohn
,
who
also
am
your
brother
,
and
companion
in
tribulation
,
and
in
the
Kingdome
and
patience
of
Iesus
Christ
,
was
in
the
yle
called
[
g
](A16102-e2180-b)
g
Patmos
is
one
of
the
Iles
of
Sporas
,
whether
Iohn
was
banished
,
as
some
write
.
Patmos
,
for
the
word
of
God
,
and
for
the
witnessing
of
Iesus
Christ
:
10
And
I
was
rapt
in
[
h
](A16102-e2210-b)
h
Thus
is
that
holy
rauishment
expressed
wherewith
the
Prophets
were
rauished
,
and
being
as
it
were
caried
out
of
the
world
,
were
conuersant
with
God
:
and
so
Ezechiel
saith
often
,
that
he
was
caried
from
place
to
place
of
the
Lords
Spirit
,
and
that
the
Spirit
of
the
Lord
fell
vpon
him
.
spirit
on
the
[
i
](A16102-e2220-b)
i
He
calleth
that
the
Lords
day
,
which
Paul
calleth
the
first
day
of
the
weeke
.
1.
Cor.
16.
2.
Lords
day
,
and
hard
behind
me
a
great
voyce
,
as
it
had
bene
of
a
trumper
,
11
Of
one
that
said
,
I
am
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
that
first
and
that
last
:
&
,
That
which
thou
seest
,
write
in
a
booke
,
and
send
it
vnto
the
seuen
Churches
which
are
in
Asia
,
at
Ephesus
,
and
at
Smyrna
,
&
at
Pergamus
,
and
at
Thyatira
,
and
at
Sardis
,
and
at
Philadelphia
,
and
at
Laodicea
.
12
[
8
](A16102-e2290-b)
8
The
exposition
,
declaring
the
third
&
last
point
of
the
proposition
(
for
th'
other
points
are
euident
of
themselues
)
wherin
is
spoken
first
of
the
Author
of
this
calling
,
vnto
the
16
verse
.
Secondly
of
the
calling
it selfe
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
And
first
of
all
,
the
occasion
is
noted
in
this
verse
,
in
that
S.
Iohn
turned
himself
towards
the
vision
:
after
is
set
downe
the
description
of
the
Author
,
in
the
verses
following
.
Then
I
turned
backe
to
[
k
](A16102-e2300-b)
k
To
see
him
whose
voice
he
had
heard
.
see
the
voyce
,
that
spake
with
me
:
[
9
](A16102-e2310-b)
9
The
description
of
the
Author
,
which
is
Christ
:
by
the
candlestickes
that
stand
about
him
,
that
is
,
the
Churches
that
stand
before
him
,
and
depend
vpon
his
direction
,
in
this
verse
:
by
his
properties
,
that
he
is
one
furnished
with
wisedome
and
dexteritie
to
the
atchieuing
of
great
things
,
verse
13.
with
auncient
grauitie
,
and
most
excellent
sight
of
the
eye
,
verse
14.
with
strength
inuincible
,
and
with
a
mightie
word
,
verse
.
15.
By
his
operations
,
that
he
ruleth
the
ministerie
of
his
seruaunts
in
the
Church
,
giueth
effect
there
unto
by
the
sword
of
his
word
,
and
enlightening
althings
by
his
countenance
,
doth
most
mightely
prouide
for
euerie
one
by
his
diuine
prouidence
.
verse
16.
and
when
I
was
turned
,
I
saw
seuen
golden
candlesticks
:
13
And
in
the
midst
of
the
seuen
golden
candlesticks
,
one
like
vnto
the
Sonne
of
man
,
clothed
with
a
garment
downe
to
the
feete
,
and
girded
about
the
pappes
with
a
golden
girdle
.
14
His
head
,
and
haires
were
white
as
white
wooll
,
and
as
snow
;
and
his
eyes
were
as
a
flame
of
fire
;
15
And
his
feete
like
vnto
fine
brasse
,
burning
as
in
a
fornace
:
and
his
voyce
as
the
sound
of
many
waters
.
16
And
he
had
in
his
right
hand
seuen
starres
:
and
out
of
his
mouth
went
a
sharpe
two
edged
sword
:
and
his
face
shone
as
the
sunne
shineth
in
his
strength
.
17
[
10
](A16102-e2410-b)
10
A
religious
feare
,
that
goeth
before
the
calling
of
the
Saints
,
&
their
full
confirmation
to
take
vpon
them
the
vocation
of
God
.
And
when
I
saw
him
,
I
fell
at
his
feete
as
dead
.
[
11
](A16102-e2420-b)
11
A
diuine
confirmation
in
this
calling
,
partly
by
signe
,
and
partly
by
the
word
of
power
.
then
he
laid
his
right
hand
vpon
me
,
saying
vnto
me
,
Feare
not
:
[
12
](A16102-e2430-b)
12
A
most
elegant
description
of
this
calling
,
contained
in
three
things
,
which
are
necessarie
vnto
a
iust
vocation
:
first
the
authoritie
of
him
that
calleth
,
for
that
he
is
the
beginning
and
the
end
of
all
things
,
in
this
verse
;
for
that
he
is
aeternall
and
omnipotent
,
verse
18.
Secondly
the
summe
of
this
propheticall
calling
and
reuelation
,
verse
19.
Lastly
a
declaration
of
those
persons
vnto
whom
this
prophesie
is
by
the
commaundement
of
God
directed
in
the
inscription
thereof
,
verse
20.
I
am
that
[
‖
](A16102-e2440-b)
‖
Esa.
41.
4.
and
44.
6.
first
,
and
that
last
,
18
And
which
am
aliue
;
but
I
was
dead
:
and
behold
I
liue
for
euermore
,
A
men
:
and
I
haue
the
keyes
of
hell
and
of
death
.
19
[
13
](A16102-e2490-b)
13
The
summe
of
this
prophesie
,
that
the
Apostle
must
write
whatsoeuer
he
should
see
,
adding
nothing
,
nor
taking
away
any
thing
,
as
verse
2.
Here
of
there
were
two
parts
:
one
is
a
narration
of
those
things
which
are
,
that
is
,
which
then
are
at
that
time
,
contained
in
the
second
and
third
Chapters
:
the
other
part
is
of
those
things
which
were
to
come
,
contained
in
the
rest
of
this
booke
.
Write
the
things
which
thou
hast
seene
;
both
which
are
,
and
which
shall
come
to
passe
hereafter
.
20
[
14
](A16102-e2510-b)
14
That
is
,
the
thing
which
was
mystically
signified
by
the
particulars
of
the
vision
before
going
.
The
mysterie
of
the
seuen
starres
which
thou
sawest
in
my
right
hand
,
&
the
seuen
golden
candlesticks
,
is
this
;
those
seuen
starres
are
the
[
l
](A16102-e2530-b)
l
By
Angels
,
he
meaneth
the
Ministers
of
the
Churches
.
Angels
of
the
seuen
Churches
:
and
those
seuen
candlesticks
which
thou
sawest
,
are
the
seuen
Churches
.
CHAP.
II
Iohn
is
commaunded
to
write
those
things
,
which
the
Lord
knew
necessarie
,
to
the
Churches
of
Ephesus
,
8
of
the
Smyrnians
,
12
Of
Pergamus
,
18
and
of
Thyatira
,
25
that
they
keepe
those
things
which
they
receiued
of
the
Apostles
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e2650-b)
1
The
former
part
of
this
booke
is
comprised
in
a
narration
of
those
things
which
then
were
,
as
S.
Iohn
taught
vs
chap.
1.
19.
it
belongeth
wholy
vnto
instruction
;
&
in
these
2.
next
chapters
,
containeth
seuen
places
,
according
to
the
number
and
condition
of
those
churches
which
were
named
before
cha.
1.
11
figured
vers.
12.
and
distributed
most
aptly
into
their
Pastors
&
flockes
,
verse
.
20.
which
verse
of
that
Chapter
is
as
it
were
a
passage
vnto
this
first
part
.
Euerie
one
of
these
seuen
places
hath
three
principall
members
,
an
Exordium
taken
from
the
person
of
the
Author
:
a
proposition
,
in
which
is
praise
and
commendation
of
that
which
is
good
,
reprehension
of
that
which
is
euill
:
and
instruction
,
containing
either
an
exhortation
alone
,
or
withall
a
dissuasion
opposite
vnto
it
:
and
a
conclusion
stirring
vp
vnto
attention
,
by
diuine
promises
.
And
this
first
place
is
vnto
the
Pastors
of
the
Church
of
Ephesus
.
the
Angel
of
the
Church
of
Ephesus
write
;
[
2
](A16102-e2660-b)
2
The
exordium
;
wherein
are
contained
the
speciall
praises
of
Christ
Jesus
the
Author
of
this
prophesie
,
out
of
the
16.
and
13.
verses
of
the
first
Chapter
.
These
things
saith
he
that
holdeth
those
seauen
starres
in
his
right
hand
,
and
walketh
in
the
middes
of
those
seuen
golden
candlestickes
.
2
[
3
](A16102-e2680-b)
3
The
proposition
,
first
commending
the
Pastour
of
this
Church
,
verse
2.
3.
then
reprouing
him
,
verse
4.
after
informing
him
,
and
withall
threatening
that
he
will
translate
the
Church
to
another
place
;
verse
5.
This
commination
or
threat
Christ
mittigateth
by
a
kinde
of
correction
,
calling
to
minde
the
particular
vertue
and
pietie
of
that
Church
,
which
God
neuer
leaueth
without
recompence
.
verse
.
6.
Concerning
the
Nicolaitans
see
after
vpon
the
15.
verse
.
I
Know
thy
workes
,
and
thy
labour
,
and
thy
patience
;
and
how
thou
canst
not
beare
them
which
are
euill
,
and
doest
examine
them
which
say
they
are
Apostles
,
and
are
not
,
and
hast
found
them
liars
.
3
And
thou
wast
burdened
,
and
hast
patience
;
and
for
my
Names
sake
hast
laboured
,
and
wast
not
wearied
.
4
Neuertheles
,
I
haue
somewhat
[
a
](A16102-e2720-b)
a
To
deale
with
thee
for
.
against
thee
,
which
is
,
that
thou
hast
giuen
ouer
thy
first
loue
.
5
Remember
therefore
from
whence
thou
art
fallen
,
and
repent
,
and
do
the
first
workes
:
otherwise
I
will
come
against
thee
shortly
;
and
will
remoue
thy
candlesticke
out
of
his
place
,
except
thou
amend
.
6
But
this
thou
hast
,
that
thou
hatest
the
workes
of
the
Nicolaitans
;
which
also
I
hate
.
7
[
4
](A16102-e2760-b)
4
The
conclusion
,
containing
a
commaundement
of
attention
,
and
a
promise
of
euerlasting
life
,
shadowed
out
in
a
figure
,
of
which
Gen.
2.
9.
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
,
what
the
Spirit
saith
vnto
the
churches
,
To
him
that
ouercommeth
,
wil
I
giue
to
eat
,
of
that
tree
of
life
which
is
in
[
5
](A16102-e2770-b)
5
That
is
,
in
Paradise
;
after
the
manner
of
the
Hebrew
phrase
.
the
midst
of
the
[
b
](A16102-e2780-b)
b
Thus
Christ
speaketh
as
he
is
Mediatour
.
Paradise
of
God
.
8
¶
[
6
](A16102-e2800-b)
6
The
second
place
is
vnto
the
pastors
of
the
church
of
the
Smyrneans
.
The
exordium
is
taken
out
of
the
17.
and
18
verses
of
the
first
Chapter
.
And
vnto
the
Angell
of
the
Church
of
the
[
c
](A16102-e2810-b)
c
Smyrna
was
one
of
the
cities
of
Ionia
in
Asia
.
Smyrnians
write
,
These
things
saith
he
that
is
first
,
and
last
,
which
was
dead
and
is
aliue
:
9
[
7
](A16102-e2830-b)
7
The
proposition
of
praise
is
in
this
verse
;
and
of
exhortation
ioyned
with
promise
,
is
in
the
next
verse
.
I
know
thy
workes
,
and
tribulation
,
and
pouertie
(
but
thou
art
rich
)
and
the
blasphemy
of
them
,
which
say
they
are
Iewes
,
and
are
not
,
but
are
the
Synagogue
of
Satan
.
10
Feare
none
of
those
things
,
which
thou
shalt
suffer
:
behold
,
it
shall
come
to
passe
,
that
the
diuell
shall
cast
some
of
you
into
prison
that
ye
may
be
tried
;
and
ye
shall
haue
[
8
](A16102-e2860-b)
8
That
is
,
often
yeares
.
For
so
commonly
both
in
this
booke
and
in
Daniel
,
yeares
are
signified
by
the
name
of
dayes
;
that
God
thereby
might
declare
,
that
the
space
of
time
is
appointed
by
him
,
and
the
same
very
short
.
Now
because
S.
Iohn
wrote
this
booke
in
the
end
of
Domitian
the
Emperour
his
raigne
,
as
Iustinus
and
Irenaeus
do
witnesse
,
it
is
altogether
necessarie
that
this
should
be
referred
vnto
that
persecution
which
was
done
by
the
authoritie
of
the
Emperour
Traian
:
who
began
to
make
hauocke
of
the
Christian
Church
in
the
tenth
yeare
of
his
raigne
,
as
the
historiographers
do
write
;
and
his
bloudie
persecution
continued
untill
Adrian
the
Emperour
had
succeeded
in
his
place
.
The
space
of
which
time
is
precisely
teny
eares
which
are
here
mentioned
.
tribulation
for
ten
dayes
:
be
thou
faithfull
vnto
the
death
,
and
I
will
giue
thee
the
crowne
of
life
.
11
[
9
](A16102-e2880-b)
9
The
conclusion
as
verse
7.
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
what
the
Spirit
saith
to
the
churches
:
He
that
ouercommeth
,
shal
not
be
hurt
[
10
](A16102-e2890-b)
10
See
Chapt.
20.
6.
of
the
second
death
.
12
¶
[
11
](A16102-e2910-b)
11
The
third
place
is
vnto
the
Pastors
of
Pergamus
.
The
exordium
is
taken
out
of
the
16
,
verse
of
the
first
Chapter
.
And
to
the
Angel
of
the
church
which
is
at
[
d
](A16102-e2920-b)
d
Pergamus
was
the
name
of
a
famous
citie
in
old
time
in
Asia
,
where
the
Kings
of
the
Aitalians
were
alwayes
resident
.
Pergamus
write
,
These
things
saith
he
which
hath
that
sharpe
sword
with
two
edges
.
1
3
[
12
](A16102-e2940-b)
12
The
proposition
of
praise
is
in
this
verse
;
of
reprehension
in
the
two
following
;
and
of
exhortation
ioyned
with
a
conditionall
threate
,
verse
16.
Now
this
Antipas
was
the
Angell
or
minister
of
the
Church
of
Pergamus
as
Aretas
writeth
.
I
Knowe
thy
workes
,
and
where
thou
dwelleste
,
uen
where
Satans
throne
is
;
&
that
thou
keepest
my
Name
,
and
hast
not
denied
my
saith
,
euen
in
[
c
](A16102-e2960-b)
c
The
faith
of
them
of
Pergamus
is
so
much
the
more
highly
commended
,
because
they
remained
constant
euen
in
the
verie
heate
of
persecution
.
those
dayes
when
Antipas
my
faithfull
martyr
was
staine
among
you
,
where
Satan
dwelleth
.
14
But
I
haue
a
few
things
against
thee
;
that
thou
hast
there
them
that
maintaine
the
doctrine
of
[
‖
](A16102-e2980-b)
‖
Num.
24.
14.
and
25.
1.
Balaam
,
which
taught
Balac
to
put
a
stumbling
blocke
before
the
children
of
Israel
,
that
they
should
[
f
](A16102-e3010-b)
f
That
which
is
here
spoken
of
things
offered
to
Idols
,
is
meant
of
the
same
kinde
which
Paule
speaketh
of
1.
Co.
10.
14.
eate
of
things
sacrificed
vnto
idolls
,
and
commit
fornication
:
15
Euen
so
hast
thou
them
,
that
maintain
the
doctrin
of
the
[
13
](A16102-e3050-b)
13
Which
follow
the
footesteps
of
Balaam
,
and
such
as
are
abandoned
vnto
all
filthines
,
is
he
shewed
in
the
verse
a
foregoing
&
is
here
signified
by
a
note
of
similitude
And
thus
also
must
the
6.
verse
be
vnderstood
.
For
this
matter
especially
Irenaeus
must
be
consulted
withal
.
Nicolaitans
,
which
thing
I
hate
.
16
Repent
,
or
else
I
will
come
against
thee
shortly
,
and
will
fight
against
them
with
the
sword
of
my
mouth
.
17
[
14
](A16102-e3080-b)
14
The
conclusion
,
standing
of
exhortation
as
before
and
of
promise
.
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
what
the
Spirit
saith
vnto
the
Churches
,
To
him
that
ouercommeth
,
will
I
giue
to
eate
[
15
](A16102-e3090-b)
15
The
bread
of
life
,
inuisible
,
spirituall
,
and
heauenly
,
which
is
kept
secretly
with
God
,
from
before
all
eternitie
.
of
that
[
g
](A16102-e3100-b)
g
He
alludeth
to
that
sermon
which
we
read
of
,
Ioh.
6
and
to
the
place
we
finde
Psalm
.
105.
40.
Manna
that
is
hid
,
and
will
giue
him
a
[
h
](A16102-e3130-b)
h
Arteas
writeth
,
that
such
a
stone
was
wont
to
be
giuen
to
wrestlers
at
games
,
or
else
that
such
stones
did
in
old
time
witnesse
the
quitting
of
a
man
.
[
16
](A16102-e3140-b)
16
Which
is
a
signe
and
witnesse
of
forgiuenesse
and
remission
of
sinnes
,
of
righteousnesse
and
true
holinesse
,
&
of
puritie
incorrupted
,
after
that
the
oldman
is
killed
.
white
stone
,
and
in
the
stone
a
new
[
17
](A16102-e3150-b)
17
A
signe
and
testimonie
of
newnes
of
life
in
righteousnes
and
true
holinesse
by
putting
on
the
new
man
,
whom
none
doth
inwardly
know
,
saue
the
spirit
of
man
which
is
in
himselfe
,
the
praise
wherof
is
not
of
〈◊〉
but
of
God
.
●●
.
2.
20.
name
written
,
which
no
man
knoweth
sauing
hee
that
receiueth
it
.
18
¶
And
vnto
[
18
](A16102-e3170-b)
18
The
fourth
place
is
vnto
the
Pastors
of
Thyatira
.
The
exordium
is
taken
out
of
the
14.
&
15.
verses
of
the
first
Chapter
.
the
Angell
of
the
Church
which
is
at
Thyatira
write
,
These
thinges
saith
the
Sonne
of
God
,
which
hath
eyes
like
vnto
a
flame
of
fire
,
and
feete
like
to
fine
brasse
.
19
I
Knowe
[
19
](A16102-e3190-b)
19
The
proposition
of
prayse
is
in
this
verse
:
of
reprehension
,
for
that
they
tollerated
with
them
the
doctrine
of
vnrighteousnesse
and
vngodlinesse
,
is
vers.
20
;
the
authors
whereof
though
they
were
called
backe
of
God
,
yet
repented
not
,
vers.
21.
whereunto
is
added
a
most
heauie
threatening
vers.
22.
&
23
:
of
a
conditionall
promise
,
and
of
exhortation
to
hold
fast
the
truth
,
is
in
the
two
verses
following
.
thy
workes
and
thy
loue
,
and
[
i
](A16102-e3200-b)
i
So
he
calleth
those
offices
of
charitie
which
are
done
to
the
Saints
.
seruice
,
and
faith
,
and
thy
patience
,
and
thy
workes
,
and
that
they
are
mo
at
the
last
,
then
at
the
first
.
20
Notwithstanding
,
I
haue
a
fewe
things
against
thee
,
that
thou
sufferest
the
woman
lezabell
which
calleth
her selfe
a
Prophetesse
,
to
teach
and
to
seduce
my
seruants
,
to
make
them
commit
[
k
](A16102-e3230-b)
k
By
fornication
of
ten
times
in
the
Scripture
Idolatrie
is
meant
.
fornication
,
and
to
eat
meates
sacrificed
vnto
idoles
.
21
And
I
gaue
her
space
to
repent
of
her
fornication
,
and
she
repented
not
.
22
Beholde
,
I
will
cast
her
into
a
bed
,
and
them
that
commit
fornication
with
her
,
into
great
affliction
,
except
they
repent
them
of
their
workes
.
23
And
I
will
kill
her
children
with
death
:
and
all
the
Churches
shall
knowe
that
I
am
he
which
[
‖
](A16102-e3270-b)
‖
1.
Sam.
16.
7.
Psal.
7.
10.
Iere
11.
20.
and
17.
10.
doeth
search
the
reines
and
hearts
:
and
I
will
giue
vnto
euery
one
of
you
according
vnto
your
workes
.
24
And
vnto
you
I
say
,
and
the
rest
of
them
of
Thyatira
,
As
many
as
hold
not
this
learning
,
neither
haue
approued
the
[
l
](A16102-e3330-b)
l
He
pointeth
out
the
bragging
of
certaine
men
,
which
boasted
of
their
deepe
that
is
plentifull
and
common
knowledge
which
notwithstanding
is
〈◊〉
depth
of
Satan
(
as
they
speake
)
I
will
[
m
](A16102-e3340-b)
m
I
will
speake
no
worse
thing
against
you
,
being
coment
to
haue
showed
you
what
I
require
to
be
in
you
.
put
vpon
you
none
other
burden
.
25
But
,
that
which
ye
haue
alreadie
,
hold
fast
till
I
come
.
26
[
20
](A16102-e3370-b)
20
The
conclusion
,
wherein
Christ
assureth
vnto
his
seruants
the
communion
of
his
kingdom
and
glorie
,
in
this
verse
,
and
that
following
:
and
commaundeth
an
holy
attention
;
in
the
last
verse
.
For
he
that
ouercommeth
and
keepeth
my
workes
vnto
the
end
,
to
him
will
I
[
21
](A16102-e3380-b)
21
That
is
,
I
will
make
him
a
king
,
by
communion
with
me
,
and
my
fellow
heire
:
as
it
is
promised
Mat.
19.
28.
and
25.
34.
Rom.
8.
17.
and
1.
Cor.
63.
Ephes.
26.
and
2.
Tim.
2.
12
and
Apoc.
3.
21.
and
44.
giue
power
ouer
the
nations
.
27
[
‖
](A16102-e3400-b)
‖
Psal.
2.
9.
And
he
shall
rule
them
with
a
rod
of
yron
:
and
as
the
vessels
of
a
potter
,
shall
they
be
broken
:
euen
as
I
receiued
of
my
Father
.
28
And
I
will
[
22
](A16102-e3440-b)
22
The
brightnesse
of
greatest
glorie
and
honour
,
nearest
approching
vnto
the
light
of
Christ
,
who
is
the
Sonne
of
righteousnesse
and
our
head
.
Matth
,
4.
giue
him
a
morning
starre
.
29
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
what
the
Spirit
saith
to
the
Churches
.
CHAP.
III.
1
The
fift
Epistle
sent
to
the
Pastours
of
the
Church
of
Sardis
,
7
of
Philadelphia
,
14
and
of
the
Laodiceans
,
16
that
they
be
not
lukewarme
,
20
but
endeuour
to
further
Gods
glorie
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e3560-b)
1
The
fift
place
is
vnto
the
Pastours
of
Sardis
.
The
exordium
is
taken
out
of
the
fourth
and
16.
verses
of
the
first
chapter
.
ANd
vnto
the
Angell
of
the
church
which
is
at
[
a
](A16102-e3570-b)
a
Sardis
is
the
name
of
a
most
florishing
&
famous
citie
,
where
the
Kings
of
Lydia
kept
their
Courts
.
Sardis
write
,
These
things
saith
he
that
hath
those
seuen
Spirits
of
God
,
and
those
seuen
starres
,
[
2
](A16102-e3580-b)
2
The
proposition
of
reproofe
is
in
this
verse
:
of
exhortation
ioyned
with
a
threatning
,
in
the
two
verses
that
follow
:
&
of
qualification
by
way
of
correction
,
vnto
the
comfort
of
the
good
which
yet
remained
there
,
verse
4.
I
know
thy
workes
:
that
thou
hast
a
[
b
](A16102-e3590-b)
b
Thou
art
said
to
liue
,
but
art
dead
in
deed
.
name
that
thou
liuest
,
but
thou
art
dead
.
2
Be
awake
and
strengthen
the
things
which
remaine
,
that
are
[
c
](A16102-e3610-b)
c
Other
things
,
whose
state
is
such
,
that
they
are
now
going
,
and
vnlesse
they
be
confirmed
,
will
perish
forthwith
.
readie
to
dye
:
for
I
haue
not
found
thy
workes
perfect
before
God
.
3
Remember
therefore
,
what
thou
hast
receiued
and
heard
;
and
hold
fast
,
and
repent
:
[
‖
](A16102-e3630-b)
‖
Chap.
16.
13.
1.
Thes.
5.
2.
2.
Pet.
3.
10.
if
thou
wilt
not
watch
,
I
will
come
against
thee
as
a
theef
,
and
thou
shalt
not
know
what
houre
I
will
come
against
thee
.
4
Notwithstanding
thou
hast
a
few
persons
yet
in
Sardis
,
[
3
](A16102-e3690-b)
3
That
is
,
who
haue
with
all
Religion
garded
them selues
from
sinne
and
contagion
,
euen
from
the
very
shew
of
〈◊〉
,
as
S.
Iude
exhorteth
,
vers
23.
which
haue
not
defiled
their
garments
,
and
therefore
they
shall
walke
with
me
in
[
4
](A16102-e3700-b)
4
Pure
from
all
spot
,
and
shining
with
glorie
So
it
is
to
be
vnderstood
alwayes
hereafter
,
as
in
the
next
verse
.
white
:
for
they
are
[
d
](A16102-e3710-b)
d
They
are
meet
and
fie
,
to
wit
,
because
they
are
in
stified
in
Christ
as
they
haue
truly
shewed
it
:
for
he
is
righteous
that
worketh
righteousnes
;
but
so
,
as
the
tree
bringeth
forth
the
fruit
,
Looke
Rom.
8.
18.
worthie
.
5
He
that
[
5
](A16102-e3740-b)
5
The
conclusion
,
standing
vpon
a
promise
;
and
a
commandement
,
as
before
.
ouer
commeth
,
shal
be
clothed
in
white
aray
,
and
I
will
neuer
put
his
name
out
of
the
[
‖
](A16102-e3750-b)
‖
Chap.
20.
12.
and
21.
27.
Philip.
4.
3.
booke
of
life
;
but
I
wil
confesse
his
name
before
my
Father
,
and
before
his
Angels
.
6
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
,
what
the
Spirit
saith
vnto
the
Churches
.
7
¶
[
6
](A16102-e3810-b)
6
The
sixt
place
,
is
vnto
the
Pastours
of
Philadelphia
.
The
exordium
is
taken
out
of
the
18.
verse
of
the
first
Chapter
.
And
vnto
the
Angell
of
the
Church
which
is
at
Philadelphia
write
,
These
things
saith
he
that
is
Holy
,
and
True
,
which
hath
the
[
e
](A16102-e3820-b)
e
All
power
of
rule
in
commanding
and
forbidding
,
deliuering
,
and
punishing
.
And
the
house
of
Dauid
is
the
Church
,
and
the
continuall
promise
of
Dauids
kingdome
belongeth
to
Christ
.
key
of
Dauid
,
which
openeth
and
no
man
shutteth
,
and
shutteth
and
no
man
openeth
.
8
[
7
](A16102-e3840-b)
7
The
proposition
of
prayse
is
in
this
verse
,
of
promises
,
to
bring
home
againe
those
that
wander
,
verse
.
9.
and
to
preserue
the
godly
,
verse
10.
and
of
exhortation
verse
11.
I
know
thy
workes
:
behold
,
I
haue
set
before
thee
an
open
doore
,
and
no
man
can
shut
it
:
because
thou
hast
a
litle
strength
,
and
hast
kept
my
word
,
and
hast
not
denied
my
Name
.
9
Behold
,
I
will
[
f
](A16102-e3860-b)
f
I
will
bring
them
to
that
case
.
make
them
of
the
Synagogue
of
Satan
,
that
is
,
them
which
call
themselues
Iewes
and
are
not
,
but
do
lye
:
behold
,
I
say
,
I
will
make
them
,
that
they
shall
come
[
8
](A16102-e3880-b)
8
That
is
,
fall
downe
and
worship
,
either
thee
ciuillie
,
or
Christ
religiously
,
at
thy
feete
,
(
and
thus
I
had
rather
take
it
)
whether
here
in
the
Church
(
which
seemeth
more
proper
to
the
argument
of
this
place
)
or
there
in
the
world
to
come
.
For
Christ
verely
shall
fulfill
his
word
.
and
worship
before
thy
feet
,
and
shall
know
that
I
haue
loued
thee
.
10
Because
thou
hast
[
g
](A16102-e3900-b)
g
Because
thou
hast
bene
patient
and
constant
,
as
I
would
my
seruants
should
be
.
kept
the
word
of
my
pacience
,
therefore
I
will
deliuer
thee
from
the
houre
of
tentation
,
which
shall
come
vpon
all
the
world
,
to
trie
them
that
dwell
vpon
the
earth
.
11
Beholde
,
I
come
shortly
:
hold
that
which
thou
hast
;
that
no
man
take
thy
crowne
.
12
[
9
](A16102-e3930-b)
9
The
conclusion
,
which
containeth
a
promise
,
and
a
commaundement
.
Him
that
ouercommeth
,
will
I
make
a
pillar
in
the
Temple
of
[
‖
](A16102-e3940-b)
‖
See
.
2.
7.
my
God
;
and
he
shall
go
no
more
out
:
[
10
](A16102-e3960-b)
10
That
is
,
the
new
man
shall
be
termed
after
his
father
,
mother
,
and
head
Christ
.
and
I
will
write
vpon
him
the
name
of
my
God
,
and
the
name
of
the
Citie
of
my
God
,
(
which
is
the
new
Hierusalem
,
which
commeth
downe
out
of
heauen
from
my
God
)
and
my
new
Name
.
13
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
what
the
Spirit
saith
vnto
the
Churches
.
14
[
11
](A16102-e4000-b)
11
The
seuenth
place
is
vnto
the
pastours
of
the
church
of
Laodicea
.
The
exordium
is
taken
out
of
the
fift
verse
of
the
first
chapter
.
And
vnto
the
Angell
of
the
Church
of
the
Laodiceans
write
,
These
things
saith
[
h
](A16102-e4010-b)
h
Amen
soundeth
as
much
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
as
Truth
,
or
Trueth
it selfe
.
Amen
,
that
faithfull
and
true
witnesse
,
that
[
i
](A16102-e4020-b)
i
Of
whom
all
things
created
haue
their
beginning
.
beginning
of
the
creatures
of
God
:
15
[
12
](A16102-e4040-b)
12
The
proposition
of
reproofe
is
in
this
verse
;
whereunto
is
adioyned
a
threatening
,
verse
16.
with
a
confirmation
declaring
the
same
,
verse
17.
and
of
exhortation
vnto
faith
and
repentance
verse
18.
19.
whereunto
is
added
a
conditionall
promise
,
verse
20.
I
know
thy
woorkes
;
that
thou
art
neither
cold
nor
hote
:
I
would
thou
werest-cold
or
hote
.
16
Therfore
,
because
thou
art
luke warme
,
and
neither
cold
nor
hote
,
it
will
come
to
passe
,
that
I
shall
spew
thee
out
of
my
mouth
.
17
For
thou
saist
,
I
am
rich
,
and
increased
with
goods
,
and
haue
neede
of
nothing
;
and
knowest
not
how
thou
art
wretched
,
and
miserable
,
[
13
](A16102-e4070-b)
13
The
spirituall
miserie
of
men
is
metaphoricallie
expressed
in
three
paints
:
vnto
which
are
matched
as
correspondent
those
remedies
which
are
offered
vers.
18.
and
poore
and
blind
,
and
naked
.
18
I
counsell
thee
to
buy
of
me
golde
tryed
by
the
fire
,
that
thou
mayest
be
made
riche
:
and
white
raiment
,
that
thou
mayest
be
clothed
,
and
that
thy
filthie
nakednesse
doe
not
appeare
:
and
annoint
thine
eyes
with
eye
salue
,
that
thou
maist
see
.
19
As
many
as
I
loue
[
‖
](A16102-e4100-b)
‖
Prou.
3.
12.
Hebr.
12
5.
I
rebuke
and
chasten
:
be
[
k
](A16102-e4130-b)
k
Zeale
is
set
against
them
which
are
neither
hote
nor
cold
.
zealous
therefore
and
amend
.
20
Behold
,
I
stand
at
the
doore
,
and
knocke
,
[
14
](A16102-e4150-b)
14
This
must
be
taken
after
the
manner
of
an
allegorie
,
as
Iohn
.
14.
23.
If
any
man
heare
my
voyce
and
open
the
doore
,
I
will
come
in
vnto
him
,
and
will
suppe
with
him
,
and
he
with
me
.
21
[
15
](A16102-e4170-b)
15
The
conclusion
,
consisting
of
a
promise
,
as
chap.
2.
vers
26.
&
of
an
exhortation
.
Hitherto
hath
bene
the
first
part
of
the
booke
of
the
Apocalypse
.
To
him
that
ouercommeth
,
will
I
graunt
to
sit
with
me
in
my
throne
,
euen
as
I
ouercame
,
and
sit
with
my
Father
in
his
throne
.
22.
Let
him
that
hath
an
eare
,
heare
what
the
Spirit
saith
vnto
the
Churches
.
CHAP.
IIII.
1
Another
vision
containing
the
glorie
of
Gods
Maiestie
:
8
Which
is
magnified
of
the
soure
beastes
,
10
and
the
soure
and
twentie
Elders
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e4280-b)
1
Hereafter
foloweth
the
second
part
of
this
booke
,
altogether
propheticall
,
foretelling
those
things
which
were
to
come
,
as
was
said
before
Chap.
1.
19.
This
is
deuided
into
two
histories
:
one
common
vnto
the
whole
world
,
vnto
the
ninth
Chapter
:
and
another
singular
,
of
the
Church
of
God
thence
vnto
the
22.
Chapter
.
And
these
histories
are
said
to
be
described
in
seuerall
bookes
,
Chapter
.
5.
1.
and
10
2.
Now
this
first
verse
is
as
it
were
a
passage
from
the
former
part
vnto
this
second
:
where
it
is
said
,
that
the
heauen
was
opened
,
that
is
,
that
heauenly
things
were
vnlocked
;
and
that
a
voyce
as
of
a
trumpet
sounded
in
heauen
,
to
stirre
vp
the
Apostle
,
and
call
him
to
the
vnderstanding
of
things
to
come
.
The
first
historie
hath
two
partes
,
〈…〉
causes
of
things
done
,
and
of
this
whole
Reuelation
,
in
this
and
the
next
Chapter
:
An
other
of
the
Actes
done
,
in
the
next
foure
Chapters
.
The
principall
causes
according
to
the
distinction
of
persons
in
the
vnitie
of
the
diuine
essence
,
and
according
to
the
oeconomie
or
dispensation
thereof
,
are
two
.
One
the
beginning
which
none
can
approch
vnto
,
that
is
,
God
the
Father
,
of
whom
is
spoken
in
this
Chapter
:
The
other
,
the
Sonne
,
who
is
the
meane
cause
,
easie
to
be
approched
vnto
,
in
respect
that
he
is
God
and
man
in
one
person
:
of
whom
Chapter
5.
AFter
this
I
looked
,
&
behold
,
a
doore
was
open
in
heauen
;
and
the
first
voyce
which
I
heard
,
as
it
were
of
a
trumpet
talking
with
me
,
said
,
Come
vp
hither
,
and
I
will
shewe
thee
the
things
which
must
be
done
hereafter
.
2
And
[
2
](A16102-e4300-b)
2
The
manner
of
Reuelation
,
as
before
.
1.
10.
immediatly
I
was
rapt
[
a
](A16102-e4320-b)
a
Looke
Ch.
1.
10
in
the
Spirit
;
[
3
](A16102-e4340-b)
3
A
description
of
God
the
Father
,
and
of
his
glorie
in
the
heauens
,
framed
vnto
the
maner
of
men
;
by
his
office
,
nature
,
companie
attending
,
effect
,
instruments
,
and
euents
that
follow
afterwards
.
In
this
verse
he
is
presented
in
office
a
iudge
,
as
Abraham
sayd
Gen.
18.
which
is
declared
by
his
throne
,
as
an
ensigne
of
iudgement
,
and
his
sitting
thereupon
.
and
behold
,
a
throne
was
set
in
heauen
,
and
one
sate
vpon
the
throne
.
3
[
4
](A16102-e4360-b)
4
By
his
nature
,
in
that
he
is
the
Father
,
most
glorious
in
his
owne
person
,
and
with
his
glorie
ouer
shining
all
other
things
.
And
he
that
sate
,
was
to
looke
vpon
,
like
vnto
a
Iasper
stone
,
and
a
Sardine
;
and
there
was
a
raine
bow
round
about
the
throne
,
in
sight
like
to
an
Emeraude
.
4
[
5
](A16102-e4390-b)
5
By
the
companie
attending
about
him
,
in
that
,
as
that
most
high
iudge
,
he
is
accompanied
with
the
most
honorable
attendaunce
of
Prophetes
and
Apostles
,
both
of
the
old
and
new
Church
,
whom
Christ
hath
made
to
be
Priests
and
Kings
,
Chap.
1.
65.
10.
And
round
about
the
throne
were
foure
and
twentie
thrones
,
and
vpon
the
thrones
I
saw
foure
and
twentie
Elders
sitting
,
clothed
in
white
raiment
,
and
had
on
their
heads
crownes
of
gold
.
5
[
6
](A16102-e4420-b)
6
By
effectes
,
in
that
most
mightely
he
shaketh
all
things
by
his
voyce
and
word
,
as
Psalme
29.
3.
and
with
the
light
of
his
spirit
and
prouidence
peruseth
and
passeth
through
all
.
And
out
of
that
throne
proceeded
lightnings
,
and
thundrings
,
and
voyces
:
and
there
were
seuen
lampes
of
fire
burning
before
the
throne
,
which
are
the
seuen
Spirits
of
God
.
6
[
7
](A16102-e4440-b)
7
By
instruments
vsed
,
in
that
he
both
hath
a
most
readie
treasu●●
〈…〉
it
were
a
worke-house
excellentlie
furnished
with
all
things
,
vnto
the
executing
of
his
will
,
which
things
flow
from
his
commandement
;
as
is
repeated
Chapter
15.
2
:
And
hath
also
the
Angels
most
readie
administers
of
his
counsels
and
pleasure
vnto
all
partes
of
the
world
;
continuallie
watching
,
(
in
this
verse
)
working
by
reason
,
otherwise
then
the
instruments
without
life
last
mentioned
;
couragious
as
Lyons
,
mightie
as
Bulles
,
wise
as
men
,
swift
as
Eagles
,
verse
7.
most
apt
vnto
all
purposes
,
as
furnished
with
wings
on
euerie
part
,
most
pearcing
of
sight
,
and
finally
pure
and
perfect
spirites
,
alwayes
in
continuall
motion
,
verse
8.
Also
before
the
throne
there
was
a
sea
of
glasse
like
vnto
cristall
:
and
betweene
the
throne
,
&
the
things
that
were
round
about
the
throne
,
were
foure
beastes
full
of
eyes
before
and
behind
.
7
The
first
beast
was
like
a
Lyon
,
and
the
second
beast
like
a
Bull
,
and
the
third
beast
had
a
face
as
a
man
,
and
the
fourth
beast
was
like
a
flying
Eagle
.
8
And
the
[
b
](A16102-e4510-b)
b
Euery
beast
had
sixe
wings
.
foure
beastes
had
eche
one
of
them
sixe
wings
about
him
,
and
they
were
full
of
eyes
within
;
and
they
ceased
not
[
8
](A16102-e4520-b)
8
By
euents
,
in
that
for
all
the
causes
before
mentioned
.
God
is
glorified
both
of
Angels
as
holy
,
Iudge
,
omnipotent
,
eternall
,
and
immutable
verse
8.
and
also
after
their
example
,
he
is
glorified
of
holy
men
(
verse
9.
)
in
signe
and
in
speach
verse
10.
11.
day
nor
night
,
saying
,
Holie
,
Holie
,
Holie
Lord
God
almightie
,
Which
Was
,
and
Which
Is
,
and
Which
Is
to
come
.
9
And
when
those
beastes
[
c
](A16102-e4540-b)
c
God
is
said
to
haue
glorie
,
honour
,
kingdome
,
and
such
like
,
giuen
vnto
him
,
when
we
godlie
and
reuerentlie
set
forth
that
which
is
properlie
and
onely
his
.
gaue
glorie
,
and
honour
,
&
thankes
to
him
that
sate
on
the
throne
,
which
liueth
for
euer
and
euer
,
10
[
9
](A16102-e4560-b)
9
Three
signes
of
diuine
honour
geuen
vnto
God
;
prostration
or
falling
downe
,
adoration
,
and
casting
their
crownes
before
God
;
in
which
the
godlie
,
though
made
kings
by
Christ
,
do
willinglie
emptie
them selues
of
all
glorie
,
moued
with
a
religious
respect
of
the
maiestie
of
God
.
The
foure
and
twentie
Elders
fell
downe
before
him
that
sate
on
the
throne
,
and
worshipped
him
that
liueth
for
euermore
,
and
cast
their
crownes
before
the
throne
,
saying
,
11
[
10
](A16102-e4580-b)
10
The
summe
of
their
speach
:
that
all
glorie
must
be
giuen
vnto
God
:
the
reason
,
because
he
is
the
eternall
beginning
of
all
things
,
from
whose
onely
will
they
haue
their
being
,
and
are
gouerned
,
&
finally
in
all
respectes
are
that
which
they
are
.
Thou
art
[
‖
](A16102-e4590-b)
‖
Chap.
5.
12.
worthy
,
O
Lord
,
[
11
](A16102-e4610-b)
11
That
is
,
that
thou
shouldest
challenge
the
same
to
thy selfe
alone
.
But
as
for
vs
,
we
are
vnworthie
that
euen
by
thy
goodnesse
we
should
be
made
partakers
of
this
glorie
.
And
hitherto
hath
bene
handled
the
principall
cause
vnapprocheable
,
which
is
God
.
to
receiue
glorie
and
honour
,
and
power
:
for
thou
hast
created
all
things
;
and
by
thy
will
they
are
,
and
haue
bene
created
.
CHAP.
V.
1
The
booke
sealed
with
seuen
seales
.
3
which
none
could
open
,
6
that
Lambe
of
God
9
is
thought
worthie
to
open
,
12
euen
by
the
consent
of
all
the
companie
of
heauen
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e4720-b)
1
A
passage
vnto
the
second
principal
cause
,
which
is
the
sonne
of
God
,
God
and
man
,
the
mediatour
of
all
,
as
the
eternall
word
of
God
the
Father
,
manifested
in
the
flesh
.
This
chapter
hath
two
parts
:
one
that
prepareth
the
way
vnto
the
Reuelation
by
rehearsall
of
the
occasions
that
did
occurre
,
in
the
first
foure
verses
.
Another
,
the
historie
of
the
Reuelation
of
Christ
,
thence
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
[
2
](A16102-e4740-b)
2
That
is
,
in
the
very
right
hand
of
God
.
right
hand
of
him
that
sate
vpon
the
throne
,
[
3
](A16102-e4750-b)
3
Here
are
shewed
the
occasions
for
which
this
principall
cause
,
and
his
Reuelation
was
also
necessarie
:
the
same
are
three
:
the
first
a
present
vision
of
the
booke
of
the
counsels
of
God
,
concerning
the
gouernment
of
this
whole
world
,
which
booke
is
said
to
be
laid
vp
with
the
Father
as
it
were
in
his
hand
:
but
shut
and
vnknowen
vnto
all
creatures
,
in
this
verse
.
The
second
is
a
religious
desire
of
the
Angels
of
God
,
to
vnderstand
the
mysteries
of
this
booke
,
vers.
2.
whereof
see
1.
Pet.
1.
12.
The
third
is
a
lamentation
of
S.
Iohn
&
all
the
godly
moued
by
the
same
desire
,
vers
4.
when
they
saw
that
it
was
a
thing
vnpossible
for
any
creature
to
effect
:
which
is
declared
in
the
third
verse
.
a
booke
written
within
,
and
on
the
backside
,
sealed
with
seuen
seales
.
2
And
I
sawe
a
mightie
Angell
,
which
proclamed
with
a
loud
voyce
;
Who
is
worthie
to
open
the
booke
,
and
to
loose
the
seales
thereof
?
3
[
4
](A16102-e4780-b)
4
Thus
,
neither
of
them
that
are
in
heauen
,
nor
of
them
which
are
in
the
earth
,
&c.
And
this
I
like
better
.
Now
this
enumeration
of
partes
is
sufficient
to
the
denying
of
the
whole
.
For
of
the
creatures
,
one
sort
is
in
heauen
,
aboue
the
earth
;
another
in
the
earth
;
and
another
vnder
the
earth
,
in
the
sea
,
as
is
after
declared
,
verse
13.
But
none
in
heauen
,
nor
on
earth
,
neither
vnder
the
earth
,
was
able
to
open
the
booke
,
neither
to
looke
therein
.
4
I
therefore
wept
much
,
because
no
man
was
founde
worthie
to
open
,
and
to
read
the
booke
,
neither
to
looke
thereon
.
5
[
5
](A16102-e4810-b)
5
The
second
part
of
this
chapter
,
in
which
is
set
down
the
Reuelation
of
the
Sonne
;
as
before
was
said
.
This
part
conteineth
first
an
historie
of
the
manner
how
God
prepared
S.
Iohn
to
vnderstand
this
Reuelation
,
in
this
verse
.
Secondly
,
the
Reuelation
of
the
Sonne
himselfe
,
vnto
the
seuenth
verse
.
Thirdly
,
the
accidents
of
this
Reuelation
,
in
the
rest
of
the
Chapter
.
The
manner
how
is
here
described
in
two
sortes
,
one
from
without
him
,
by
speech
in
this
verse
.
Another
within
,
by
opening
the
eyes
of
S.
Iohn
(
which
before
were
held
)
that
he
might
see
,
in
the
verse
following
.
Then
one
of
the
Elders
said
vnto
me
,
Weepe
not
:
behold
,
that
[
‖
](A16102-e4820-b)
‖
Gene.
49.
9.
[
6
](A16102-e4840-b)
6
That
is
,
The
most
mightie
and
most
approued
Prince
:
according
to
the
vse
of
the
Hebrew
speech
.
Lion
which
is
of
the
tribe
of
Iuda
,
that
roote
of
Dauid
,
hath
gotten
the
victorie
,
that
he
might
open
the
booke
and
loose
the
seuen
seales
thereof
.
6
I
looked
therefore
,
and
loe
,
[
7
](A16102-e4860-b)
7
The
summe
of
the
reuelation
.
Christ
the
mediatour
taketh
and
openeth
the
booke
,
vers.
6.
7.
Therefore
in
this
reuelation
is
described
the
person
of
Christ
;
in
this
verse
.
His
fact
,
in
the
next
verse
.
The
person
is
thus
described
.
Christ
the
mediatour
betweene
God
,
Angels
,
&
men
,
as
the
eternall
word
of
God
;
&
our
redeemer
:
as
the
Lambe
of
God
,
standing
as
slaine
,
and
making
intercession
for
vs
by
the
vertue
and
merite
of
his
euerlasting
sacrifice
,
is
armed
with
the
Spirit
of
God
in
his
owne
person
,
that
is
,
with
the
power
&
wisdome
of
God
esientially
vnto
the
gouernment
of
this
whole
world
.
betweene
the
throne
,
and
the
foure
beasts
,
and
in
the
midds
of
the
Elders
,
stood
a
Lambe
as
though
he
had
bene
killed
,
which
had
seuen
hornes
,
and
seuen
eyes
,
which
are
those
seuen
spirits
of
God
,
sent
our
into
all
the
world
.
7
[
8
](A16102-e4880-b)
8
The
fact
of
Christ
the
mediatour
,
that
he
commeth
vnto
the
throne
of
the
Father
,
of
which
chap
4.
and
taketh
the
booke
out
of
his
hand
to
open
it
.
For
that
he
opened
it
,
it
is
first
expressed
chap.
6.
1.
&c.
He
came
,
and
tooke
the
booke
out
of
the
right
hand
of
him
that
sate
vpon
the
throne
.
8
[
9
](A16102-e4900-b)
9
Now
follow
in
the
end
the
accidents
of
the
reuelation
last
spoken
of
:
that
all
the
holy
Angels
and
men
did
sing
vnto
him
:
both
the
chiefe
,
verse
9.
10.
and
common
order
of
Angels
,
verse
11.
12.
&
of
all
things
created
,
verse
13.
the
princes
of
both
sorts
agreeing
therunto
,
verse
14.
And
when
he
had
taken
the
booke
,
the
foure
beasts
and
the
foure
and
twentie
Elders
fell
downe
before
the
Lambe
,
hauing
euerie
one
[
10
](A16102-e4910-b)
10
The
symbols
or
signes
of
praise
,
sweet
in
sauour
,
and
acceptable
vnto
God
.
See
chap.
8.
3.
harpes
and
golden
vials
full
of
odours
,
which
are
the
[
a
](A16102-e4920-b)
a
Looke
cha.
8.
3.
prayers
of
the
Saints
:
9
And
they
sung
a
[
b
](A16102-e4950-b)
b
No
common
song
.
new
[
11
](A16102-e4960-b)
11
That
is
,
composed
according
to
the
present
matter
:
the
Lambe
hauing
receiued
the
booke
,
as
it
were
with
his
feete
,
and
opened
it
with
his
hornes
;
as
is
said
in
the
Canticle
.
song
,
saying
,
[
12
](A16102-e4970-b)
12
The
song
of
the
Nobles
or
Princes
standing
by
the
throne
,
consisting
of
a
publication
of
the
praise
of
Christ
,
and
a
confirmation
of
the
same
,
from
his
benefites
,
both
which
we
haue
receiued
of
himselfe
(
as
are
the
suffering
of
his
death
,
our
redemption
vpon
the
crosse
by
his
bloud
,
in
this
verse
:
and
our
communion
with
him
in
Kingdome
and
Priesthood
,
which
long
ago
he
hath
granted
vnto
vs
with
himselfe
)
and
which
we
hereafter
hope
to
obtaine
;
as
our
kingdome
to
come
,
in
Christ
;
in
the
verse
following
.
Thou
art
worthy
to
take
the
booke
,
and
to
open
the
seales
thereof
;
because
thou
wast
killed
,
&
hast
redeemed
vs
to
God
,
by
thy
bloud
,
out
of
euery
kinred
,
and
tongue
,
&
people
,
and
nation
.
10
And
hast
made
vs
vnto
our
God
[
‖
](A16102-e4990-b)
‖
Chap.
1.
6.
1
Pet
2.
9.
kings
&
priests
,
and
we
shall
raigne
ouer
the
earth
.
11
[
13
](A16102-e5030-b)
13
The
consent
of
the
common
order
of
Angels
answering
in
melodie
vnto
their
princes
that
stood
by
the
throne
.
Then
I
beheld
,
and
I
heard
the
voyce
of
many
Angels
round
about
the
throne
,
and
about
the
beasts
and
the
Elders
,
[
14
](A16102-e5050-b)
14
A
number
finit
,
but
almost
infinit
,
for
one
infinit
in
deed
,
as
Dan.
7
10.
and
their
number
was
[
‖
](A16102-e5060-b)
‖
Dan.
7.
10.
[
c
](A16102-e5080-b)
c
By
this
is
ment
a
great
number
.
ten
thousand
times
ten
thousand
,
and
a
thousand
thousands
:
12
Saying
with
a
loud
voyce
,
Woorthy
is
the
Lambe
that
was
killed
,
to
[
d
](A16102-e5100-b)
d
To
haue
all
praise
giuen
to
him
as
to
the
mightiest
and
wisest
,
&c.
receiue
power
,
and
riches
,
and
wisedome
,
and
strength
,
and
honour
,
and
glorie
,
and
praise
:
13
[
15
](A16102-e5120-b)
15
The
consent
of
all
the
common
multitud
of
the
creatures
.
Also
all
the
creatures
which
are
in
heauen
,
and
on
the
earth
,
and
vnder
the
earth
,
and
in
the
sea
,
and
all
that
are
in
them
,
heard
I
,
saying
:
Vnto
him
,
that
sitteth
vpon
the
throne
,
and
vnto
the
Lambe
be
praise
,
and
honour
,
and
glory
,
and
power
,
for
euermore
.
14
[
16
](A16102-e5140-b)
16
A
confirmation
of
the
praise
before
going
,
from
the
contestation
of
the
Nobles
,
expressed
in
word
&
signes
,
as
once
or
twise
before
this
.
And
the
foure
beasts
said
,
Amen
;
&
the
foure
&
twenty
Elders
fell
downe
(
vpon
their
faces
)
&
worshipped
him
that
liueth
for
euermore
.
CHAP.
VI.
1
The
Lambe
openeth
the
first
seale
of
the
booke
,
3
the
second
,
5
the
third
,
7
the
fourth
,
9
the
fift
,
12
and
the
sixt
,
and
then
arise
murders
,
famin
,
pestilence
,
outcries
of
Saints
,
earthquakes
,
and
diuers
strange
sights
in
heauen
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e5260-b)
1
This
is
the
second
part
of
this
first
history
(
which
I
said
was
common
,
&
of
the
whole
world
)
of
the
works
of
God
in
the
gouernment
of
al
things
.
Of
this
part
there
are
generally
three
members
,
the
foresignifying
,
the
caution
,
&
the
execution
of
all
the
euils
which
God
powreth
out
vpon
this
world
,
which
hath
most
hardly
deserued
of
him
.
The
foresignifying
is
set
downe
in
this
chapter
:
the
caution
for
preseruing
the
church
,
is
in
the
next
chapter
:
and
the
execution
is
described
chap.
8.
&
9.
In
euery
part
of
the
foresignifying
there
are
three
branches
:
the
seuerall
&
expresse
calling
of
S.
Iohn
,
to
prepare
himselfe
to
take
knowledge
of
the
things
that
were
to
be
shewed
vnto
him
in
the
opening
of
the
seales
:
the
signe
;
&
the
word
expounding
the
signe
.
And
albeit
,
the
expres
calling
of
S.
Iohn
,
be
vsed
onely
in
foure
of
the
signes
,
yet
the
same
is
also
to
be
vnderstood
in
the
rest
that
follow
.
The
author
of
these
foresignifying
is
the
Lambe
,
as
that
word
of
the
Father
,
made
the
mediator
,
opening
the
seales
of
the
booke
.
The
instruments
are
the
Angels
in
most
of
the
visions
,
who
expound
the
signe
,
&
the
words
therof
.
Now
this
first
verse
containeth
an
expres
calling
of
S.
Iohn
to
marke
the
opening
of
the
first
seale
.
it
were
the
noyse
of
thunder
,
Come
and
see
.
2
Therefore
[
2
](A16102-e5300-b)
2
The
first
signe
ioyned
with
declaration
;
is
that
God
,
for
the
sinnes
and
horrible
rebellion
of
the
world
,
will
inuade
the
same
:
and
first
of
all
will
as
a
farre
off
with
his
dartes
of
pestilence
most
sodainelie
,
mightely
and
gloriouslie
,
beate
downe
the
same
as
iudge
,
and
triumph
ouer
it
,
as
conquerour
.
I
beheld
,
and
lo
,
there
was
present
a
white
horse
,
and
he
that
sate
on
him
,
had
a
bow
,
and
a
crowne
was
giuen
vnto
him
,
and
he
went
forth
conquering
,
and
that
he
might
conquer
.
3
And
[
3
](A16102-e5330-b)
3
The
second
signe
ioyned
with
words
of
declaration
,
(
after
the
expresse
calling
of
Iohn
as
before
)
is
,
that
God
being
prouoked
vnto
wrath
by
the
obstinacie
and
hard
heartednes
of
the
world
not
repenting
for
the
former
plaugue
,
as
setting
vpon
the
same
at
hand
,
will
kindle
the
fire
of
debate
amongst
men
,
and
will
destroy
the
inhabitants
of
this
world
,
one
by
the
sword
of
another
.
when
he
had
opened
the
second
seale
,
I
heard
the
second
beast
say
,
Come
and
see
.
4
And
there
came
out
another
horse
,
that
was
red
,
and
power
was
giuen
to
him
that
sate
thereon
,
to
take
peace
from
of
the
earth
,
&
that
they
should
kill
one
another
;
and
there
was
giuen
vnto
him
a
great
sword
.
5
[
4
](A16102-e5370-b)
4
The
third
signe
with
declaration
,
is
,
that
God
will
destroy
the
world
with
famine
,
withdrawing
all
prouision
:
which
is
by
the
figure
synecdoche
comprehended
in
wheat
,
barly
,
wine
and
oyle
.
And
when
he
had
opened
the
third
seale
,
I
heard
the
third
beast
say
,
Come
and
see
:
Then
I
beheld
,
and
lo
,
a
blacke
horse
;
and
he
that
sate
on
him
,
had
balances
in
his
hand
.
6
And
I
heard
a
voice
in
the
middes
of
the
foure
beasts
say
,
A
[
a
](A16102-e5390-b)
a
Hereby
is
signified
what
great
scarcitie
of
corne
there
was
,
for
the
word
here
vsed
is
a
kind
of
measure
of
drie
things
,
which
it
in
quantitic
but
the
eighth
part
of
a
bushell
,
which
was
an
ordinarie
porcion
vsed
to
be
giuen
to
seruants
for
their
stint
of
meat
for
one
day
.
measure
of
wheat
for
a
peny
,
and
three
measures
of
barly
for
a
penie
;
[
5
](A16102-e5400-b)
5
I
had
rather
distinguish
and
read
the
words
thus
,
and
the
wine
and
the
oyle
:
thou
shalt
not
deale
vniustly
.
In
this
sense
;
likewise
the
wine
and
the
oyle
shal
be
sould
a
verie
little
for
a
pennie
.
Thou
shalt
not
deale
vniustly
;
namely
when
thou
shalt
measure
out
a
verie
little
for
a
great
prise
:
so
is
the
place
euident
:
otherwise
that
is
most
true
,
which
the
wise
man
saith
,
that
who
so
withholdeth
the
corne
shal
be
cursed
of
the
people
.
Prouerbs
11.
26.
and
the
oyle
,
and
wine
hurt
thou
not
.
7
[
6
](A16102-e5430-b)
6
The
fourth
signe
ioyned
with
words
of
declaration
,
is
that
God
will
addict
the
fourth
part
of
the
world
indifferently
,
vnto
death
and
hell
,
or
the
graue
,
by
al
those
meanes
at
once
,
by
which
before
seuerally
and
in
order
he
had
recalled
their
mindes
vnto
amendment
.
Vnto
these
are
also
added
the
wild
&
cruell
beasts
of
the
earth
,
out
of
Leuit.
26.
22.
Thus
doth
God
according
to
his
wisdome
dispence
the
treasures
of
his
power
,
iustly
towards
all
,
mercifully
towards
the
good
,
and
with
patience
or
long
sufferance
towards
his
enimies
.
And
when
he
had
opened
the
fourth
seale
,
I
heard
the
voice
of
the
fourth
beast
say
,
Come
&
see
8
And
I
looked
,
and
behold
,
a
pale
horse
;
and
his
name
that
sate
on
him
was
Death
,
and
Hell
folowed
after
him
;
and
power
was
giuen
vnto
them
ouer
the
fourth
part
of
the
earth
,
to
kill
with
sword
,
and
with
hunger
,
and
with
death
,
and
by
the
beasts
of
the
earth
.
9
[
7
](A16102-e5470-b)
7
The
fift
signe
,
is
that
the
holy
martyrs
which
are
vnder
the
altar
whereby
they
are
sanctified
,
that
is
,
receiued
into
the
trust
and
tuition
of
Christ
(
into
whose
hands
they
are
committed
)
shall
crie
out
for
the
iustice
of
God
,
in
an
holy
zeale
to
aduance
his
kingdome
,
&
not
of
any
priuate
perturbation
of
the
minde
,
in
this
and
the
next
verse
,
and
that
God
wil
,
in
deed
,
signe
,
&
word
comfort
them
,
ver.
11.
And
when
he
had
opened
the
fift
seale
,
I
saw
vnder
the
altar
,
the
soules
of
them
that
had
bene
killed
for
the
word
of
God
,
&
for
the
testimonie
which
they
maintained
.
10
And
they
cried
with
a
loud
voice
,
saying
,
How
long
,
Lord
,
which
art
holy
and
true
,
doest
thou
not
iudge
,
and
auenge
our
blood
,
requiring
the
same
of
them
that
dwell
on
the
earth
?
11
Then
long
[
8
](A16102-e5500-b)
8
As
before
3.
4.
white
robes
were
giuen
vnto
euerie
one
,
and
it
was
said
vnto
them
,
that
they
should
rest
yet
for
a
little
season
,
vntill
their
fellow
seruants
,
and
their
brethren
that
must
be
killed
euen
as
they
were
,
were
[
b
](A16102-e5510-b)
b
Vntill
their
number
be
fulfilled
.
fulfilled
.
12
[
9
](A16102-e5530-b)
9
The
sixt
signe
,
the
narration
whereof
hath
two
parts
,
the
signe
and
the
euent
.
The
signe
is
,
that
the
earth
,
heauen
,
and
the
things
that
are
in
them
,
for
horror
of
the
sins
of
the
world
vpon
those
most
heauy
foretellings
of
God
,
&
complaints
of
the
saints
,
shal
be
shaken
most
vehemently
,
trembling
in
horrible
manner
,
and
losing
their
light
,
in
this
verse
:
falling
from
on
high
,
verse
13.
withdrawing
themselues
and
flying
away
for
the
greatnes
of
the
trouble
,
verse
14.
So
holyly
do
all
creatures
depend
vpon
the
will
of
God
,
and
content
themselues
in
his
glorie
.
And
I
beheld
when
he
had
opened
the
sixt
seale
,
and
lo
,
there
was
a
great
earthquake
,
and
the
sunne
was
as
blacke
as
[
c
](A16102-e5540-b)
c
So
they
called
in
old
time
those
wouen
works
that
were
of
haire
.
sackecloth
of
haire
,
and
the
moone
was
all
made
like
blood
:
13
And
the
starres
of
heauen
fell
vnto
the
earth
,
as
a
figge
tree
casteth
her
greene
figs
when
it
is
shaken
of
a
mightie
winde
.
14
And
the
heauen
departed
away
,
as
a
scrole
,
when
it
is
rolled
vp
,
and
al
the
mountaines
&
yles
were
moued
out
of
their
places
:
15
[
10
](A16102-e5580-b)
10
The
euent
of
the
signe
afore
going
:
that
there
is
no
man
that
shal
not
be
astonished
at
that
generall
commotion
,
flie
away
for
feare
,
and
hide
himselfe
,
in
this
verse
,
and
wish
vnto
himselfe
most
bitter
death
,
for
exceeding
horror
of
the
wrath
of
God
,
and
of
the
Lambe
,
at
which
before
he
was
astonished
.
Now
this
perplexitie
is
not
of
the
godly
,
but
of
the
wicked
,
whose
portion
is
in
this
life
,
as
the-psalmist
speaketh
,
Psalm
.
17.
14.
Not
that
sorrow
which
is
according
vnto
God
,
which
worketh
repentance
vnto
saluation
,
whereof
a
man
shall
neuer
repent
him
;
but
that
worldly
sorrow
that
bringeth
death
,
2
Cor.
7.
9.
as
their
wishings
doe
declare
:
for
this
historie
is
of
the
whole
world
,
seuered
from
the
historie
of
the
church
,
as
I
haue
shewed
before
Chapt
4.
1.
And
the
Kings
of
the
earth
,
&
the
great
men
,
and
the
rich
men
,
and
the
chiefe
captaines
,
and
the
mightie
men
,
and
euery
bondman
,
and
euery
free
man
,
hid
themselues
in
dennes
,
and
in
the
rockes
of
the
mountaines
;
16
And
they
said
to
the
mountaines
&
rocks
,
[
11
](A16102-e5600-b)
11
These
are
words
of
such
as
despaire
of
their
escape
:
of
which
despaire
there
are
two
arguments
;
the
presence
of
God
and
of
the
Lambe
,
prouoked
to
wrath
against
the
world
,
in
this
verse
;
and
the
conscience
of
their
owne
weakenes
,
whereby
men
feele
that
they
are
no
way
able
to
stand
in
the
day
of
the
wrath
of
God
,
verse
17.
as
it
is
said
.
Esay
.
14.
27.
[
‖
](A16102-e5610-b)
‖
Esay
.
2.
19.
Hose
10.
8.
Luke
23.
30.
Fall
on
vs
,
and
hide
vs
from
the
presence
of
him
that
sitteth
on
the
throne
,
and
from
the
wrath
of
the
Lambe
.
17
For
the
great
day
of
his
wrath
is
come
,
and
who
is
able
to
stand
?
CHAP.
VII
.
1
The
Angels
comming
to
hurt
the
earth
,
3
are
stayed
vntill
the
Elect
of
the
Lord
,
5
of
all
tribes
were
sealed
.
13
Such
as
suffred
persecution
for
Christs
sake
,
16
haue
great
felicitie
,
17
and
ioy
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e5770-b)
1
The
2.
member
of
this
part
is
a
preuenting
of
danger
,
as
we
distinguished
the
same
before
ch.
6.
1.
that
is
,
of
the
caution
whereby
God
took
care
before
hand
&
ꝓuided
for
his
;
that
after
the
example
of
the
Israelites
of
old
Exod.
8.
23.
the
faithfull
might
be
exempted
from
the
plagues
of
this
wicked
world
.
This
whole
place
,
is
a
certaine
interloquution
&
bringing
in
,
for
this
whose
chap.
by
occasion
of
the
prediction
and
argument
of
the
sixt
seale
.
For
first
that
euill
is
preuented
in
the
elect
,
vnto
the
9.
verse
.
Then
thanks
are
giuen
by
the
elect
for
that
cause
,
ver
10.
11
,
12.
Lastly
the
accomplishment
of
the
thing
is
set
forth
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
Chapter
.
The
first
verse
is
a
transition
,
speaking
of
the
Angels
which
keepe
these
inferiour
parts
from
all
euill
,
vntill
God
do
command
For
(
as
it
is
excellently
figured
by
Ezechiel
cha.
1.
11.
12.
)
their
faces
and
their
wings
are
reached
vpwards
,
continually
wayting
vpon
and
beholding
the
countenance
of
God
for
their
direction
,
and
euery
of
them
goeth
into
that
part
that
is
right
before
his
face
:
whither
soeuer
the
Spirit
shall
go
,
they
go
,
they
step
not
out
of
the
way
,
that
is
,
they
depart
not
so
much
as
a
foot
bredth
from
the
path
commanded
them
of
God
.
[
a
](A16102-e5790-b)
a
On
the
foure
quarters
or
coasts
of
the
earth
.
foure
corners
of
the
earth
,
holding
the
foure
winds
of
the
earth
,
that
no
winde
should
blow
vpon
the
earth
,
neither
on
the
sea
,
[
2
](A16102-e5800-b)
2
That
is
,
neither
into
the
aire
,
into
which
the
tops
of
trees
are
aduanced
.
neither
on
any
tree
.
2
[
3
](A16102-e5820-b)
3
Now
God
prouideth
against
the
danger
of
his
elect
,
by
commandement
,
ver.
2.
&
3.
and
by
signe
or
figure
,
both
for
those
of
the
nation
of
the
Iewes
,
thence
vnto
the
8.
vers.
and
also
them
of
the
Gentils
vers.
9●
.
And
I
saw
[
4
](A16102-e5830-b)
4
Not
onely
another
,
or
differing
in
number
from
the
common
Angels
of
God
,
but
also
in
essence
,
office
&
operation
excelling
all
Angels
:
that
is
Christ
Iesus
the
eternall
Angell
or
word
of
God
,
and
mediator
of
the
couenant
.
So
hereafter
Chap.
8.
3.
and
10.
1.
5.
another
Angel
come
vp
from
the
East
,
which
had
the
seale
of
the
liuing
God
;
and
he
cried
with
a
loud
voyce
to
the
foure
Angels
,
to
whom
power
was
giuen
to
hurt
the
earth
,
and
the
sea
,
saying
,
3
Hurt
ye
not
the
earth
,
neither
the
sea
,
neither
the
trees
,
till
we
haue
sealed
the
seruants
of
our
God
in
their
foreheads
.
4
And
I
heard
the
number
of
them
,
which
were
sealed
;
and
there
were
sealed
[
5
](A16102-e5870-b)
5
That
is
,
of
the
Iewes
a
number
certaine
in
it selfe
before
God
,
&
such
as
may
be
numbred
of
vs
:
for
which
cause
also
the
same
is
here
set
downe
as
certain
.
But
of
the
elect
which
are
of
the
Gentiles
the
number
in
deed
is
in
it selfe
certaine
with
God
,
but
of
vs
not
possibly
to
be
numbred
,
as
God
Gen.
15.
5.
and
often
elsewhere
,
and
Esay
figured
most
excellently
Chap.
49.
and
60.
This
therfore
is
spoken
with
respect
,
when
a
certaine
number
is
put
for
one
vncertaine
conferre
this
with
verse
9.
an
hundreth
and
foure
and
fortie
thousand
of
all
the
tribes
of
the
children
of
Israel
.
5
Of
the
tribe
of
Iuda
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
Of
the
tribe
of
Ruben
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
of
the
tribe
of
Gad
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
6
Of
the
tribe
of
Aser
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
Of
the
tribe
of
Nephthali
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
Of
the
tribe
of
Manasses
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
7
Of
the
tribe
of
Simeon
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
[
6
](A16102-e5910-b)
6
Here
the
tribe
of
Leui
is
reckoned
vp
in
common
with
the
rest
,
because
all
the
Israelits
were
equally
made
priestes
with
them
in
Christ
,
by
his
priesthood
.
chap.
1.
6.
and
5
,
10.
and
Rom.
12
1.
and
1.
Pet.
2.
9.
The
name
of
Dan
is
not
mentioned
,
because
the
Danits
long
before
forsaking
the
worship
of
God
,
were
fallen
away
from
the
fellowship
of
Gods
people
,
vnto
the
part
of
the
Gentiles
.
Which
euil
manie
ages
before
Iacob
foresaw
,
Gen.
49.
18.
for
which
cause
also
there
is
no
mention
made
of
this
tribe
in
the
first
booke
of
the
Chronicles
.
Of
the
tribe
of
[
b
](A16102-e5920-b)
b
He
skipped
Dan
,
and
reckeneth
Leui.
Leui
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
Of
the
tribe
of
Issachar
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
of
the
tribe
of
Zabulon
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
8
Of
the
tribe
of
[
c
](A16102-e5940-b)
c
Of
Ephraim
,
who
was
Iosephs
other
sonne
,
and
had
the
byrth
right
giuen
him
,
whereof
he
is
called
Ioseph
.
Ioseph
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
:
Of
the
tribe
of
Beniamin
,
were
sealed
twelue
thousand
.
9
After
these
things
I
beheld
,
and
lo
,
a
great
multitude
,
[
7
](A16102-e5960-b)
7
See
before
vpon
the
4.
verse
.
which
no
man
could
number
,
of
all
nations
and
kinreds
,
and
people
,
and
tongues
,
and
they
[
8
](A16102-e5970-b)
8
As
Priests
,
kings
,
and
glorious
conquerours
by
martyrdome
:
which
things
are
noted
by
their
proper
signes
in
this
verse
.
stood
before
the
throne
,
and
before
the
Lambe
,
clothed
with
long
white
robes
;
and
palmes
in
their
hands
.
10
[
9
](A16102-e5990-b)
9
The
praise
of
God
,
celebrated
first
by
the
holy
men
,
in
this
verse
:
then
by
the
heauenly
Angels
,
in
the
two
verses
following
.
And
they
cryed
with
a
loud
voice
,
saying
,
Saluation
commeth
from
our
God
,
that
sitteth
vpon
the
throne
,
and
from
the
Lambe
.
11
And
all
the
Angels
stood
round
about
the
throne
,
and
about
the
Elders
,
&
the
foure
beasts
;
and
they
fell
before
the
throne
on
their
faces
,
and
worshipped
God
,
12
Saying
,
Amen
.
Praise
,
and
glorie
,
and
wisedome
,
and
thankes
,
and
honour
,
and
power
,
and
might
,
be
vnto
our
God
for
euermore
,
Amen
.
13
[
10
](A16102-e6060-b)
10
A
passage
ouer
vnto
the
expounding
of
the
vision
,
of
which
the
Angel
enquireth
of
S.
Iohn
,
to
stir
him
vp
withall
,
in
this
verse
:
&
Iohn
in
one
forme
of
speech
,
both
acknowledgeth
his
owne
ignorance
,
attributing
knowledge
vnto
the
Angel
,
and
also
in
most
modest
maner
requesteth
the
expounding
of
the
vision
,
Then
one
of
the
Elders
spake
,
saying
vnto
me
;
What
are
these
which
are
arayed
in
long
white
robes
?
and
whence
came
they
?
14
And
I
said
vnto
him
,
Lord
,
thou
knowest
.
[
11
](A16102-e6080-b)
11
The
exposition
of
the
vision
,
wherin
the
Angell
telleth
first
the
acts
of
the
Saints
,
that
is
their
sufferings
,
and
worke
of
faith
in
Christ
Iesus
,
in
this
ver.
Secondly
their
glorie
,
both
present
,
which
consisteth
in
two
things
,
that
they
minister
vnto
God
,
and
that
God
protecteth
them
,
vers.
15
:
and
to
come
,
in
their
perfect
deliuerance
from
all
annoyances
,
vers.
16.
and
in
participation
of
all
good
things
,
which
euen
the
memorie
of
former
euils
shall
neuer
be
able
to
diminish
,
vers.
17.
The
cause
efficient
,
and
which
containeth
all
these
things
,
is
onely
one
,
euen
the
Lambe
of
God
,
the
Lord
,
the
Mediator
,
and
the
Sauiour
Christ
Iesus
.
And
he
said
to
me
,
These
are
they
,
which
came
out
of
great
tribulation
,
and
haue
washed
their
long
robes
,
and
haue
made
them
white
in
the
blood
of
the
Lambe
.
15
Therefore
are
they
before
the
throne
of
God
,
and
serue
him
[
d
](A16102-e6100-b)
d
He
alludeth
to
the
Leuites
,
which
serued
day
and
night
,
for
else
there
is
no
night
in
heauen
.
day
and
night
in
his
Temple
;
and
he
that
sitteth
on
the
throne
will
[
e
](A16102-e6110-b)
e
Or
,
vpon
them
:
wherby
is
meant
Gods
defence
&
protection
as
it
were
towards
them
,
who
are
as
safe
,
as
men
in
the
Lords
tentes
.
ouer
shadow
them
.
16
[
‖
](A16102-e6130-b)
‖
Esay
.
49.
10.
They
shal
hunger
no
more
,
neither
thirst
any
more
;
neither
shall
the
sunne
light
on
them
,
neither
any
heate
.
17
Because
the
Lamb
,
which
is
in
the
middes
of
the
throne
shall
feede
them
,
and
shall
lead
them
vnto
the
liuely
fountaines
of
water
;
and
[
‖
](A16102-e6160-b)
‖
Esay
25.
8.
Chap.
21.
4.
God
shall
wipe
away
all
teares
from
their
eyes
.
CHAP.
VIII
.
1
After
the
opening
of
the
seuenth
seale
,
3
the
Saints
prayers
are
offered
vp
with
odours
.
6
The
seuen
Angels
come
forth
with
trumpets
.
7
The
foure
first
blow
,
and
fire
falleth
on
the
earth
,
8
the
sea
is
turned
into
bloud
,
10.
11
the
waters
waxe
bitter
,
12
and
the
starres
are
darkened
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e6310-b)
1
Hee
returneth
to
the
historie
of
the
seales
of
the
booke
,
which
the
Lambe
openeth
.
The
seuenth
seale
is
the
next
foresignification
,
and
a
precise
commaundement
of
the
execution
of
the
most
heauie
iudgements
of
God
vpon
this
wicked
world
:
which
foresignification
being
vnderstood
by
the
seale
,
all
things
in
heauen
are
silent
,
and
in
horrour
through
admiration
,
vntill
commaundement
of
execution
be
seuerallie
giuen
of
God
vnto
the
administres
of
his
wrath
.
So
he
passeth
vnto
the
third
member
,
of
which
I
spake
before
in
the
sixt
Chapter
and
first
verse
,
which
member
is
of
the
execution
of
those
euils
wherewith
God
most
iustly
determined
to
afflict
the
world
.
2
[
2
](A16102-e6340-b)
2
Now
followeth
the
third
braunch
of
the
common
historie
,
as
euen
now
I
sayd
:
which
is
the
execution
of
the
iudgements
of
God
vpon
the
world
.
This
is
first
generallie
prepared
,
vnto
the
sixt
verse
;
then
by
seuerall
partes
expounded
according
to
the
order
of
those
that
administred
the
same
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
Chapter
following
.
Vnto
the
preparation
of
this
execution
are
declared
these
things
:
first
who
were
the
administers
and
instrumentes
thereof
,
in
this
verse
;
secondly
,
what
is
the
worke
both
of
the
Prince
of
Angels
giuing
order
for
this
execution
,
thence
vnto
the
5.
verse
,
and
of
his
administers
,
in
the
sixt
verse
.
The
administers
of
the
execution
are
sayd
to
be
seuen
Angels
:
their
instruments
,
trumpets
,
whereby
they
should
as
it
were
sound
the
al'arme
at
the
commaundement
of
God
.
They
are
propunded
seuen
in
number
,
because
it
pleased
not
God
at
once
to
powre
out
his
wrath
vpon
the
rebellious
world
,
but
at
diuerse
times
,
and
by
peece
meale
,
and
in
slow
order
,
and
as
with
an
vnwilling
mind
to
exercise
his
iudgementes
vpon
his
creatures
,
so
long
called
vpon
both
by
word
and
signes
,
if
happily
they
had
learned
to
repent
.
And
I
saw
the
seuen
Angels
,
which
[
a
](A16102-e6350-b)
a
Which
appeare
before
him
as
his
ministers
.
stand
before
God
;
and
to
them
were
giuen
seuen
trumpets
.
3
[
3
](A16102-e6370-b)
3
This
is
that
great
Emperour
,
the
Lord
Iesus
Christ
,
our
King
and
Sauiour
:
who
both
maketh
intercession
to
God
the
Father
for
the
Sainctes
,
filling
the
heauenly
sanctuarie
with
most
sweete
odour
,
and
offering
vp
their
prayers
,
as
the
Calues
and
burnt
sacrifices
of
their
lippes
,
in
this
verse
:
in
such
sort
as
euerie
one
of
them
(
so
powerfull
is
that
sweete
sauour
of
Christ
,
and
the
efficacie
of
his
sacrifice
)
are
held
in
reconcilement
with
God
and
themselues
made
most
acceptable
vnto
him
,
verse
4.
And
then
also
out
of
his
treasurie
,
and
from
the
same
sanctuarie
powreth
forth
vpon
the
world
the
fire
of
his
wrath
,
adding
also
diuine
tokens
thereunto
:
and
by
that
meanes
(
as
of
old
the
harauldes
of
Rome
were
wont
to
doe
)
he
proclaimeth
warre
against
the
rebellious
world
.
Then
another
Angell
came
,
and
stood
before
the
altar
hauing
a
golden
censer
;
and
much
odoures
was
giuen
vnto
him
,
to
offer
with
the
prayers
of
all
the
Saintes
vpon
the
golden
altar
,
which
is
before
the
throne
.
4
And
the
smoke
of
the
odours
with
the
prayers
of
the
Saintes
,
[
b
](A16102-e6390-b)
b
Our
prayers
are
nothing
worth
,
vnlesse
that
true
and
sweete
sauour
of
that
onely
oblation
be
especially
and
before
all
things
with
them
,
that
is
to
say
,
vnlesse
we
being
first
of
all
iustified
through
faith
in
his
Son
,
be
acceptable
vnto
him
.
went
vp
out
of
the
Angels
hand
,
vnto
the
presence
of
God
.
5
Then
the
Angel
tooke
the
censer
,
and
filled
it
with
fire
of
the
altar
,
and
cast
it
into
the
earth
:
and
there
were
made
voyces
,
and
thundrings
,
and
lightenings
,
and
earthquake
.
6
[
4
](A16102-e6420-b)
4
This
is
the
worke
of
the
administers
.
The
Angels
the
administers
of
Christ
,
onely
by
sound
of
trumpet
and
voyce
(
for
they
are
onely
as
haraulds
)
do
effectually
cal
forth
the
instruments
of
the
wrath
of
God
,
through
his
power
.
Hitherto
haue
bene
things
generall
.
Now
followeth
the
narration
of
things
particular
,
which
the
Angels
six
in
number
wrought
in
their
order
,
set
out
vnto
the
nineteenth
verse
of
the
next
Chapter
:
and
is
concluded
with
declaration
of
the
euent
which
followed
vpon
these
things
done
in
the
world
,
in
the
tenth
and
eleuenth
Chapters
.
And
the
seuen
Angels
,
which
had
the
seuen
trumpets
,
prepared
them selues
to
blow
the
trumpets
.
7
[
5
](A16102-e6440-b)
5
The
first
execution
at
the
sound
of
the
first
Angell
,
vpon
the
earth
,
that
is
,
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
(
by
metonymie
)
and
vpon
all
the
fruites
thereof
:
as
the
comparing
of
this
verse
with
the
second
member
of
the
ninth
verse
,
doth
not
obscurely
declare
.
So
the
first
Angel
blew
the
trumpet
,
and
there
was
haile
and
fire
,
mingled
with
bloud
;
and
they
were
cast
into
the
earth
:
and
the
third
part
of
trees
was
burnt
vp
,
and
all
greene
grasse
was
burnt
vp
.
8
[
6
](A16102-e6460-b)
6
The
second
execution
,
vpon
the
sea
,
in
this
verse
,
and
all
things
that
are
therein
,
in
the
next
verse
.
Then
the
second
Angell
blew
the
trumpet
,
and
as
it
were
a
great
mountaine
,
burning
with
fire
,
was
cast
into
the
sea
;
and
the
third
part
of
the
sea
became
bloud
.
9
And
the
third
part
of
the
creatures
,
which
were
in
the
sea
,
and
had
life
,
dyed
;
and
the
third
part
of
ships
were
destroyed
.
10
[
7
](A16102-e6500-b)
7
The
third
execution
vpon
the
flouds
and
fountaines
,
that
is
,
vpon
al
fresh
waters
,
in
this
verse
:
the
effect
where
of
is
,
that
manie
are
destroyed
with
the
bitternesse
of
the
waters
,
in
the
verse
following
.
Then
the
third
Angell
blew
the
trumpet
,
and
there
fell
a
great
star
out
of
heauen
,
burning
like
a
torch
,
and
fell
into
the
third
part
of
the
riuers
,
and
into
the
fountaines
of
waters
.
11
The
name
of
the
starre
is
called
[
8
](A16102-e6520-b)
8
This
is
spoken
by
metaphor
,
of
the
name
of
a
most
bitter
herbe
,
and
commonly
knowne
:
vnlesse
perhaps
a
man
following
those
that
note
the
deriuation
of
wordes
,
had
rather
expound
it
adiectiuelie
,
for
that
which
by
reason
of
bitternesse
can
not
be
dronke
,
or
which
maketh
the
liquour
into
which
it
is
powred
,
more
bitter
then
that
anie
man
can
drincke
the
same
.
wormewood
:
therefore
the
third
part
of
the
waters
became
wormewood
;
and
manie
men
dyed
of
the
waters
,
because
they
were
made
bitter
.
12
[
9
](A16102-e6540-b)
9
The
fourth
execution
vpon
those
lightsome
bodies
of
heauen
,
which
minister
vnto
this
inferiour
world
.
After
the
fourth
Angell
blew
the
trumpet
,
and
the
third
part
of
the
Sunne
was
smitten
,
and
the
third
part
of
the
Moone
,
and
the
third
part
of
the
starres
;
so
that
the
third
part
of
them
was
darkened
,
and
the
third
part
of
the
day
did
not
shine
,
and
likewise
the
night
.
13
[
10
](A16102-e6560-b)
10
A
lamentable
prediction
or
foretelling
of
those
parts
of
the
diuine
execution
which
yet
are
behind
:
which
also
is
a
passage
vnto
the
argument
of
the
next
Chapter
.
Of
all
these
things
in
a
manner
Christ
him selfe
expressely
foretold
Luke
21.
24.
&c.
and
they
are
common
plagues
generally
denounced
,
without
particular
note
of
time
.
And
I
beheld
,
and
heard
one
Angell
flying
through
the
middes
of
heauen
,
saying
with
a
loud
voyce
,
Wo
,
wo
,
wo
,
to
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
,
from
the
soundes
remaining
of
the
trumpets
of
the
three
Angels
,
which
yet
must
blow
their
trumpets
.
CHAP.
IX
.
1
The
fift
Angell
bloweth
his
trumpet
,
3
and
spoyling
locustes
come
out
.
13
The
sixt
Angell
bloweth
,
16
and
bringeth
forth
horsemen
,
20
to
destroy
mankinde
.
[
1
](A16102-e6670-b)
1
The
fift
execution
vpon
wicked
men
inhabiting
the
earth
(
as
a
little
before
the
Angell
savd
)
wrought
by
the
infernall
powers
,
is
declared
in
this
place
vnto
the
eleuenth
verse
.
And
after
it
the
sixt
execution
,
thence
vnto
the
nineteenth
verse
.
And
lastly
is
shewed
the
common
euent
that
followed
the
former
executions
in
the
world
,
in
the
two
last
verses
.
[
2
](A16102-e6690-b)
2
That
is
,
that
the
Angell
of
God
glittering
with
glorie
,
as
a
starre
fell
downe
from
heauen
:
Whether
thou
take
him
for
Christ
,
who
hath
the
keyes
of
hell
of
himselfe
,
and
by
Princely
authoritie
,
Chapter
.
1.
18.
or
whether
for
some
inferiour
Angell
,
who
hath
the
same
key
permitted
vnto
him
,
and
oc-cupieth
it
ministerially
,
or
by
office
of
his
ministerie
;
here
and
Chapter
21.
so
the
word
falling
is
taken
Gene.
14.
10.
and
24.
64.
and
Hebr.
6.
6.
starre
fall
out
of
heauen
vnto
the
earth
;
[
3
](A16102-e6710-b)
3
The
key
was
giuen
to
this
starre
.
For
those
powers
of
wickednesse
are
thrust
downe
into
hell
,
and
bound
with
chaines
of
darkenesse
:
and
are
there
kept
vnto
damnation
,
vnlesse
God
for
a
time
doe
let
them
loose
.
2.
Pet.
2.
4.
Iud.
6
,
and
of
this
booke
Chapter
.
20.
the
historie
of
which
Chapter
,
hath
agreement
of
time
with
this
present
Chapter
.
and
to
that
Angell
was
giuen
the
key
of
the
[
a
](A16102-e6720-b)
a
By
the
bottomlesse
pit
,
he
meaneth
the
deepest
darkenes
of
hell
.
bottomlesse
pit
.
2
[
4
](A16102-e6740-b)
4
Vnto
this
is
added
,
the
smoke
of
the
hellish
and
infernall
spirites
,
all
darke
,
and
darkening
all
things
in
heauen
and
in
earth
.
These
spirituall
darkenesses
are
the
causes
of
all
disorder
and
confusion
.
For
the
deuill
at
a
time
certaine
(
whereof
verse
fiue
)
sent
these
darckenesses
into
his
kingdom
,
that
he
might
at
once
,
and
with
one
impression
ouerthrow
all
things
,
and
peruert
if
it
were
possible
the
elect
themselues
.
By
this
darknesse
all
spirituall
light
,
both
actiue
as
of
the
Sunne
,
and
passiue
,
as
of
the
ayre
which
is
lightened
by
the
Sunne
,
is
taken
away
:
and
this
is
that
which
goeth
before
the
spirites
:
it
followeth
of
the
spirites
themselues
.
And
he
opened
the
bottomlesse
pit
,
and
there
arose
a
smoke
out
of
the
pit
,
as
the
smoke
of
a
great
fornace
;
and
the
Sunne
,
and
the
ayre
were
darkened
by
the
smoke
of
the
pit
.
3
[
5
](A16102-e6760-b)
5
A
description
of
the
malignant
spirites
inuading
the
world
,
taken
from
their
nature
,
power
,
forme
and
order
.
From
their
nature
,
in
that
they
are
like
vnto
certaine
locustes
,
in
quickenesse
,
subtletie
,
hurtfulnesse
,
number
,
and
such
like
,
in
this
verse
.
From
their
power
,
for
that
they
are
,
as
the
Scorpions
of
the
earth
,
of
a
secret
force
to
do
hurt
.
For
our
battell
is
not
here
with
flesh
and
bloud
,
but
with
powers
,
&c.
Ephes.
6.
12.
This
place
of
the
power
of
the
deuils
,
generally
noted
in
this
verse
,
is
particularly
decla-red
afterwardes
,
in
the
three
next
verses
.
And
there
came
out
of
the
smoke
Locusts
vpon
the
earth
;
and
vnto
them
was
giuen
power
,
such
as
the
Scorpions
of
the
earth
haue
.
4
[
6
](A16102-e6780-b)
6
Here
that
power
of
the
deuils
is
particularly
described
,
according
to
their
actions
and
the
effectes
of
the
same
.
Their
actions
are
sayd
to
be
bounded
by
the
counsell
of
God
:
both
because
they
hurt
not
all
men
,
but
onely
the
reprobate
(
for
the
godly
and
elect
,
in
whom
there
is
any
part
of
a
better
life
,
God
gardeth
by
his
decree
)
whom
Christ
shall
not
haue
sealed
,
in
this
verse
;
and
also
because
they
neither
had
all
power
,
nor
at
all
times
,
no
not
ouer
those
that
are
their
own
,
but
limited
in
manner
and
time
by
the
prescript
of
God
,
verse
5.
So
their
power
to
afflict
the
godly
is
none
,
&
for
the
wicked
it
is
limited
in
acte
and
in
effect
,
by
the
will
of
God
:
for
the
manner
was
prescribed
vnto
them
,
that
they
should
not
slay
but
torment
the
wretched
world
.
The
time
is
for
fiue
monethes
,
or
for
an
hundred
and
fiftie
dayes
,
that
is
,
for
so
many
yeares
,
in
which
the
deuils
haue
in
deede
mightilie
peruerted
all
things
,
in
the
world
;
and
yet
without
that
publique
and
vnpunished
licence
of
killing
,
which
afterwards
they
vsurped
when
the
sixt
Angell
had
blowen
his
trumpet
,
as
shall
be
sayd
vpon
the
thirteenth
verse
.
Now
this
space
is
to
be
accounted
from
the
end
of
that
thousand
yeares
mentioned
chapter
20.
3.
and
that
is
,
from
the
Popedome
of
that
Gregorie
the
seuenth
,
a
most
monstrous
Necromancer
,
who
before
was
called
Hildebrandus
Senensis
:
for
this
man
being
made
altogether
of
impietie
and
wickednesse
,
as
a
slaue
of
the
deuill
,
whom
he
serued
,
was
the
most
wicked
firebrand
of
the
world
he
excommunicated
the
Emperour
Henry
the
fourth
:
went
about
by
all
maner
of
trecherie
to
set
vp
and
put
downe
Empires
and
Kingdomes
,
as
liked
himselfe
:
and
doubted
not
to
set
Rodolph
the
Swedon
ouer
the
Empire
in
steed
of
Henrie
before
named
,
sending
vnto
him
a
crowne
with
this
verse
annexed
vnto
it
,
Petra
dedit
Petro
,
Petrus
diadema
Rodolpho
,
that
is
,
The
Rocke
to
Peter
gaue
the
crowne
,
and
Peter
Rodolph
doth
renowne
.
Finally
,
he
so
finely
bestirred
him selfe
in
his
affaires
,
as
he
miserably
set
all
Christendome
on
fire
,
&
conueyed
ouer
vnto
his
successours
the
burning
brand
of
the
same
;
who
enraged
with
like
ambition
,
neuer
ceased
to
nourish
that
flame
,
and
to
in
kindle
it
more
&
more
:
whereby
Cities
,
Common
weales
,
and
whole
kingdomes
set
together
by
the
eares
amongest
themselues
,
by
most
expert
cutthroates
,
came
to
ruine
,
whiles
they
miserably
wounded
one
another
.
This
terme
of
an
hundred
and
50.
yeares
,
taketh
end
in
the
time
of
Gregorie
the
ninth
,
or
Hugolinus
Anagniensis
(
as
he
was
before
called
)
who
caused
to
be
compiled
by
one
Raymond
his
chapleine
and
confessour
,
the
body
of
the
Decretals
,
and
by
sufferance
of
the
Kings
and
Princes
,
to
be
published
in
the
Christian
world
,
and
established
for
a
law
.
For
by
this
sleight
,
at
length
,
the
Popes
arrogated
vnto
themselues
licence
to
kill
whom
they
would
,
whiles
other
were
vnwares
;
and
without
feare
established
a
butchery
out
of
many
,
the
wicked
Canons
of
the
Decretals
,
which
the
trumpet
of
the
5.
Angell
had
expresly
forbidden
,
&
had
hindered
vntill
this
time
.
The
effectes
of
these
bloudy
actions
are
declared
vpon
the
6
verse
:
that
the
miserable
world
languishing
in
so
great
calamilities
,
should
willingly
run
together
vnto
death
,
and
preferre
the
same
before
life
,
by
reason
of
the
grieuousnesse
of
the
miseries
that
oppressed
them
.
But
it
was
commanded
them
,
that
they
should
not
hurt
the
grasse
of
the
earth
,
neither
any
greene
thing
,
neither
any
tree
:
but
onely
those
men
which
of
haue
not
the
seale
of
God
in
their
foreheads
.
5
And
to
them
it
was
giuen
that
they
should
not
kill
them
,
but
that
they
should
be
vexed
fiue
monethes
;
and
that
their
should
be
as
the
paine
that
commeth
of
a
Scorpion
,
when
he
hath
stung
a
man
.
6
[
‖
](A16102-e6840-b)
‖
Chap.
6.
16.
Esay
.
2.
19.
Hose
.
10.
8.
Therefore
in
those
dayes
shall
men
seeke
death
,
and
shal
not
finde
it
;
and
shall
desire
to
dye
,
and
death
shall
flie
from
them
.
7
[
7
](A16102-e6890-b)
7
The
forme
these
hellish
spirites
and
administers
,
is
shadowed
out
by
signes
&
visible
figures
in
this
sort
:
that
they
are
verie
expert
&
swift
:
that
wheresoeuer
they
are
in
the
world
the
kingdome
is
theirs
:
that
they
menage
al
their
affaires
with
cunning
&
skil
,
in
this
verse
:
that
making
shew
of
mildnes
and
tender
affection
to
draw
on
men
with
all
,
they
most
impotently
rage
in
all
mischief
:
that
they
are
most
mightie
to
doe
hurt
,
verse
8.
that
they
are
freed
from
being
hurt
of
any
man
,
as
armed
with
the
colour
of
Religion
and
sacred
authoritie
of
priuilege
:
that
they
fill
all
things
with
horrour
,
verse
9.
that
they
are
fraudulent
:
that
they
are
venimous
and
extremelie
noysome
,
though
their
power
be
limited
,
verse
10.
All
which
things
are
properly
in
the
infernall
powers
,
and
communicated
by
them
vnto
their
ministers
and
vassals
.
The
forme
of
the
locustes
was
like
vnto
horses
prepared
vnto
battell
;
and
on
their
heads
were
set
as
it
were
crownes
,
like
vnto
gold
,
&
their
faces
were
like
the
faces
of
men
.
8
And
they
had
haire
as
the
haire
of
women
;
and
their
teeth
were
as
the
teeth
of
Lyons
:
9
They
had
also
habbergions
,
like
to
habbergions
of
yron
:
and
the
sound
of
their
wings
was
like
the
sound
of
charets
,
when
many
horses
run
together
in
battell
:
10
Also
they
had
tayles
like
vnto
Scorpions
;
and
there
were
stings
in
their
tayles
;
and
their
power
was
to
hurt
men
fiue
monethes
.
11
[
8
](A16102-e6990-b)
8
The
order
of
the
powers
of
maliciousnesse
:
that
they
are
subiect
vnto
one
infernall
king
,
whom
thou
mayest
call
in
English
the
destroyer
:
who
driueth
the
whole
world
both
Iewes
and
Gentiles
into
the
destruction
that
belongeth
vnto
him selfe
.
And
I
cannot
tell
whether
this
name
haue
respect
vnto
the
Etvmologicall
interpretation
of
Hildebrand
,
by
a
figure
often
vsed
in
Scripture
:
which
albeit
it
may
otherwise
be
turned
of
the
Germaines
(
as
the
sence
of
compound
wordes
is
commonly
ambiguous
)
yet
in
very
deede
it
signifieth
as
much
as
if
thou
shouldest
call
him
the
firebrand
,
that
is
,
he
that
setteth
on
fire
those
that
be
faithfull
vnto
him
.
Now
they
had
a
King
set
ouer
them
,
which
is
the
Angell
of
the
bottomlesse
pit
;
whose
name
in
Hebrew
is
Abaddon
,
and
in
Greeke
is
called
Apollyon
,
that
is
,
the
destroyer
.
12
[
9
](A16102-e7030-b)
9
A
passage
vnto
the
next
point
,
and
to
the
historie
of
the
time
following
.
One
wo
is
past
,
and
behold
,
yet
two
woes
come
after
this
.
13
[
10
](A16102-e7060-b)
10
The
sixt
execution
done
vpon
the
world
,
by
the
tyrannicall
powers
thereof
,
working
in
the
foure
partes
of
the
earth
,
that
is
,
in
most
cruell
manner
executing
their
tyrannous
dominion
through
the
whole
world
:
and
killing
the
miserable
people
without
punishment
,
which
before
was
not
lawfull
for
them
to
doe
in
that
sort
,
as
I
shewed
vpon
the
fourth
verse
.
This
narration
hath
two
partes
:
a
commaundement
from
God
,
in
the
fourteenth
verse
:
and
an
execution
of
the
commaundement
,
in
the
verses
following
.
¶
Then
the
sixt
Angel
blew
the
trumpet
,
[
11
](A16102-e7070-b)
11
The
commaundement
giuen
by
Christ
him selfe
,
who
is
gouernour
ouer
all
.
and
I
heard
a
certaine
voyce
from
the
[
b
](A16102-e7080-b)
b
He
alludeth
to
the
altar
of
incense
,
which
stood
in
the
courte
which
the
priests
were
in
,
ouer
against
the
Arke
of
the
Couenant
,
hauing
a
vayle
betwixt
them
.
foure
hornes
of
the
golden
altar
,
which
is
before
God
,
14
Saying
to
the
sixt
Angell
,
which
had
the
trumpet
;
[
12
](A16102-e7100-b)
12
As
if
he
should
haue
sayd
,
these
hitherto
haue
bene
so
bounde
by
the
power
of
God
,
that
they
could
not
freely
runne
vpon
all
men
as
themselues
lusted
,
but
were
staved
and
restrained
at
that
great
floud
of
Euphrates
,
that
is
,
in
their
spirituall
Babylon
(
for
this
is
a
Periphrasis
of
the
spirituall
Babylon
,
by
the
limites
of
the
visible
Babylon
long
since
ouerthrowne
)
that
they
might
not
commit
those
horrible
slaughters
,
which
they
long
breathed
after
.
Now
,
goe
to
,
let
loose
those
foure
Angels
,
that
is
,
administers
of
the
wrath
of
God
,
in
that
number
that
is
conuenient
to
the
slaughtering
of
the
foure
quarters
of
the
world
:
stirre
them
vp
,
and
giue
them
the
bridle
,
that
rushing
out
of
that
Babylon
of
theirs
,
which
is
the
seate
of
the
wicked
ones
,
they
may
flee
vpon
all
the
world
,
therein
to
rage
and
most
licentiously
to
practise
their
tyrannie
,
as
God
hath
ordeined
.
This
was
done
when
Gregorie
the
ninth
by
publique
authoritie
established
for
law
,
his
owne
Decretals
;
by
which
he
might
freely
lay
traynes
for
the
life
of
simple
men
.
For
,
who
is
it
that
seeth
not
that
the
lawes
Decretall
most
of
them
are
snares
to
catch
soules
withall
?
Since
that
time
(
O
good
God
)
how
great
slaughters
haue
there
bene
?
how
great
massacres
?
All
histories
are
full
of
them
:
and
this
our
age
aboundeth
with
most
horrible
and
monstrous
examples
of
the
same
.
Loose
the
foure
Angels
,
which
are
bound
at
the
great
riuer
Euphrates
.
15
[
13
](A16102-e7120-b)
13
The
execution
of
the
commandement
,
is
in
two
pointes
:
one
,
that
these
butcherers
are
let
lose
,
that
out
of
their
tower
of
the
spirituall
Babylon
they
might
with
furie
run
abroad
thorough
all
the
world
,
as
well
the
chiefe
of
that
crue
which
are
most
prompt
vnto
all
assayes
:
in
this
verse
;
as
their
multitudes
,
both
most
copious
,
of
which
a
number
certaine
is
named
for
a
number
infinit
,
verse
16.
and
in
themselues
by
all
meanes
fully
furnished
to
hide
and
to
hurt
,
vers.
17.
as
being
armed
with
fire
,
smoke
&
brimstone
,
as
appeareth
in
the
colour
of
their
armour
which
dazeleth
the
eyes
of
all
men
:
and
haue
the
strength
of
Lyons
to
hurt
withall
,
from
which
(
as
out
of
their
mouth
)
the
firie
,
smokie
,
and
stinking
darts
of
the
Pope
are
shot
out
,
vers.
18.
The
other
point
is
,
that
these
butcherers
haue
effected
the
commaundement
of
God
by
fraude
and
violence
,
in
the
two
verses
following
.
Then
the
foure
Angels
were
loosed
,
which
were
prepared
at
an
houre
,
at
a
day
,
at
a
moneth
,
and
at
a
yeare
,
to
slay
the
third
part
of
men
.
15
And
the
number
of
the
troupes
of
horsemen
were
twentie
thousand
times
ten
thousand
:
for
I
heard
the
number
of
them
.
16
I
also
saw
horses
in
a
vision
,
and
them
that
sate
on
them
,
hauing
firie
habbergions
,
and
of
Iacinth
,
and
of
brimstone
;
&
the
heads
of
the
horses
were
as
the
heads
of
Lyons
:
&
out
of
their
mouthes
came
forth
fire
and
smoke
and
brimstone
.
18
By
these
three
was
the
third
part
of
men
killed
,
that
is
,
by
the
fire
,
and
by
the
smoke
,
and
by
the
brimstone
,
which
came
out
of
their
mouthes
.
19
For
their
power
is
in
their
mouthes
,
and
in
their
tayles
:
[
14
](A16102-e7180-b)
14
That
is
,
they
are
harmefull
euery
way
:
on
what
part
soeuer
thou
put
thine
hand
vnto
them
,
or
they
touch
thee
,
they
do
hurt
.
So
the
former
are
called
Scorpions
,
verse
3.
for
their
tayles
are
like
vnto
Serpents
,
hauing
heads
,
wherewith
they
hurt
.
20
[
15
](A16102-e7200-b)
15
Now
remaineth
the
euent
,
(
as
I
sayd
vpon
the
first
verse
)
which
folowed
of
so
many
and
so
grieuous
iudgements
,
in
this
most
wicked
world
:
namely
an
impenitent
obfirmation
of
the
vngodly
in
their
impietie
and
vnrighteousnes
,
though
they
feele
themselues
most
vehemently
pressed
with
the
hand
of
God
:
for
their
obstinate
vngodlines
is
shewed
in
this
verse
;
and
their
vnrighteousnesse
in
the
verse
following
.
Hitherto
hath
bene
the
generall
historie
of
things
to
be
done
vniuersally
in
the
whole
world
:
which
because
it
doth
not
so
much
belong
vnto
the
Church
of
Christ
:
is
therefore
not
so
expressely
distinguished
by
certaintie
of
time
and
other
circumstances
:
but
is
wouen
,
as
they
say
,
with
a
slight
hand
.
Also
there
is
none
other
cause
why
the
historie
of
the
seuenth
Angell
is
passed
ouer
in
this
place
,
them
for
that
the
same
more
properly
appertaineth
vnto
the
historie
of
the
Church
.
But
this
is
more
diligently
set
out
according
to
the
times
thereof
,
Chapter
.
11.
and
16.
as
shall
appeare
vpon
those
places
.
And
the
remnant
of
the
men
which
were
not
killed
by
these
plagues
,
repented
not
of
the
workes
of
their
hands
,
that
they
should
not
worship
diuels
,
and
[
‖
](A16102-e7210-b)
‖
Psal.
115.
4.
and
135.
15.
images
of
gold
and
of
siluer
,
and
of
brasse
,
&
of
stone
,
and
of
wood
,
which
neither
can
see
,
neither
heare
,
nor
go
:
21
Neither
repented
they
of
their
murthers
,
nor
of
their
sorceries
,
neither
of
their
fornication
,
nor
of
their
theftes
.
CHAP.
X.
1
Another
Angel
appeareth
clothed
with
a
cloud
,
2
holding
a
booke
open
,
3
and
crieth
out
.
8
A
voice
from
heauen
commandeth
Iohn
to
take
the
booke
,
10
He
eateth
it
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e7360-b)
1
Now
S.
Iohn
passeth
vnto
the
other
propheticall
historie
,
which
is
of
the
Church
of
God
,
as
I
shewed
that
this
book
should
be
distinguished
,
chap.
4.
1.
This
storie
reacheth
hence
vnto
the
two
and
twentieth
chapter
.
And
this
whole
chapter
is
but
a
transition
from
the
common
historie
of
the
world
,
vnto
that
which
is
particular
of
the
church
.
There
are
in
this
transition
or
passage
,
two
preparatiues
,
as
it
were
,
vnto
this
church
storie
,
comprised
in
this
whole
chapter
.
One
is
the
authoritie
of
Christ
,
reuealing
his
mysteries
,
and
calling
his
seruant
,
vnto
the
seuenth
verse
.
The
other
is
S.
Iohn
his
calling
proper
vnto
this
place
,
and
repeated
from
before
;
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
Authoritie
is
giuen
vnto
this
reuelation
,
by
these
things
:
First
,
by
the
person
of
Christ
,
appearing
from
heauen
in
his
habite
and
countenance
,
strong
,
readie
,
glorious
,
surueying
all
things
by
his
prouidence
,
and
gouerning
them
by
his
omnipotencie
,
verse
1.
Secondly
,
that
he
brought
not
by
chance
,
but
out
of
a
booke
,
this
open
reuelation
set
forth
vnto
the
eye
,
to
signifie
the
same
vnto
the
sea
,
and
land
,
as
Lord
ouer
all
,
verse
2.
Thirdly
,
that
he
offered
the
same
not
whispering
or
muttering
in
a
corner
(
as
false
prophets
doe
)
but
crying
out
with
a
loud
voice
vnto
them
which
sleepe
:
and
with
a
lionish
and
terrible
noise
roused
vp
the
secure
:
the
verie
thunders
themselues
giuing
testimonie
thereunto
,
verse
3.
Lastly
for
that
he
confirmed
all
by
an
othe
,
verse
5.
6.
7.
THen
I
saw
[
2
](A16102-e7370-b)
2
Christ
Iesus
:
see
chap.
7.
2.
another
mightie
Angel
comming
downe
from
heauen
,
clothed
with
a
cloud
;
&
the
raine
bow
was
ouer
his
head
,
&
his
face
was
as
the
sunne
,
&
his
feet
as
pillars
of
fire
.
2
And
he
had
in
his
hand
a
[
3
](A16102-e7390-b)
3
Namely
a
special
booke
of
the
affaires
of
Gods
church
.
For
the
booke
that
conteineth
things
belonging
vnto
the
whole
world
,
is
said
to
be
kept
with
the
creator
,
chap.
5.
1.
but
the
booke
of
the
church
,
with
the
redeemer
,
and
out
of
this
booke
is
taken
the
rest
of
the
historie
of
this
Apocalyps
.
little
book
open
,
and
he
set
his
right
foote
vpon
the
sea
,
and
his
left
on
the
earth
,
3
And
cried
with
a
loud
voice
,
as
when
a
lyon
roareth
:
and
when
he
had
cryed
,
seuen
thunders
vttered
their
voyces
.
4
[
4
](A16102-e7430-b)
4
A
godly
care
is
laudable
,
but
must
be
ioyned
with
knowledg
.
Therefore
nothing
must
be
taken
in
hand
but
by
calling
;
which
must
be
expected
and
waited
for
of
the
godly
.
And
when
the
seuen
thunders
had
vttered
their
voyces
,
I
was
about
to
write
:
but
I
heard
a
voice
from
heauen
saying
vnto
me
,
[
a
](A16102-e7440-b)
a
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
close
.
Seale
vp
those
things
which
the
seuen
thunders
haue
spoken
,
and
write
them
not
.
5
And
the
Angel
which
I
saw
stand
vpon
the
sea
,
&
vpon
the
earth
,
[
b
](A16102-e7460-b)
b
This
was
a
gesture
vsed
of
one
that
sweareth
.
which
men
do
yet
now
adayes
vse
.
lift
vp
his
hand
to
heauen
,
6
And
sware
by
him
that
liueth
for
euermore
;
which
created
heauen
,
and
the
things
that
therein
are
,
and
the
earth
,
and
the
things
that
therein
are
,
and
the
sea
,
and
the
thinges
which
therein
are
,
[
5
](A16102-e7480-b)
5
Neither
time
it selfe
,
nor
the
things
that
are
in
time
:
but
that
the
world
to
come
is
at
h●d
,
which
is
altogether
of
eternitie
&
beyond
all
times
.
that
[
c
](A16102-e7490-b)
c
There
shall
neuer
be
any
more
time
.
time
should
be
no
more
.
7
But
in
the
days
of
the
[
6
](A16102-e7510-b)
6
Wherof
cha.
11.
15.
&
16.
17.
voyce
of
the
seuenth
Angel
,
when
he
shall
blow
the
trumpet
,
the
mysterie
of
God
shal
be
finished
,
as
he
hath
declared
to
his
seruants
the
Prophets
.
8
[
7
](A16102-e7530-b)
7
The
other
part
of
this
Ch.
concerning
the
particular
calling
of
S.
Iohn
to
the
receiuing
of
the
prophesie
following
:
which
is
enioyned
him
,
first
by
signe
in
three
verses
;
then
in
plaine
words
,
in
the
last
verse
.
Vnto
the
setting
forth
of
the
signe
belong
these
things
:
That
S.
Iohn
is
taught
from
heauen
,
to
demand
the
booke
of
prophesie
,
in
this
verse
:
for
these
motions
and
desires
God
doth
inspire
:
that
demanding
the
booke
,
he
is
charged
to
take
it
in
a
figuratiue
manner
,
the
vse
whereof
also
is
expounded
,
verse
9.
(
as
Ezech
2.
vers.
9.
)
whence
this
similitude
is
borrowed
:
lastly
,
for
that
S.
Iohn
at
the
commandement
of
Christ
tooke
the
booke
;
and
found
by
experience
that
the
same
as
proceeding
from
Christ
was
most
sweet
;
but
in
that
it
foretelleth
the
afflictions
of
the
church
,
it
was
most
bitter
vnto
his
spirit
.
And
the
voyce
which
I
heard
from
heauen
,
spake
vnto
me
againe
and
said
,
Go
and
take
the
litle
booke
which
is
open
in
the
hand
of
the
Angel
,
which
standeth
vpon
the
sea
&
vpon
the
earth
.
9
So
I
went
vnto
the
Angel
,
and
said
to
him
,
Giue
me
the
little
booke
.
And
he
said
vnto
me
,
Take
it
,
and
eate
it
vp
;
and
it
shall
make
thy
belly
bitter
,
but
it
shall
be
in
thy
mouth
sweet
as
hony
.
10
Then
I
took
ye
litle
book
out
of
the
Angels
hand
,
and
did
eat
it
vp
;
&
it
was
in
my
mouth
sweet
as
hony
:
but
when
I
had
eaten
it
vp
,
my
belly
was
bitter
11
[
8
](A16102-e7570-b)
8
A
simple
and
plaine
declaration
of
the
signe
before
going
,
witnessing
the
diuine
calling
of
S.
Iohn
,
and
laying
vpon
him
the
necessitie
thereof
.
And
he
said
vnto
me
,
Thou
must
prophecie
againe
before
people
and
nations
,
and
tongues
,
and
many
Kings
.
CHAP.
XI
.
1
The
temple
is
commanded
to
be
measured
.
3
The
Lord
stirreth
vp
two
witnesses
:
7
whom
the
beast
murthereth
,
9
and
no
man
burieth
them
.
11
God
raiseth
them
to
life
.
12
and
calleth
them
vp
to
heauen
,
13
The
wicked
are
terrified
.
15
By
the
trumpet
of
the
seuenth
Angel
,
the
resurrection
18
and
iudgement
is
described
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e7720-b)
1
The
authority
of
the
intended
reuelation
being
declared
,
together
with
the
necessitie
of
that
calling
which
was
particularly
imposed
vpon
Iohn
:
hereafter
followeth
the
historie
of
the
estate
of
Christ
his
church
both
conflicting
or
warfaring
,
&
ouercomming
in
Christ
.
For
both
the
true
church
of
Christ
is
said
to
sight
against
that
which
is
falsely
so
called
,
ouer
the
which
Antichrist
ruleth
;
Christ
Iesus
ouerthrowing
Antichrist
by
the
spirit
of
his
mouth
:
and
Christ
is
said
to
ouercome
most
gloriously
vntill
he
shall
slay
Antichrist
,
by
the
appearance
of
his
comming
,
as
the
Apostle
excellently
teacheth
.
2.
Thes.
2.
8.
So
this
historie
hath
two
parts
:
One
of
the
state
of
the
church
conflicting
with
temptations
,
vnto
the
16.
chap.
The
other
of
the
state
of
the
same
church
,
obteining
victorie
,
thence
vnto
the
20.
chap.
The
first
part
hath
two
members
,
most
conueniently
distributed
into
their
times
,
whereof
the
first
conteineth
an
historie
of
the
Christian
church
for
1260.
yeres
,
what
time
the
Gospel
of
Christ
was
,
as
it
were
,
taken
vp
from
amongst
men
into
heauen
:
the
second
conteineth
an
historie
of
the
same
church
vnto
the
victorie
perfected
.
And
these
two
members
are
briefly
,
though
distinctly
,
propounded
in
this
chap.
but
are
both
of
them
more
at
large
discoursed
,
after
in
due
order
.
For
we
vnderstand
the
state
of
the
church
conflicting
,
out
of
chap.
12
&
13.
and
of
the
same
growing
out
of
afflictions
,
out
of
the
14.
15.
&
16.
chap.
Neither
did
S.
Iohn
at
vnwares
ioyne
together
the
historie
of
these
two
times
in
this
chap.
because
here
is
spoken
of
prophesie
,
which
all
confesse
to
be
but
one
:
iust
&
immutable
in
the
church
,
&
which
Christ
commanded
to
be
continual
.
The
historie
of
the
former
time
reacheth
vnto
the
14.
vers.
the
latter
is
set
downe
in
the
rest
of
this
chap.
In
the
former
are
shewed
these
things
:
the
calling
of
the
seruants
of
God
in
4.
verses
:
the
conflicts
which
the
faithfull
must
godly
vndergo
in
their
calling
,
for
Christ
&
for
his
church
,
thence
vnto
the
10.
ver.
and
their
resurrection
,
&
receiuing
vp
into
heauen
,
vnto
the
14.
verse
.
In
the
calling
of
the
seruants
of
God
,
are
mentioned
two
things
:
the
begetting
and
setling
of
the
church
in
two
verses
:
and
the
education
thereof
in
two
other
verses
.
The
begetting
of
the
church
is
here
commended
vnto
S.
Iohn
by
signe
and
by
speech
:
the
signe
is
a
measuring
rod
;
and
the
speech
a
commandement
to
measure
the
Temple
of
God
,
that
is
,
to
reduce
the
same
vnto
a
new
forme
:
because
the
Gentiles
are
alreadie
entred
into
the
Temple
of
Ierusalem
,
and
shall
shortly
defile
and
ouerthrow
the
same
vtterly
.
[
2
](A16102-e7740-b)
2
Either
that
of
Ierusalem
which
was
a
figure
of
the
church
of
Christ
,
or
that
heauenly
exemplar
,
whereof
verse
19.
but
the
first
liketh
me
better
,
and
the
things
following
doe
all
agree
thereunto
.
The
sence
therefore
is
,
Thou
seest
all
things
in
Gods
house
,
almost
from
the
passion
of
Christ
,
to
be
disordered
:
and
that
not
onely
the
citie
of
Ierusalem
,
but
also
the
court
of
the
Temple
is
trampled
vnder
foote
of
the
nations
,
and
of
prophane
men
whether
Iewes
or
straungers
:
and
that
onely
the
Temple
,
that
is
,
the
bodie
of
the
temple
,
with
the
altar
,
and
a
small
companie
of
good
men
which
truely
worship
God
,
do
now
remaine
,
whom
God
doth
sanctifie
and
confirme
by
his
presence
.
Measure
therefore
this
,
euen
this
true
church
,
or
rather
the
true
type
of
the
true
church
,
omitting
the
rest
and
so
discribe
all
things
from
me
,
that
the
true
church
of
Christ
may
be
,
as
it
were
,
a
very
little
center
:
and
the
church
of
Antichrist
as
the
circle
of
the
center
,
euerie
way
in
length
and
breadth
compassing
about
the
same
:
that
by
way
of
prophesie
thou
mayest
so
declare
openly
,
that
the
state
of
the
Temple
of
God
,
and
the
faithfull
which
worship
him
,
that
is
of
his
church
,
is
much
more
streight
then
the
church
of
Antichrist
.
and
mete
the
Temple
of
God
,
and
the
altar
,
and
them
that
worship
therein
.
2
[
3
](A16102-e7760-b)
3
As
if
he
should
say
,
it
belongeth
nothing
vnto
thee
,
to
iudge
those
which
are
without
,
1.
Cor
5.
12.
which
be
innumerable
:
looke
vnto
those
of
the
houshold
onely
,
or
vnto
the
house
of
the
liuing
God
.
But
the
[
a
](A16102-e7770-b)
a
He
speaketh
of
the
outer
court
,
which
was
called
the
peoples
court
,
because
all
men
might
come
into
that
.
court
which
is
without
the
temple
[
b
](A16102-e7780-b)
b
That
is
counted
to
be
cast
out
,
which
in
measuring
is
refused
as
prophene
.
shut
out
,
and
mete
it
not
:
for
it
is
giuen
vnto
the
[
4
](A16102-e7790-b)
4
To
prophane
persons
,
wicked
,
and
vnbeleeuers
,
aduersaries
vnto
the
Church
.
Gentiles
;
and
the
holy
citie
shall
they
tread
vnder
foote
,
[
5
](A16102-e7800-b)
5
Or
a
thousand
two
hundred
and
threescore
dayes
,
as
is
said
in
the
next
verse
:
that
is
,
a
thousand
two
hundred
and
threescore
yeeres
,
a
day
for
a
yeere
,
as
often
in
Ezechiel
and
Daniel
:
which
thing
I
noted
before
2.
10.
The
beginning
of
these
thousand
two
hundred
and
threescore
yeeres
,
we
account
from
the
passion
of
Christ
,
whereby
(
the
partition
wall
being
broken
downe
)
we
were
made
of
two
,
one
,
Ephes
2.
14.
I
say
one
flocke
vnder
one
shepheard
,
Ioh.
10.
16
&
the
end
of
these
yeres
precisely
falleth
into
the
Popedome
of
Boniface
the
eight
,
who
a
little
before
the
end
of
the
yeere
of
Christ
1294.
entred
the
Popedome
of
Rome
,
in
the
feast
of
S.
Lucie
(
as
Bergomensis
saith
)
hauing
put
in
prison
his
predecessour
Coelestinus
,
whom
by
fraude
,
vnder
colour
of
oracle
,
he
deceiued
:
for
which
cause
,
that
was
well
said
of
him
,
Intrauit
vt
vulpes
,
regnauit
vt
leo
,
mortuus
est
vt
canis
.
That
is
,
He
entred
like
a
foxe
,
reigned
like
a
lion
,
and
died
like
a
dog
.
For
if
from
1294.
yeeres
thou
shalt
take
the
age
of
Christ
which
he
liued
on
the
earth
,
thou
shalt
finde
there
remaineth
iust
1260.
yeares
,
which
are
mentioned
in
this
place
,
and
many
others
.
two
and
fortie
moneths
.
3
But
[
6
](A16102-e7850-b)
6
I
had
rather
translate
it
illud
then
illam
,
the
temple
then
the
cittie
:
for
God
saith
I
will
giue
that
temple
,
&
commit
it
vnto
my
two
witnesses
,
that
is
vnto
the
ministers
of
the
word
,
who
are
few
indeed
,
weake
and
contemptible
:
but
yet
two
,
that
is
of
such
a
number
as
one
of
them
may
helpe
another
,
and
one
confirme
the
testimonie
of
another
vnto
all
men
,
that
from
the
mouth
of
two
or
three
witnesses
euerie
word
may
be
made
good
amongst
men
2.
Cor.
13.
1.
I
wil
giue
the
same
vnto
my
two
witnesses
,
&
they
shal
[
7
](A16102-e7880-b)
7
They
shall
exercise
their
office
inioyned
by
me
by
the
space
of
those
thousand
two
hundred
and
sixtie
yeares
,
in
the
middest
of
afflictions
though
neuer
so
lamentable
;
which
is
figuratiuely
shewed
by
the
mourning
garment
.
prophecie
a
thousand
two
hundreth
and
threescore
daies
,
clothed
in
sackcloth
.
4
These
[
8
](A16102-e7900-b)
8
That
is
,
the
ordinarie
and
perpetuall
instruments
of
spirituall
grace
,
peace
and
light
in
my
Church
,
which
God
by
his
onely
power
preserued
in
this
Temple
.
So
Zach.
4.
3.
are
the
two
oliue
trees
,
and
two
candlestickes
,
standing
before
the
God
of
the
earth
.
5
[
9
](A16102-e7920-b)
9
The
power
and
efficacie
of
the
holy
ministerie
,
and
which
is
truely
Euangelicall
,
is
declared
both
in
earth
and
in
heauen
,
protecting
the
administers
thereof
,
and
destroying
the
enimies
,
in
this
verse
,
vertue
indeede
diuine
,
most
mightily
shewing
forth
it selfe
in
heauen
,
earth
,
and
the
sea
,
verse
6.
as
it
is
described
2.
Cor.
10.
4.
according
to
the
promise
of
Christ
,
Mar.
16.
17.
And
this
is
the
second
place
(
as
I
said
before
)
of
the
combats
which
the
seruants
of
God
must
needes
vnder
goe
in
the
executing
of
their
calling
,
and
of
the
things
that
follow
the
same
combats
.
In
the
combats
or
conflicts
are
these
things
:
to
ouercome
,
in
these
two
verses
;
to
be
ouercome
and
killed
,
verse
7.
After
the
slaughter
follow
these
things
:
that
the
carkasses
of
the
godly
are
layd
abrode
,
verse
8.
being
vnburied
,
are
made
a
matter
of
scorne
,
together
with
cursing
and
bitter
execrations
,
verse
9.
and
that
therefore
gratulations
are
publikely
and
priuately
made
.
verse
.
10.
And
if
any
man
will
hurt
them
,
fire
proceedeth
out
of
their
mouthes
,
and
deuoureth
their
enimies
:
for
if
any
man
will
hurt
them
,
thus
must
he
be
killed
.
6
These
haue
power
to
shut
vp
heauen
,
that
it
raigne
not
in
the
dayes
of
their
prophecying
;
and
haue
power
ouer
the
waters
to
turne
them
into
bloud
,
and
to
smite
the
earth
with
all
maner
plagues
,
as
often
as
they
will
.
7
[
10
](A16102-e7950-b)
10
That
is
,
when
they
haue
spent
those
thousand
two
hundred
and
sixtie
yeares
mentioned
verse
2.
and
3.
in
publishing
their
testimonie
according
to
their
office
.
And
when
they
haue
[
c
](A16102-e7960-b)
c
When
they
haue
done
their
message
.
finished
their
testimonie
,
[
11
](A16102-e7970-b)
11
Of
which
after
,
chap.
13.
&c.
That
beast
is
the
Romaine
Empire
,
made
long
ago
of
ciuill
,
Ecclesiasticall
:
the
chiefe
head
whereof
was
then
Boniface
the
eight
,
as
I
said
before
:
who
lifted
vp
himselfe
in
so
great
arrogancie
(
saith
the
author
of
Fasciculus
temporum
)
that
he
called
himselfe
Lord
of
the
whole
world
,
as
well
in
temporall
causes
as
in
spirituall
.
There
is
extant
of
that
matter
,
written
by
the
same
Boniface
,
most
arrogantly
,
shall
I
say
,
or
most
wickedly
ca.
vnam
sanctam
.
extra
.
de
maioritate
&
obedientia
;
and
in
the
sixt
of
the
decretals
(
which
is
from
the
same
author
)
many
things
are
found
of
the
same
argument
.
the
beast
that
commeth
vp
out
of
the
bottomles
pit
,
shall
[
12
](A16102-e8000-b)
12
He
shall
persecute
most
cruelly
the
holy
men
,
and
put
them
to
death
,
and
shall
wound
&
pierce
through
with
cursings
,
both
their
names
and
writings
.
And
that
this
was
done
to
verie
manie
godly
men
by
Boniface
and
others
,
the
histories
do
declare
,
especially
since
the
time
,
that
the
odious
and
condemned
name
amongst
the
multitude
,
first
of
the
brethren
Waldenses
or
Lugdunenses
,
then
also
of
the
Fraticells
,
was
pretended
,
that
good
men
might
with
more
approbation
be
masta●red
.
make
war
against
them
,
&
shall
ouercome
them
,
and
kill
them
.
8
And
their
corpses
shall
lie
in
the
[
13
](A16102-e8020-b)
13
That
is
,
openly
at
Rome
:
where
at
that
time
was
a
most
great
concourse
of
people
,
the
yeare
of
Iubilie
being
then
first
ordained
by
Boniface
vnto
the
same
end
,
in
the
yeare
of
Christ
one
thousand
three
hundred
,
example
whereof
is
read
Chapter
1.
Extra
.
de
poenucntijs
&
remissionibus
.
So
by
on
act
he
committed
double
iniurie
against
Christ
,
both
abolishing
his
truth
by
the
restoring
of
the
type
of
the
Iubilie
,
and
triumphing
ouer
his
members
by
most
wicked
superstition
.
O
religious
heart
!
Now
,
that
we
should
vnderstand
these
things
of
Rome
,
S.
Iohn
himselfe
is
the
author
,
both
after
in
the
seuenteenth
Chapter
almost
throughout
,
and
also
in
the
circumscription
now
next
following
,
when
he
saith
,
it
is
that
great
Citie
(
as
Chapter
17.
18.
he
calleth
it
)
and
is
spiritually
tearmed
Sodome
and
Egypt
:
and
that
spiritually
(
for
that
must
here
againe
be
repeated
from
before
)
Christ
was
there
crucified
.
For
the
two
first
appellations
signifie
spirituall
wickednesses
:
the
latter
signifieth
the
shew
and
pretence
of
good
,
that
is
,
of
Christian
and
sound
religion
.
Sodome
signifieth
most
licentious
impietie
and
iniustice
;
Egypt
most
cruell
persecution
of
the
people
of
God
;
and
Ierusalem
signifieth
,
the
most
confident
glorying
of
that
Citie
,
as
it
were
in
true
religion
,
being
yet
full
of
falshood
and
vngodlinesse
.
Now
who
is
ignorant
that
these
things
do
rather
and
more
agree
vnto
Rome
,
then
vnto
any
other
Citie
?
The
commendations
of
the
Citie
of
Rome
for
manie
yeares
past
,
are
publikely
notorious
,
which
are
not
for
me
to
gather
together
.
This
onely
I
will
say
,
that
he
long
since
did
verie
well
see
what
Rome
is
,
who
taking
his
leaue
thereof
vsed
these
verses
:
Roma
vale
,
vidi
,
satis
est
vidisse
:
reuertar
Quumleno
,
meretrix
,
scurra
cinaedus
aero
.
Now
farewell
Rome
,
I
haue
thee
seene
:
it
was
inough
to
see
:
I
will
returne
when
as
I
meane
,
baud
,
harlot
,
knaue
to
be
.
streets
of
the
great
citie
,
which
[
d
](A16102-e8120-b)
d
After
a
more
secrete
kind
of
meaning
&
vnderstanding
.
spiritually
is
called
Sodom
&
Egypt
,
[
14
](A16102-e8130-b)
14
Namely
in
his
members
,
as
also
he
said
vnto
Saul
,
Act.
9.
5.
where
also
our
Lord
was
crucified
.
9
And
they
of
the
people
and
kinreds
,
and
tongues
,
&
Gentiles
shall
see
their
corpses
[
15
](A16102-e8150-b)
15
That
is
,
for
three
yeeres
&
an
halfe
:
for
so
manie
yeeres
Boniface
liued
after
his
Iubiley
,
as
Bergomensis
witnesseth
.
three
dayes
and
an
halfe
,
and
shall
not
suffer
their
carkasses
to
be
put
in
graues
.
10
And
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
,
[
16
](A16102-e8170-b)
16
So
much
the
more
shall
they
by
this
occasion
exercise
the
iolities
of
their
Iubilie
.
shall
reioyce
ouer
them
,
&
be
glad
;
and
shall
send
gifts
one
to
another
:
because
these
two
Prophetes
[
17
](A16102-e8180-b)
17
The
Gospel
of
Christ
is
the
affliction
of
the
world
;
&
the
ministerie
therof
,
the
sauour
of
death
vnto
death
,
to
those
that
perish
.
2.
Cor.
2.
16.
vexed
them
that
dwelt
on
the
earth
.
11
[
18
](A16102-e8200-b)
18
The
third
place
as
I
noted
before
,
is
of
the
rising
againe
of
the
Prophets
from
the
dead
,
and
their
carrying
vp
into
heauen
.
For
their
resurrection
is
shewed
in
this
verse
;
their
calling
and
lifting
vp
into
heauen
,
in
the
verse
following
.
But
after
[
19
](A16102-e8210-b)
19
That
is
,
what
time
God
shall
destroy
that
wicked
Boniface
.
three
daies
&
an
halfe
,
[
20
](A16102-e8220-b)
20
That
is
,
the
Prophets
of
God
shall
in
a
sort
rise
againe
,
not
the
same
in
person
(
as
they
say
)
but
in
spirit
;
that
is
,
in
the
power
&
efficacie
of
their
ministerie
,
which
S.
Iohn
expressed
before
vers.
5.
and
6.
And
so
the
prophecy
that
is
spoken
of
Elias
,
is
interpreted
by
the
Angel
to
be
vnderstood
of
Iohn
the
Baptist
,
Luke
1.
17.
For
the
same
Boniface
himselfe
,
who
sought
to
kill
and
destroy
them
,
was
the
fire
of
Gods
mouth
(
which
the
holy
ministerie
sheweth
and
exhibiteth
)
deuoured
,
and
died
miserablie
in
prison
,
by
the
indeuour
of
Sarra
Columnensis
,
and
Nogaretus
a
French
knight
,
whom
Philip
the
faire
king
of
France
sent
into
Italie
but
with
a
verie
small
power
.
the
spirit
of
life
comming
from
God
,
shal
enter
into
them
;
&
they
[
21
](A16102-e8240-b)
21
That
is
,
the
most
grieuous
heat
of
afflictions
and
persecutions
shall
stay
for
a
while
,
for
the
great
amaze
that
shall
arise
vpon
that
sodaine
and
vnlooked
for
iudgement
of
God
.
shall
stand
vp
vpon
their
feete
:
&
great
feare
shall
come
vpon
them
which
shal
see
them
.
12
After
this
they
heard
a
great
voice
from
heauen
,
saying
vnto
them
,
Come
vp
hither
.
And
[
22
](A16102-e8260-b)
22
They
were
called
by
God
into
heauen
,
and
taken
out
of
this
malignant
world
,
into
the
heauenly
Church
,
which
also
lyeth
hidden
here
in
the
earth
,
to
exercise
their
calling
secretly
:
as
of
whom
this
wretched
world
was
vnworthy
.
Heb.
11.
38.
For
the
Church
of
the
wicked
is
by
comparison
called
the
earth
or
the
world
;
&
the
Church
of
the
godly
,
heauen
.
So
in
ancient
time
amongst
the
godly
Israelits
;
so
amongst
the
Iewes
in
the
dayes
of
Manasses
&
other
kings
,
whom
the
earth
refused
that
heires
of
heauen
,
we
reade
that
they
lay
hidden
as
heauen
in
the
earth
.
they
ascended
vp
to
heauen
in
a
cloud
,
[
23
](A16102-e8270-b)
23
Yet
could
they
not
hinder
the
secret
ones
of
the
Lord
(
as
the
psalmist
calleth
them
,
Psal.
83.
4.
)
but
that
they
went
on
forward
in
his
worke
.
and
their
enimies
did
see
them
.
13
[
24
](A16102-e8290-b)
24
Bergomensis
saith
,
in
the
yere
of
our
Lord
1301
this
yeare
a
blasing
starre
foretelling
great
calamitie
to
come
,
appeared
in
heauen
:
in
which
yeare
vpon
the
feast
of
S.
Andrew
,
so
great
an
earthquake
suddenly
arose
,
as
neuer
before
:
which
also
continuing
by
times
,
for
many
dayes
,
ouerthrew
many
stately
houses
.
This
saith
he
of
the
yeare
next
folowing
the
Iubilie
:
which
S.
Iohn
so
many
ages
before
,
expressed
as
it
were
word
for
word
.
And
the
same
houre
was
a
great
earthquake
,
and
the
tenth
part
of
the
citie
fell
,
and
in
the
earthquake
was
slain
in
number
seuen
thousand
men
:
and
the
rest
were
sore
feared
,
[
25
](A16102-e8300-b)
25
They
were
in
deed
broken
with
present
astonishment
of
mind
,
but
did
not
earnestly
repent
as
they
ought
to
haue
done
.
and
[
c
](A16102-e8310-b)
c
Glorified
God
by
confessing
his
Name
.
gaue
glorie
to
the
God
of
heauen
.
14
[
26
](A16102-e8330-b)
26
He
passeth
vnto
the
second
historie
,
which
is
the
second
part
of
this
Chapter
.
S.
Iohn
calleth
these
the
second
and
third
wo
,
hauing
respect
vnto
Chap
9.
12.
The
second
wo
is
past
,
and
behold
the
third
wo
will
come
quickly
.
15
[
27
](A16102-e8360-b)
27
Of
whose
sounding
the
trumpet
Christ
expresly
foretold
.
ch.
10.
7.
&
this
is
the
second
part
of
this
chap.
containing
a
general
historie
of
the
Christian
Church
,
from
the
time
of
Boniface
the
8.
vnto
the
consummation
of
the
victory
declared
by
voice
from
heauen
.
In
this
historie
there
are
three
branches
:
a
preparation
by
the
sound
of
the
Angels
trumpet
:
a
narration
by
the
voyces
of
heauenly
Angels
&
Elders
:
and
a
confirmation
by
signe
.
Then
the
seuenth
Angel
blew
the
trumpet
,
&
there
were
great
voyces
in
heauen
saying
,
[
28
](A16102-e8370-b)
28
The
narration
hath
2.
parts
;
an
acclamation
of
the
heauenvly
creatures
,
in
this
vers
.
and
,
both
an
adoration
by
all
the
Elders
,
vers.
16.
&
also
a
most
ample
thanks
giuing
,
ver.
17.
18.
The
sence
of
the
acclamation
is
,
Now
the
Lord
is
entred
on
his
kingdom
,
&
hath
restored
his
Church
,
in
which
most
mightily
recouered
from
the
profanation
of
the
Gentiles
,
he
may
glorifie
him self
.
Namely
,
that
,
which
the
Lord
ordained
when
first
he
ordained
his
Church
,
that
the
faith
of
the
Saints
doth
now
behold
as
accomplished
.
The
kingdomes
of
this
world
are
our
Lords
,
and
his
Christs
,
who
shall
raigne
for
euermore
.
16
[
29
](A16102-e8390-b)
29
As
before
7.
11.
This
giuing
of
thanks
is
altogether
of
the
same
content
with
the
words
going
before
.
And
the
foure
and
twentie
Elders
,
which
sate
before
God
on
their
thrones
,
fel
vpon
their
faces
,
and
worshipped
God
,
17
Saying
,
We
giue
thee
thankes
,
Lord
God
almightie
,
Which
art
,
and
which
wast
,
and
which
art
to
come
:
for
that
thou
hast
taken
vnto
thee
thy
great
might
,
and
hast
entred
thy
kingdome
.
18
[
30
](A16102-e8420-b)
30
A
speech
of
the
Hebrew
language
,
as
much
to
say
,
as
,
the
Gentiles
being
angry
,
thine
inflamed
wrath
came
vpon
them
,
and
shewed
it selfe
from
heauen
,
occasioned
by
their
anger
and
furie
.
And
the
Nations
were
angrie
,
and
thy
wrath
is
come
,
and
the
time
of
the
dead
,
that
they
should
be
iudged
,
and
that
thou
shouldest
giue
reward
vnto
thy
seruants
the
Prophetes
,
and
to
the
Saintes
,
and
to
them
that
feare
thy
Name
,
both
small
and
great
,
and
shouldest
destroy
them
,
which
destroy
the
earth
.
19
Then
the
temple
of
God
was
[
31
](A16102-e8440-b)
31
This
is
the
confirmation
of
the
next
prophecie
before
going
by
signes
exhibited
in
heauen
,
and
that
of
two
sortes
,
where
of
some
are
visible
,
as
the
passing
away
of
of
the
heauen
,
the
opening
of
the
Temple
,
the
Arke
of
the
couenant
appearing
in
the
Temple
,
&
testifying
the
glorious
presence
of
God
,
and
the
lightnings
:
others
apprehended
by
eare
and
such
more
dull
sences
,
which
beare
witnesse
in
heauen
and
in
earth
to
the
truth
of
the
iudgements
of
God
.
opened
in
heauen
,
&
there
was
seen
in
his
Temple
the
Arke
of
his
couenant
:
&
there
came
lightnings
,
&
voyces
,
and
thundrings
,
and
earthquake
,
and
great
hayle
.
CHAP.
XII
.
1
A
woman
2
appeareth
trauelling
with
child
,
4
whose
child
the
Dragon
would
deuour
,
7
but
Michaell
ouercommeth
him
,
9
and
casteth
him
out
,
13
&
the
more
he
is
cast
downe
&
vanquished
,
the
more
fiercely
he
exerciseth
his
subtleties
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e8580-b)
1
Hitherto
hath
bene
the
generall
prophecie
,
comprehended
in
two
partes
,
as
I
shewed
vpon
the
11.
chapter
.
Now
shal
be
declared
the
first
part
of
this
prophecie
,
in
this
&
the
next
chap
and
the
latter
part
in
the
14.
15.
and
16.
chapters
.
Vnto
the
first
part
,
which
is
of
the
conflicting
or
militant
Church
,
belong
two
things
:
The
beginning
and
the
progresse
of
the
same
in
conflictes
and
Christian
combats
Of
which
two
,
the
beginning
or
vpspringing
of
the
Church
is
described
in
this
chap.
&
the
progresse
thereof
in
the
chap.
following
.
The
beginning
of
the
Christian
Church
we
define
to
be
from
the
first
moment
of
the
conception
of
Christ
,
vntil
that
time
wherein
this
Church
was
as
it
were
weyned
and
taken
away
from
the
breast
or
milk
of
her
mother
:
which
is
the
time
when
the
Church
of
the
Iewes
with
their
Citie
&
Temple
was
ouerthrowne
by
the
iudgement
of
God
.
So
we
haue
in
this
chapter
the
storie
of
69.
yeares
&
vpwardes
.
The
partes
of
this
chap.
are
3.
The
first
is
,
the
historie
of
the
conception
&
bearing
in
wombe
,
in
4.
verses
.
The
second
,
an
historie
of
the
birth
,
from
the
5.
vers.
vnto
the
12.
The
third
is
,
of
the
woman
that
had
brought
forth
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chap.
And
these
seuerall
parts
haue
euery
one
their
conflictes
.
Therfore
in
that
first
part
are
two
things
contained
,
one
the
conception
&
bearing
in
wombe
,
in
2.
verses
:
&
another
of
the
lying
in
waite
of
the
Dragon
against
that
which
should
be
brought
forth
,
in
the
next
2.
verses
.
In
the
first
point
are
these
things
;
the
description
of
the
mother
,
vers.
4.
and
of
the
dolours
of
childbirth
,
vers.
2.
all
shewed
vnto
Iohn
from
heauen
.
ANd
there
appeared
a
great
wonder
in
heauen
:
[
2
](A16102-e8590-b)
2
A
type
of
the
true
and
holie
Church
,
which
then
was
in
the
Nation
of
the
Iewes
.
This
Church
(
as
is
the
state
of
the
holy
Church
Catholike
)
did
in
it selfe
shine
about
with
glory
giuen
of
God
,
troad
vnder
feete
mutabilitie
and
changeablenesse
,
and
possessed
the
kingdome
of
heauen
as
the
heire
thereof
.
A
woman
clothed
with
the
Sunne
,
and
the
Moone
was
vnder
her
feete
,
and
vpon
her
head
a
crowne
of
twelue
starres
.
2
And
[
3
](A16102-e8610-b)
3
For
this
is
that
barren
woman
that
brought
not
forth
,
of
which
Esa.
54.
1.
&
Gal.
4
27.
she
cried
out
for
good
cause
,
&
was
tormented
at
that
time
;
when
in
the
iudgement
of
all
she
seemed
neare
vnto
death
,
and
in
manner
ready
to
giue
vp
the
ghost
,
by
reason
of
her
weakenesse
and
pouerrie
.
being
with
child
,
she
cried
trauelling
in
birth
,
&
was
pained
ready
to
be
deliuered
.
3
And
there
appeared
another
wonder
in
heauen
:
[
4
](A16102-e8630-b)
4
That
is
,
the
deuill
or
Satan
(
as
is
declared
,
verse
9
)
mightie
,
angrie
,
and
full
of
wrath
.
for
behold
a
great
red
Dragon
hauing
[
5
](A16102-e8640-b)
5
Thereby
to
withstand
those
seuen
Churches
before
spoken
of
,
that
is
,
the
Catholique
Church
;
and
that
with
kinglie
furniture
and
tyrannicall
magnificence
,
signified
by
the
crownes
set
vpon
his
heades
,
as
if
the
same
without
controuersie
belonged
vnto
him
by
proper
right
:
as
also
he
boasted
vnto
Christ
,
Mat.
4.
9.
See
after
,
vpon
chap.
13.
1.
seuen
heads
,
&
[
6
](A16102-e8650-b)
6
More
then
are
the
hornes
of
the
Lambe
,
or
then
the
Churches
are
:
so
well
furnished
doth
the
tyrant
brag
himselfe
to
be
,
vnto
all
manner
of
mischief
.
ten
hornes
,
and
seuen
crownes
vpon
his
heads
:
4
[
7
](A16102-e8670-b)
7
After
the
description
of
Satan
followeth
his
actions
that
is
,
his
battell
offered
vnto
the
Church
,
partly
to
that
which
is
visible
,
wherein
the
wheat
is
mingled
with
the
chaffe
,
and
the
good
fish
with
that
which
is
euil
;
a
good
part
hereof
,
though
in
appearance
it
shined
as
the
starres
shine
in
heauen
,
he
is
sayd
to
thrust
downe
out
of
heauen
,
and
to
peruert
:
for
if
it
were
possible
,
he
would
peruert
euen
the
elect
,
Mat.
24.
24.
and
partly
to
the
elect
members
of
the
holy
Catholique
Church
,
in
the
second
part
of
this
verse
.
Many
therefore
of
the
members
of
the
visible
Church
(
saith
S.
Iohn
)
he
ouerthrew
and
triumphed
vpon
them
.
His
taile
drew
the
third
part
of
the
starres
of
heauen
,
and
cast
them
to
the
earth
.
And
the
Dragon
[
8
](A16102-e8680-b)
8
He
withstood
that
elect
Church
of
the
Iewes
,
which
was
now
readie
to
bring
forth
the
Christian
Church
,
and
watched
for
that
she
should
bring
forth
.
For
the
whole
Church
,
and
whole
bodie
is
compared
vnto
a
woman
:
and
a
part
of
the
Church
,
vnto
that
which
is
brought
forth
,
as
we
haue
noted
at
large
vpon
Cant.
7.
6.
stood
before
the
woman
,
which
was
readie
to
be
deliuered
,
[
9
](A16102-e8690-b)
9
Christ
mysticall
(
as
they
call
him
)
that
is
,
the
whole
Church
,
consisting
of
the
person
of
Christ
as
the
head
,
and
of
the
body
vnited
thereunto
by
the
spirite
,
so
is
the
name
of
Christ
taken
.
1.
Cor.
12.
12.
to
deuour
her
child
,
when
she
had
brought
it
forth
.
5
[
10
](A16102-e8710-b)
10
The
second
history
is
of
the
Church
deliuered
of
child
:
in
which
first
the
consideration
of
the
child
borne
,
&
of
the
mother
is
described
in
two
verses
:
secondly
the
battaile
of
the
Dragon
against
the
young
child
,
&
the
victorie
obteined
against
him
,
in
three
verses
following
:
last
of
all
is
sung
a
song
of
victorie
,
vnto
the
twelfth
verse
.
Now
S.
Iohn
in
consideration
of
the
child
borne
,
noteth
two
things
;
for
he
both
describeth
him
,
and
his
station
or
place
in
this
verse
.
So
she
brought
foorth
a
[
11
](A16102-e8720-b)
11
That
is
,
Christ
the
head
of
the
Church
ioyned
with
his
Church
(
the
beginning
,
roote
,
and
foundation
whereof
is
the
same
Christ
)
indowed
with
kinglie
power
,
and
taken
vp
into
heauen
out
of
the
iawes
of
Satan
(
who
as
a
Serpent
did
bite
him
vpon
the
crosse
)
that
sitting
vpon
the
coelestrall
throne
he
might
reigne
ouer
all
.
man
child
,
which
should
rule
all
Nations
with
a
rod
of
yron
:
and
her
child
was
taken
vp
vnto
God
and
to
his
throne
.
6
[
12
](A16102-e8740-b)
12
The
Church
of
Christ
which
was
of
the
Iewes
,
after
his
Assumption
into
heauen
,
hid
it selfe
in
the
world
as
in
a
wildernesse
,
trusting
in
the
onely
defence
of
God
,
as
witnesseth
S.
Luke
in
the
Actes
of
the
Apostles
.
And
the
woman
fled
into
the
wildernes
,
where
she
hath
a
place
prepared
of
God
;
that
[
13
](A16102-e8750-b)
13
Namely
the
Apostles
and
seruantes
of
God
,
ordeined
to
feede
with
the
word
of
life
,
the
Church
collected
both
of
Iewes
and
Gentiles
;
vnlesse
any
man
will
take
the
word
alerent
,
impersonally
,
after
the
vse
of
the
Hebrwes
,
in
steed
of
aleretur
:
but
I
like
the
first
better
.
For
he
hath
respect
vnto
those
two
Prophets
,
of
whom
chapter
11.
3.
as
for
the
meaning
of
the
1260.
dayes
,
looke
the
same
place
.
they
should
feed
her
there
a
thousand
,
two
hundreth
and
three
score
dayes
.
7
And
there
was
a
battell
fought
in
heauen
,
[
14
](A16102-e8790-b)
14
Christ
the
Prince
of
Angels
,
and
head
of
the
Church
,
who
beareth
that
yron
rod
,
verse
5.
See
the
notes
vpon
Dan.
12
1.
In
this
verse
is
a
description
of
the
battell
;
and
of
the
uictorie
,
in
the
two
verses
following
.
The
Psalmist
had
respect
vnto
this
battell
,
Psal
68.
19.
and
Paul
,
Ephes.
4.
8.
&
Col.
2.
15.
Michaell
and
his
Angels
fought
against
the
Dragon
,
and
the
Dragon
fought
and
his
Angels
.
8
[
15
](A16102-e8810-b)
15
The
description
of
the
victorie
,
by
denying
of
one
thing
in
this
verse
,
and
by
affirming
the
contrary
in
the
next
verse
.
As
that
Satan
gained
nothing
in
heauen
,
but
was
by
the
power
of
God
throwen
down
into
this
world
,
wherof
he
is
prince
:
Christ
himselfe
and
his
elect
members
standing
still
by
the
throne
of
God
.
But
they
preuailed
not
,
neither
was
their
[
a
](A16102-e8820-b)
a
They
were
cast
out
,
so
that
they
were
neuer
seene
in
heauen
any
more
.
place
found
any
more
in
heauen
.
9
And
that
great
Dragon
was
cast
out
,
that
old
serpent
,
which
is
called
the
deuil
and
Satan
,
which
deceiueth
all
the
world
:
he
was
euen
cast
into
the
earth
,
and
his
Angels
were
cast
out
with
him
.
10
Then
I
heard
a
loud
voyce
in
heauen
,
saying
,
[
16
](A16102-e8860-b)
16
The
song
of
victorie
or
triumph
,
containing
first
,
a
proposition
of
the
glorie
of
God
and
of
Christ
,
shewed
in
that
victorie
:
secondly
it
containeth
a
reason
of
the
same
proposition
,
taken
from
the
effects
,
as
that
the
enemie
is
ouercome
in
battell
,
in
this
verse
,
and
that
the
godly
are
made
conquerours
(
and
more
then
conquerours
,
Rom.
8.
37.
)
verse
11.
Thirdly
a
conclusion
,
wherein
is
an
exhortation
vnto
the
Angels
,
and
Saints
;
&
vnto
the
world
a
Prophecie
of
great
miserie
,
and
of
destruction
procured
by
the
deuill
against
mankinde
,
lest
himselfe
should
shortlie
be
miserable
alone
,
verse
12.
Now
is
come
saluation
,
and
strength
,
&
the
kingdome
of
our
God
,
&
the
power
of
his
Christ
:
for
the
accuser
of
our
brethren
is
cast
down
,
which
accused
them
before
our
God
day
and
night
.
11
But
they
ouercame
him
by
the
bloud
of
that
Lambe
,
and
by
that
word
of
their
testimony
,
and
they
[
b
](A16102-e8880-b)
b
He
is
sayd
in
the
Hebrew
tonge
,
to
loue
his
life
,
that
esteemeth
nothing
more
precious
then
his
life
:
and
on
the
other
side
,
he
is
sayd
not
to
loue
his
life
,
who
doubteth
not
to
hazard
is
,
whensoeuer
neede
requireth
.
loued
not
their
liues
vnto
the
death
.
12
Therefore
reioyce
,
ye
heauens
,
and
ye
that
dwell
in
them
.
Wo
to
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
,
and
of
the
sea
:
for
the
deuill
is
come
downe
vnto
you
,
full
of
great
wrath
,
knowing
that
he
hath
but
a
short
time
.
13
Now
when
[
17
](A16102-e8910-b)
17
The
third
part
:
an
historie
of
the
woman
deliuered
,
consisting
of
two
members
,
the
present
battell
of
Satan
against
the
Christian
Church
of
the
Iewish
Nation
,
in
foure
verses
:
and
the
battell
intended
against
the
seede
thereof
,
that
is
,
against
the
Church
of
the
Gentiles
,
which
is
called
holy
by
reason
of
the
Gospell
of
Christ
,
in
the
two
last
verses
.
the
Dragon
saw
that
he
was
cast
downe
vnto
the
earth
,
he
persecuted
the
woman
which
had
brought
forth
the
man
child
.
14
[
18
](A16102-e8940-b)
18
That
is
,
being
strengthened
with
diuine
power
,
and
taught
by
oracle
,
she
fled
swiftly
from
the
assault
of
the
deuill
,
and
from
the
common
destruction
of
Ierusalem
,
&
went
vnto
a
solitarie
Citie
beyond
Iordan
called
Pella
,
as
Eusebius
telleth
in
the
fift
Chapter
of
the
third
booke
of
his
Ecclesiasticall
historie
:
which
place
God
had
commaunded
her
by
Reuelation
.
But
to
the
woman
were
giuen
two
wings
of
a
great
Eagle
,
that
she
might
flie
from
the
presence
of
the
Serpent
into
the
wildernesse
,
into
her
place
,
where
she
might
be
nourished
for
a
[
c
](A16102-e8950-b)
c
Into
that
place
which
God
had
appointed
for
her
.
[
19
](A16102-e8960-b)
19
That
is
for
three
yeares
&
a
halfe
:
so
the
same
speach
is
taken
Dan.
7.
25.
This
space
of
time
is
reckoned
in
manner
from
that
last
&
most
grieuous
rebellion
of
the
Iewes
,
vnto
the
destruction
of
the
Citie
and
temple
:
for
their
defection
or
falling
away
began
in
the
12.
yeare
of
Nero
;
before
the
beginning
whereof
,
many
foresignes
and
predictions
were
shewed
from
heauen
,
as
Iosephus
writeth
lib.
7.
cap.
12.
and
Hegesippus
lib.
5.
cap.
44.
amongest
which
this
is
verie
memorable
,
that
in
the
feast
of
Pentecost
not
onely
a
great
sound
and
noyse
was
heard
in
the
Temple
,
but
also
a
voyce
was
heard
of
many
out
of
the
Sanctuarie
,
which
cried
out
vnto
all
.
Let
vs
depart
hence
.
Now
three
yeares
and
a
halfe
after
this
defection
was
begun
of
the
lewes
,
and
those
wonders
happened
,
the
Citie
was
taken
by
force
,
the
Temple
ouerthrowne
,
and
the
place
forsaken
of
God
:
and
this
compasse
of
time
S.
Iohn
noted
in
this
place
.
time
,
and
times
,
and
halfe
a
time
.
15
[
20
](A16102-e8980-b)
20
That
is
,
he
inflamed
the
Romanes
and
Nations
,
that
they
persecuting
the
Iewish
people
with
cruell
armes
,
might
by
the
same
occasion
inuade
the
Church
of
Christ
,
now
departed
from
Ierusalem
and
out
of
Iudaea
.
For
it
is
an
vsuall
thing
in
Scripture
,
that
the
raging
tumultes
of
the
Nations
should
be
compared
vnto
waters
.
And
the
Serpent
cast
out
of
his
mouth
water
after
the
woman
,
like
a
flood
;
that
he
might
cause
her
to
be
caried
away
of
the
flood
.
16
[
21
](A16102-e9000-b)
21
That
is
,
there
was
offered
in
their
place
other
Iewes
,
vnto
the
Romanes
&
nations
raging
against
that
people
:
and
it
came
to
passe
thereby
that
the
Church
of
God
was
saued
whole
from
that
violence
;
that
most
raging
floud
of
persecution
which
the
Dragon
vomited
out
being
altogether
spent
in
the
destruction
of
those
other
Iewes
.
But
the
earth
holpe
the
woman
,
and
the
earth
opened
her
mouth
,
and
swalowed
vp
the
flood
,
which
the
dragon
had
cast
out
of
his
mouth
.
17
[
22
](A16102-e9020-b)
22
Being
set
on
fire
by
this
meanes
,
he
began
to
be
more
mad
,
&
because
he
perceiued
that
his
purpose
against
the
Christian
Church
of
the
Iewish
remnant
was
come
to
naught
:
he
resolued
to
fall
vpon
her
seed
,
that
is
,
the
Church
gathered
also
by
God
of
the
Gentiles
,
&
the
holy
members
of
the
same
.
And
this
is
that
other
branch
,
as
I
said
vpon
the
13.
ver.
in
which
the
purpose
of
Satan
is
shewed
,
ver.
17
and
his
attempt
.
ver.
18.
Then
the
dragon
was
wroth
with
the
woman
:
and
went
to
make
warre
with
the
remnant
of
her
seed
,
which
keepe
the
commandements
of
God
,
and
which
haue
the
testimonie
of
Iesus
Christ
.
18
[
23
](A16102-e9040-b)
23
That
is
,
as
a
most
mightie
tempest
he
rushed
vpon
the
whole
world
(
whose
Prince
he
is
)
to
raise
the
floudflous
&
prouoke
the
nations
,
that
they
might
by
their
furious
billowes
tosse
vp
&
down
,
driue
here
&
there
,
&
finally
destroy
the
Church
of
Christ
with
the
holy
members
of
the
same
.
But
the
prouidence
of
God
resisted
his
attempt
,
that
he
might
fauour
the
Church
of
the
Gentiles
yet
tender
&
as
it
were
greene
.
The
rest
of
this
story
of
the
Dragon
is
excellently
prosecuted
by
the
Apostle
S.
Iohn
hereafter
in
chap.
20.
For
here
the
dragon
endeuoring
to
do
mischief
,
was
by
God
cast
into
prison
.
And
he
stood
on
the
sea
sand
.
CHAP.
XIII
.
1
The
beast
with
many
heades
is
described
,
8
which
draweth
the
most
part
of
the
world
to
Idolatrie
.
11
The
other
beast
rising
out
of
the
earth
.
15
giueth
power
vnto
him
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e9140-b)
1
The
Apostle
hauing
declared
the
springing
vp
of
the
Christian
Church
,
and
the
state
of
that
Church
from
which
ours
taketh
her
beginning
,
doeth
now
passe
vnto
the
storie
of
the
progresse
thereof
,
as
I
shewed
in
the
entrance
of
the
former
Chap.
And
this
historie
of
the
progresse
of
the
Church
and
the
battailes
thereof
,
is
set
downe
in
this
Chapter
,
but
distinctly
in
two
partes
;
one
is
of
the
ciuill
Romane
Empire
,
vnto
the
tenth
verse
.
Another
of
the
body
Ecclesiasticall
or
Propheticall
,
thence
vnto
the
end
of
the
Chapter
.
In
the
former
part
are
shewed
these
things
:
First
the
state
of
that
Empire
,
in
foure
verses
;
then
the
actes
thereof
,
in
three
verses
;
after
,
the
effect
,
which
is
exceeding
great
glorie
,
verse
8.
And
last
of
all
is
commended
the
vse
:
and
the
instruction
of
the
godly
against
the
euils
that
shall
come
from
the
same
,
verse
9.
10.
The
historie
of
the
state
,
containeth
a
most
ample
description
of
the
beast
first
intire
,
verse
1.
2.
and
the
restored
after
hurt
,
verse
3.
4.
[
2
](A16102-e9160-b)
2
On
the
sand
whereof
stood
the
deuill
practising
new
tempests
against
the
Church
,
in
the
verse
next
before
going
:
what
time
the
Empire
of
Rome
was
endangered
by
domesticall
dissentions
,
and
was
mightily
tossed
,
hauing
euer
and
anone
new
heads
,
and
new
Emperours
.
See
after
,
17.
8.
out
of
the
sea
,
which
had
seuen
heads
,
and
[
3
](A16102-e9170-b)
3
Hauing
the
same
instruments
of
power
,
prouidence
,
and
most
expert
gouernement
,
which
the
Dragon
is
sayd
to
haue
had
.
Chapter
12.
3.
ten
hornes
,
and
[
4
](A16102-e9180-b)
4
We
read
in
the
12.
Chapter
and
3.
verse
,
that
the
Dragon
had
seuen
crownes
set
vpon
seuen
heads
:
because
the
thiefe
auoucheth
himselfe
to
be
the
proper
Lord
and
Prince
of
the
world
:
but
this
beast
is
sayd
to
haue
ten
crownes
,
set
vpon
seuerall
not
heades
but
hornes
:
because
the
beast
is
beholden
for
all
vnto
the
Dragon
,
verse
2.
and
doth
not
otherwise
raigne
,
then
by
law
of
subiection
giuen
by
him
,
namely
,
that
he
employ
his
hornes
against
the
Church
of
God
.
The
speach
is
taken
from
the
auncient
custome
and
forme
of
deali●●
in
such
case
:
by
which
they
that
were
absolute
kings
did
weare
the
diad●me
vpon
their
heades
;
but
their
vassals
and
such
as
raigned
by
grace
from
them
,
wore
the
same
vpon
their
hoodes
;
for
so
they
might
commodiously
lay
downe
their
diademes
when
they
came
into
the
presence
of
their
Soueraignes
:
as
also
the
Elders
are
sayd
,
when
they
adored
God
which
sate
vpon
the
throne
,
to
haue
cast
downe
their
crownes
before
him
.
Chapter
4.
10.
vpon
his
hornes
were
ten
crownes
;
&
vpon
his
heads
[
5
](A16102-e9200-b)
5
Contrarie
to
that
,
which
God
of
old
commanded
should
be
written
in
the
head
peece
of
the
high
Priest
,
that
is
Sanctitas
Iehouae
.
Holinesse
vnto
the
Lord
.
The
name
of
blasphemie
imposed
by
the
Dragon
,
is
(
as
I
thinke
)
that
which
Saint
Paule
saith
in
the
second
Chapter
of
his
second
Epistle
to
the
Thessalonians
verse
4.
He
sitteth
as
God
,
and
boasteth
him selfe
to
be
God
.
For
this
name
of
blasphemie
both
the
Romane
Emperours
did
then
challenge
vnto
themselues
,
as
Suetonius
and
Dion
doe
report
of
Caligula
and
Domitian
:
and
after
them
the
Popes
of
Rome
did
with
full
mouth
prefesse
the
same
of
themselues
;
when
they
challenged
vnto
themselues
soueraignetie
in
holy
things
;
of
which
kinde
of
sayings
the
sixt
booke
of
the
Decretals
,
the
Clementines
,
and
the
Extrauagants
,
are
very
full
.
For
these
men
were
not
content
with
that
which
Anglicus
wrote
in
his
Poëtria
,
(
the
beginning
whereof
is
,
Papa
stupor
mundi
.
The
Pope
is
the
wonder
of
the
world
)
Nec
Deus
es
,
nec
homo
;
sed
neuter
es
inter
vtrumque
.
Thou
art
not
God
,
ne
art
thou
man
,
but
neuter
mixt
of
both
;
as
the
glose
witnesseth
vpon
the
fixt
booke
:
But
they
were
bold
to
take
vnto
themselues
the
very
name
of
God
,
and
to
accept
it
giuen
of
others
:
according
as
almost
an
hundred
and
twentie
yeares
since
,
there
was
made
for
Sixtus
the
fourth
when
he
should
first
enter
into
Rome
in
his
dignitie
Papall
,
a
pageant
of
triumph
,
and
cunningly
fixed
vpon
the
gate
of
the
Citie
he
should
enter
at
,
hauing
written
vpon
it
this
blasphemous
verse
.
Oraclo
vocis
mundi
moderaris
habenas
,
Et
merito
in
●erris
crederis
esse
Deus
.
By
oracle
of
thine
owne
voyce
the
world
thou
gouernst
all
,
And
worthely
a
God
on
earth
,
men
thinke
and
do
thee
call
.
These
and
sixe
hundred
the
like
who
can
impute
vnto
that
modestie
whereby
good
men
of
old
would
haue
themselues
called
the
seruauntes
of
the
seruauntes
of
God
?
Verely
either
this
is
a
name
of
blasphemie
:
or
there
is
none
at
all
.
the
name
of
blasphemie
.
2
And
this
beast
which
I
saw
,
was
[
6
](A16102-e9360-b)
6
Swift
as
the
Leopard
,
easily
clasping
all
things
,
as
the
Beare
doth
with
her
foote
,
and
tearing
and
deuouring
all
things
with
the
mouth
as
doth
the
Lyon
.
like
a
Leopard
,
and
his
feete
like
a
beare
,
&
his
mouth
as
the
mouth
of
a
Lyon
:
[
7
](A16102-e9370-b)
7
That
is
,
he
lent
the
same
vnto
the
beast
to
vse
when
he
perceiued
that
himselfe
could
not
escape
,
but
must
needes
be
taken
by
the
hand
of
the
Angell
,
and
cast
into
the
bottomlesse
pit
,
Chapter
20.
yet
did
he
not
so
abandon
the
same
vtterly
from
himselfe
,
but
that
he
might
vse
it
as
long
as
he
could
.
and
the
Dragon
gaue
him
his
power
,
and
his
throne
,
and
great
authoritie
.
3
[
8
](A16102-e9390-b)
8
This
is
the
other
place
that
appertaineth
to
the
description
of
the
beast
of
Rome
:
that
besides
that
naturall
dignitie
,
and
amplitude
of
the
Romaine
Empire
,
which
was
shadowed
in
the
two
former
verses
,
there
was
added
this
also
as
miraculous
,
that
one
head
was
wounded
,
as
it
were
,
vnto
death
,
and
was
healed
againe
,
as
from
heauen
,
in
the
sight
of
all
men
.
This
head
of
Nero
the
Emperour
,
in
whom
the
race
of
the
Caesars
fell
from
the
Imperiall
dignitie
,
and
the
gouernment
of
the
Common
weale
was
translated
vnto
others
:
in
whose
handes
the
Empire
was
so
cured
and
recouered
to
health
,
as
it
seemed
vnto
all
so
much
the
more
deepelie
rooted
and
grounded
fast
,
then
euer
before
.
And
hence
followed
those
effectes
,
which
are
next
spoken
of
:
First
,
an
admiration
of
a
certaine
power
,
as
it
were
,
sacred
and
diuine
,
susteining
the
Empire
and
gouerning
it
:
Secondly
,
the
obedience
and
submission
of
the
whole
earth
,
in
this
verse
:
Thirdly
,
the
adoration
of
the
Dragon
,
and
most
wicked
worshipping
of
deuils
,
confirmed
by
the
Romane
Emperours
:
Lastly
,
the
adoration
of
the
beast
himselfe
,
which
grew
into
so
great
estimation
,
as
that
both
the
name
and
worship
of
a
God
was
giuen
vnto
him
,
verse
4.
Now
there
were
two
causes
which
wrought
in
the
mindes
of
men
this
Religion
:
the
shew
of
excellencie
,
which
bringeth
with
it
reuerence
:
and
the
shew
of
power
inuincible
,
which
bringeth
feare
.
Who
is
like
(
say
they
)
vnto
the
beast
?
Who
shal
be
able
to
fight
with
him
?
And
I
saw
one
of
his
heades
as
it
were
wounded
to
death
;
but
his
deadly
wound
was
healed
;
and
all
the
world
wondred
and
followed
the
beast
.
4
And
they
worshipped
the
Dragon
which
gaue
power
vnto
the
beast
;
and
they
worshipped
the
beast
,
saying
,
Who
is
like
vnto
the
beast
!
who
is
able
to
fight
with
him
!
5
[
9
](A16102-e9440-b)
9
The
second
member
conteining
an
historie
of
the
actes
of
the
beast
,
as
I
sayd
verse
1.
The
historie
of
them
is
concluded
in
two
pointes
,
the
beginning
,
and
the
manner
of
them
.
The
beginning
is
the
gift
of
the
Dragon
,
who
put
and
inspired
into
the
beast
both
his
impietie
against
God
,
and
his
immanitie
and
iniustice
against
all
men
,
especiallie
against
the
godlie
and
those
that
were
of
the
houshold
of
faith
,
verse
5.
The
manner
of
the
actes
or
actions
done
,
is
of
two
sortes
;
both
impious
in
minde
,
and
blasphemous
in
speach
against
God
,
his
Church
,
and
the
godlie
,
verse
6.
and
also
most
cruell
and
iniurious
in
deedes
,
euen
such
as
are
done
of
most
raging
enemies
,
and
of
most
insolent
and
proud
conquerours
,
verse
7.
And
there
was
giuen
vnto
him
a
mouth
,
that
spake
great
things
and
blasphemies
;
and
power
was
giuen
vnto
him
,
[
10
](A16102-e9450-b)
10
Namely
his
actions
,
and
manner
of
dealing
.
As
concerning
those
42.
monethes
,
I
haue
spoken
of
them
before
chapter
.
11.
2.
to
doe
for
two
and
fourtie
monethes
.
6
He
therfore
opened
his
mouth
vnto
blasphemie
against
God
,
to
blaspheme
his
Name
,
[
11
](A16102-e9470-b)
11
That
is
,
the
holy
church
,
the
true
house
of
the
liuing
God
.
and
his
tabernacle
,
[
12
](A16102-e9480-b)
12
That
is
,
the
godly
in
seuerall
,
who
hid
themselues
from
his
crueltie
.
For
this
bloodie
beast
,
surcharged
those
holy
soules
most
falsly
with
innumerable
accusations
,
for
the
name
of
Christ
,
as
we
reade
in
Iustine
Martyr
,
Tertullian
,
Arnobius
,
Minutius
,
Eusebius
,
Augustine
,
and
others
:
which
example
the
later
times
followed
most
diligently
,
in
destroying
the
flocke
of
Christ
:
and
we
in
our
owne
memorie
haue
found
by
experince
,
to
our
incredible
griefe
.
Concerning
heauen
,
See
chapt.
11.
12.
and
them
that
dwell
in
heauen
.
7
It
was
also
giuen
vnto
him
to
make
warre
with
the
Saints
,
and
to
ouercome
them
;
and
power
was
giuen
him
ouer
euerie
kinred
,
and
tongue
,
and
nation
.
8
Therefore
all
that
dwell
vpon
the
earth
,
shall
worship
him
,
[
13
](A16102-e9510-b)
13
That
is
,
such
as
are
not
from
euerlasting
elected
in
Christ
Iesus
.
For
this
is
that
Lambe
slaine
,
of
which
chapt.
5.
6.
These
words
I
doe
,
with
Aretas
,
distinguish
in
this
manner
:
Whose
names
are
not
written
euen
from
the
laying
of
the
foundations
of
the
world
,
in
the
booke
of
life
,
of
the
Lambe
slaine
:
and
this
distinction
is
confirmed
by
a
like
place
,
hereafter
,
chapt
17.
8.
whose
names
are
not
written
in
the
booke
of
life
of
that
Lambe
,
which
was
slaine
from
the
beginning
of
the
world
.
9
[
14
](A16102-e9540-b)
14
The
conclusion
of
this
speech
of
the
first
beast
,
consisting
of
two
parts
,
An
exhortation
to
attentiue
audience
,
in
this
verse
:
and
a
foretelling
,
which
partly
conteineth
threatnings
against
the
wicked
,
and
partly
comfortes
for
those
which
in
patience
and
faith
shall
waite
for
that
glorious
comming
of
our
Lord
and
Sauiour
Christ
,
verse
10
If
any
man
hath
an
eare
,
let
him
heare
.
10
If
any
lead
into
captiuitie
,
he
shall
go
into
captiuitie
:
[
‖
](A16102-e9560-b)
‖
Gen.
9
6.
Matth.
26.
52.
if
any
kill
with
a
sword
,
he
must
be
killed
by
a
sword
:
here
is
the
patience
and
the
faith
of
the
Saintes
.
11
[
15
](A16102-e9600-b)
15
The
second
member
of
the
vision
,
concerning
the
Ecclesiasticall
dominion
,
which
in
Rome
succeeded
that
which
was
politique
,
and
is
in
the
power
of
the
corporation
of
false
prophets
,
and
of
the
forgers
of
false
doctrine
.
Wherefore
the
same
beast
,
and
the
same
bodie
or
corporation
is
called
of
S.
Iohn
by
the
name
of
false
prophet
,
chapt.
16.
13.
&
19.
20.
The
forme
of
this
beast
is
first
described
,
in
this
verse
,
then
his
acts
,
in
the
verses
following
:
and
the
whole
speech
is
concluded
in
the
last
verse
.
This
beast
is
by
his
breed
,
a
sonne
of
the
earth
(
as
they
say
)
obscurely
borne
,
and
by
litle
and
litle
creeping
vp
,
out
of
his
abiect
estate
.
Then
I
sawe
an
other
beast
comming
vp
out
of
the
earth
,
[
16
](A16102-e9610-b)
16
That
is
,
in
shew
he
sembled
the
Lambe
(
for
what
is
more
milde
,
or
more
humble
then
to
be
the
seruant
of
the
seruants
of
God
?
)
but
in
deed
he
played
the
part
of
the
Dragon
,
and
of
the
Wolfe
.
Matth.
7.
15.
For
euen
Satan
changeth
himselfe
into
an
Angel
of
light
,
2.
Cor.
11.
14.
and
what
should
his
honest
disciples
and
seruants
do
?
which
had
two
hornes
like
the
Lambe
,
but
he
spake
like
the
dragon
.
12
[
17
](A16102-e9630-b)
17
The
historie
of
the
actes
of
this
beast
,
containeth
in
summe
three
things
,
hypocrisie
,
the
witnesse
of
miracles
,
and
tyrannie
:
of
which
the
first
is
noted
in
this
verse
,
the
second
in
the
three
verses
following
;
the
third
in
the
sixteenth
and
seuenteenth
verses
.
His
hypocrisie
is
most
full
of
leasing
,
wherby
he
abuseth
both
the
former
beast
and
the
whole
world
:
in
that
albeit
he
hath
by
his
cunning
,
as
it
were
by
lime
,
made
of
the
former
beast
a
most
miserable
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
or
anatomie
,
vsurped
all
his
authoritie
vnto
him selfe
,
and
most
impudently
exerciseth
the
same
in
the
sight
and
view
of
him
:
yet
hee
carrieth
him selfe
so
,
as
if
he
honoured
him
with
most
high
honour
,
and
did
in
verie
good
trueth
cause
him
to
be
reuerenced
of
all
men
.
And
doth
exercise
the
power
of
the
first
beast
before
him
,
and
causeth
the
earth
,
and
them
which
dwell
therein
,
[
18
](A16102-e9650-b)
18
For
vnto
this
beast
of
Rome
,
which
of
a
ciuill
Empire
is
made
an
Ecclesiasticall
hierarchie
,
are
giuen
diuine
honors
,
and
diuine
authoritie
:
so
far
,
as
he
is
beleeued
to
be
aboue
the
Scriptures
,
which
the
glosse
vpon
the
Decretals
declareth
by
this
deuillish
verse
,
Articulos
soluit
,
synodumque
facit
generalem
.
That
is
,
He
changeth
the
Articles
of
faith
,
and
giueth
authoritie
to
generall
Counselles
.
Which
is
spoken
of
the
Papall
power
.
So
the
beast
is
by
birth
,
foundation
,
seate
,
and
finally
substance
one
:
onely
the
Pope
hath
altered
the
forme
and
manner
thereof
,
being
him selfe
the
head
both
of
that
tyrannicall
Empire
,
and
also
of
the
false
prophets
:
for
the
empire
hath
he
taken
vnto
him selfe
,
and
thereunto
hath
added
this
cunning
deuise
.
Now
these
wordes
whose
deadly
wound
was
cured
,
are
put
here
for
distinction
sake
,
as
also
sometime
afterwards
:
that
euen
at
that
time
the
godly
readers
of
this
prophecie
might
by
this
signe
be
brought
to
see
the
thing
as
present
:
as
if
it
were
said
;
that
they
might
adore
this
verie
Empire
that
now
is
,
whose
head
we
haue
seene
in
our
owne
memorie
to
haue
bene
cut
off
,
and
to
be
cured
againe
.
to
worship
the
first
beast
,
whose
deadly
wound
was
healed
.
13
[
19
](A16102-e9740-b)
19
The
second
point
of
the
things
done
by
the
beast
is
the
credite
of
great
wonders
or
miracles
,
appertaining
to
the
strengthening
of
this
impietie
;
of
which
signes
some
were
giuen
from
aboue
,
as
it
is
said
that
fire
was
sent
downe
from
heauen
by
false
sorcerie
,
in
this
verse
.
Others
were
shewed
here
below
in
the
sight
of
the
beast
,
to
establish
idolatrie
,
and
deceiue
soules
:
which
part
S.
Iohn
setteth
forth
,
beginning
(
as
they
say
)
at
that
which
is
last
;
in
this
manner
:
First
the
effect
is
declared
in
these
words
.
He
deceiueth
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
.
Secondly
,
the
common
maner
of
working
,
in
two
sorts
:
one
of
miracles
,
For
the
signes
which
were
giuen
him
to
do
in
the
presence
of
the
beast
;
the
other
of
the
words
added
vnto
the
signes
,
and
teaching
the
idolatrie
confirmed
by
those
signes
,
Saying
vnto
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
,
that
they
should
make
an
image
vnto
that
beast
which
&c.
Thirdly
,
a
speciall
manner
is
declared
,
That
it
is
giuen
vnto
him
to
put
life
into
the
image
of
the
beast
:
and
that
with
such
a
kinde
of
quickning
that
the
same
both
speaketh
by
aunswere
vnto
those
that
aske
counsell
of
it
,
and
also
pronounceth
death
against
all
those
that
do
not
obey
nor
worship
it
:
all
which
things
often
times
by
false
miracles
through
the
procurement
and
inspiration
of
the
diuell
,
haue
bene
effected
and
wrought
in
images
.
The
histories
of
the
Papists
are
full
of
examples
of
such
miracles
,
the
most
of
them
fained
,
many
also
done
by
the
deuill
in
images
,
as
of
old
in
the
serpent
,
Genes.
3.
1.
By
which
examples
is
confirmed
not
the
authoritie
of
the
beast
,
but
the
truth
of
God
and
of
these
prophesies
.
And
he
doth
great
wonders
,
so
that
he
maketh
fire
to
come
downe
from
heauen
on
the
earth
,
in
the
sight
of
men
;
14
And
deceiueth
them
that
dwell
on
the
earth
,
by
reason
of
the
signes
,
which
were
giuen
to
him
to
do
in
the
sight
of
the
beast
;
saying
to
them
that
dwell
on
the
earth
,
that
they
should
make
an
[
20
](A16102-e9800-b)
20
That
is
,
images
,
by
enallage
or
change
of
the
number
;
for
the
worship
of
them
euer
since
the
second
councell
of
Nice
,
hath
bene
ordeined
in
the
church
by
publique
credite
and
authoritie
,
contrarie
vnto
the
law
of
God
.
image
of
the
[
21
](A16102-e9820-b)
21
In
the
Greeke
the
word
is
of
the
datiue
case
,
as
much
to
say
,
as
vnto
the
worship
,
honour
and
obeying
of
the
beast
;
for
by
this
maintenance
of
images
,
this
pseudopropheticall
beast
doth
mightily
profit
the
beast
of
Rome
,
of
whom
long
ago
he
receiued
them
.
Wherefore
the
same
is
hereafter
very
fitly
called
the
image
of
the
beast
,
for
that
images
haue
their
beginning
from
the
beast
,
and
their
forme
or
manner
from
the
will
of
the
beast
,
and
haue
their
end
and
vse
fixed
in
the
profit
and
commoditie
of
the
beast
.
beast
,
which
was
wounded
of
the
sword
,
and
did
liue
againe
.
15
[
22
](A16102-e9840-b)
22
And
of
this
miracle
of
the
images
of
the
beast
(
that
is
,
which
the
beast
hath
ordeined
to
establish
idolatry
)
which
miraculously
speake
,
and
giue
iudgement
,
or
rather
marueilously
,
by
the
fraud
of
the
false
prophets
,
the
Papists
books
are
full
fraighted
.
And
it
was
giuen
to
him
to
giue
[
a
](A16102-e9850-b)
a
To
giue
life
,
as
Iannes
&
I
ambres
imitated
the
wonders
that
Moses
wrought
.
life
vnto
the
image
of
the
beast
,
and
that
the
image
of
the
beast
should
speake
;
and
to
cause
that
as
many
as
would
not
worship
the
image
of
the
beast
,
should
be
killed
.
16
[
23
](A16102-e9870-b)
23
The
third
place
,
is
a
wicked
and
most
insolent
tyrannie
,
as
was
said
before
,
vsurped
ouer
the
persons
of
men
,
in
this
verse
;
and
ouer
their
goods
and
actions
,
in
the
next
verse
.
For
he
is
said
,
both
to
bring
vpon
all
person
a
tyrannous
seruitude
,
that
as
bondslaues
they
might
serue
the
beast
:
and
also
to
exercise
ouer
all
their
goods
and
actions
,
a
pedlerlike
abuse
of
indulgences
and
dispensations
(
as
they
tearme
them
)
amongst
their
friends
;
and
against
others
,
to
vse
most
violent
interdictions
,
and
to
shoote
out
cursings
,
euen
in
naturall
and
ciuill
,
priuate
and
publike
contractes
,
wherein
all
good
faith
ought
to
haue
place
.
Also
he
maketh
all
,
both
small
&
great
,
rich
and
poore
,
free
and
bond
,
to
receiue
[
24
](A16102-e9880-b)
24
That
is
,
their
Chrisme
,
by
which
in
the
Sacrament
(
as
they
call
it
)
of
Confirmation
,
they
make
seruile
vnto
themselues
,
the
persons
and
doings
of
men
,
signing
them
in
their
forehead
and
hands
:
and
as
for
the
signe
lest
by
Christ
(
of
which
Chap.
7.
3.
)
and
the
holy
Sacrament
of
Baptisme
they
make
as
void
.
For
whom
Christ
hath
ioyned
vnto
him selfe
by
Baptisme
,
this
beast
maketh
challenge
vnto
them
by
his
greasie
chrisme
,
which
he
doubteth
not
to
preferre
before
Baptisme
,
both
in
authorite
and
in
efficacie
.
a
[
b
](A16102-e9890-b)
b
The
marke
of
the
name
of
the
beast
.
marke
in
their
right
hand
or
in
their
foreheads
:
17
And
that
no
man
may
[
25
](A16102-e9910-b)
25
That
is
,
haue
any
free
trafficke
,
or
entercourse
with
men
,
but
they
onely
which
shall
haue
this
annointing
and
consecration
of
clerkly
tonsure
,
as
they
call
it
.
Read
Grarian
de
consecrat
.
distinct
.
5.
c.
omnes
;
cap.
spiritus
&c.
of
these
matters
.
buy
or
sell
,
saue
he
that
hath
the
[
26
](A16102-e9940-b)
26
Here
the
false
prophets
doe
require
three
things
,
which
are
set
downe
in
the
order
of
their
greatnesse
,
a
character
,
a
name
,
and
the
number
of
the
name
.
The
meaning
is
,
that
man
that
hath
not
,
first
their
annointing
and
clericall
tonsure
or
shauing
;
secondly
holy
orders
,
by
receiuing
whereof
is
communicated
the
name
of
the
beast
;
or
finally
hath
not
attained
that
high
degree
of
pontificiall
knowledge
,
and
of
the
lawe
(
as
they
call
it
)
Canonicall
,
and
hath
not
as
it
were
made
vp
in
accompt
and
cast
the
number
of
the
mysteries
thereof
:
for
in
these
things
consisteth
the
number
of
that
name
of
the
beast
.
And
this
is
excellently
set
foorth
in
the
next
verse
.
marke
,
or
the
name
of
the
beast
,
or
the
number
of
his
name
.
18
[
27
](A16102-e9960-b)
27
That
is
,
in
this
number
of
the
beast
consisteth
that
popish
wisedome
,
which
vnto
them
seemeth
the
greatest
of
all
others
.
In
these
words
S.
Iohn
expoundeth
that
saying
which
went
before
of
the
number
of
the
beast
,
what
it
hath
aboue
his
marke
or
accognisance
,
and
his
name
.
These
things
(
saith
S.
Iohn
)
the
marke
and
name
of
the
beast
,
doe
easily
happen
vnto
any
man
:
but
to
haue
the
number
of
the
beast
,
is
wisdome
:
that
is
,
onely
the
wise
and
such
as
haue
vnderstanding
can
come
by
that
number
;
for
they
must
be
most
illuminated
doctours
that
attaine
thereunto
:
as
the
words
following
do
declare
.
Here
is
wisdome
.
Let
him
that
hath
understanding
count
the
number
of
the
beast
:
for
it
is
the
[
28
](A16102-e9980-b)
28
How
great
&
of
what
denomination
this
number
of
the
beast
is
,
by
which
the
beast
accounteth
his
wisdome
,
S.
Iohn
declareth
in
these
words
;
Doest
thou
demand
how
great
it
is
?
it
is
so
great
that
it
occupieth
the
whole
man
;
he
is
alway
learning
and
neuer
commeth
vnto
the
knowledge
thereof
:
he
must
be
a
man
in
deede
that
doth
attaine
vnto
it
.
Askest
thou
of
what
denomination
it
is
?
verily
it
standeth
of
sixe
throughout
,
and
perfectly
ariseth
of
all
the
parts
thereof
in
their
seuerall
denominations
(
as
they
terme
them
:
)
it
standeth
of
sixe
by
vnities
,
tennes
,
hundreds
,
&c.
so
as
there
is
no
one
part
in
the
learning
and
order
pontificiall
,
which
is
not
either
referred
vnto
the
head
,
and
,
as
it
were
,
the
top
thereof
,
or
contained
in
the
same
:
so
fitly
doe
all
things
in
this
hierarchie
agree
one
with
another
,
and
with
their
head
.
Therefore
that
cruell
beast
Boniface
the
eight
doth
commend
by
the
number
of
six
those
decretals
which
he
perfected
:
in
the
proaeme
of
the
sixt
booke
.
Which
booke
(
saith
he
)
being
to
be
added
vnto
fiue
other
bookes
of
the
same
volume
of
decretals
,
we
thought
good
to
name
Sextum
,
the
sixt
;
that
the
same
volume
by
addition
thereof
,
containing
a
senario
,
or
the
number
of
sixe
books
(
which
is
a
number
perfect
)
may
yeeld
a
perfect
forme
of
menaging
all
things
,
and
perfect
discipline
of
behauiour
.
Here
therefore
is
that
number
of
the
beast
,
who
powreth
from
himselfe
all
his
parts
,
and
bringeth
them
all
backe
againe
vnto
himselfe
by
his
discipline
in
most
wise
and
cunning
manner
.
If
any
man
desire
more
of
this
,
let
him
search
the
gloze
vpon
that
place
.
I
am
not
ignorant
that
other
interpretations
are
brought
vpon
this
place
:
but
I
thought
it
my
dutie
,
with
the
good
fauour
of
all
,
and
without
the
offence
of
any
,
to
propound
mine
opinion
in
this
point
.
And
that
for
this
cause
especially
,
for
that
it
seemed
vnto
me
neither
probable
nor
like
to
be
true
,
that
the
number
of
the
beast
,
or
of
the
name
of
the
beast
,
should
be
taken
as
the
common
sort
of
interpreters
do
take
it
.
For
this
number
the
beast
teacheth
,
giueth
out
,
imprinteth
,
as
a
publique
marke
of
such
as
be
his
;
and
esteemeth
that
marke
aboue
all
others
,
as
the
marke
of
those
whom
he
loueth
best
.
Now
those
other
expositions
seeme
to
be
farre
remoued
from
this
propertie
and
condition
of
that
number
:
whether
you
respect
the
name
Latinus
,
or
Titan
or
anie
other
.
For
these
the
beast
doth
not
teach
,
nor
giue
foorth
,
nor
imprint
,
but
most
diligently
forbiddeth
to
be
taught
,
and
audaciously
denieth
:
he
approueth
not
these
,
but
reproueth
them
:
and
hateth
them
that
thinke
so
of
this
number
,
with
an
hatred
greater
then
the
hatred
of
Vatinius
.
number
of
a
man
:
and
his
number
is
sixe
hundreth
,
sixtie
and
sixe
.
CHAP.
XIIII
.
1
The
Lambe
standeth
on
mount
Sion
,
4
with
his
chast
worshippers
.
6
One
Angel
preacheth
the
Gospel
:
8
an
other
foretelleth
the
fall
of
Babylon
:
9
the
third
warneth
that
the
beast
be
auoyded
.
13
A
voyce
from
heauen
pronounceth
them
happie
who
die
in
the
Lord
.
16
The
Lords
sickle
is
thrust
into
the
haruest
.
18
and
into
the
vintage
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e10170-b)
1
The
historie
of
the
church
of
Christ
being
finished
for
more
then
a
thousand
and
three
hundreth
yeres
,
at
which
time
Boniface
the
eight
liued
,
as
before
hath
bene
said
:
there
remaineth
the
rest
of
the
historie
of
the
conflicting
or
militant
Church
from
thence
vnto
the
time
of
the
last
victorie
,
in
three
Chapters
.
For
first
of
all
,
as
the
foundation
of
the
whole
historie
,
is
described
the
standing
of
the
Lambe
with
his
armie
and
retinue
,
in
fiue
verses
:
after
,
his
worthie
actes
,
which
he
hath
done
and
yet
doth
,
in
most
mightie
manner
,
whilest
he
ouerthroweth
Antichrist
with
the
spirit
of
his
mouth
,
in
the
rest
of
this
Chapter
,
and
in
the
two
following
.
Vnto
the
description
of
the
Lambe
are
propounded
three
things
,
his
situation
,
place
and
attendancie
:
for
the
rest
are
expounded
in
the
former
visions
,
especially
vpon
the
fift
Chapter
.
[
2
](A16102-e10190-b)
2
As
readie
girt
to
do
his
office
(
as
Actes
5.
56.
)
in
the
middest
of
his
Church
,
which
afore
time
mount
Sion
did
prefigure
.
stoode
on
mount
Sion
,
and
with
him
[
3
](A16102-e10200-b)
3
As
before
7
2.
This
retinue
of
the
Lambe
is
described
first
by
diuine
marke
(
as
before
7.
2.
)
in
this
verse
.
Then
by
his
diuine
occupation
,
in
that
all
and
euerie
one
in
his
retinue
most
vehemently
&
sweetly
(
vers.
2.
)
do
glorifie
the
Lambe
with
a
speciall
song
before
God
and
his
elect
Angels
:
which
song
flesh
&
bloud
cannot
heare
,
nor
vnderstand
,
verse
3.
Lastly
by
their
deedes
done
before
,
and
their
sanctification
,
in
that
they
were
virgins
,
pure
from
spirituall
and
bodily
fornication
,
that
is
,
from
impietie
&
vnrighteousnes
;
that
they
folowed
the
Lambe
as
a
guide
vnto
all
goodnesse
,
and
cleaued
vnto
him
:
that
they
are
holy
vnto
him
,
as
of
grace
redeemed
by
him
:
that
in
truth
,
&
in
the
simplicitie
of
Christ
,
they
haue
exercised
all
these
things
;
sanctimonie
of
life
,
the
direction
of
the
Lamb
,
a
thankful
remembrance
of
redemption
by
him
:
finally
(
to
conclude
in
a
word
)
that
they
are
blamelesse
before
the
Lord
.
ver.
4.
&
5.
an
hundreth
,
fourtie
and
foure
thousand
,
hauing
his
Fathers
Name
written
in
their
foreheads
.
2
And
I
heard
a
voyce
from
heauen
,
as
the
sound
of
many
waters
,
and
as
the
sound
of
a
great
thunder
:
and
I
heard
the
voyce
of
harpers
harping
with
their
harpes
:
3
And
they
sung
as
it
were
a
new
song
before
the
throne
,
and
before
the
foure
beasts
,
and
the
Elders
:
and
no
man
could
learne
that
song
,
but
the
hundreth
,
fourtie
and
foure
thousand
,
namely
they
which
were
bought
out
of
the
earth
.
4
These
are
they
,
which
are
not
defiled
with
women
;
for
they
are
virgins
:
these
follow
the
Lamb
,
whither
soeuer
he
goeth
:
these
are
bought
from
amongst
men
,
to
be
as
first
fruites
,
holy
vnto
God
,
and
to
the
Lambe
:
5
And
in
whose
mouthes
is
found
no
guile
:
for
they
are
without
spot
before
the
throne
of
God
.
6
[
4
](A16102-e10260-b)
4
The
other
part
(
as
I
said
on
the
first
ver.
)
is
of
the
actes
of
the
Lambe
,
the
manner
whereof
is
deliuered
in
two
sortes
;
of
his
speach
and
of
his
factes
.
His
speaches
are
set
forth
vnto
the
13.
verse
of
this
chapter
;
&
his
factes
vnto
the
16.
chapter
.
In
the
speach
of
the
Lambe
,
which
is
the
word
of
the
Gospel
,
are
taught
in
this
place
these
things
:
The
seruice
of
the
godly
consisting
inwardly
of
reuerence
towards
God
;
and
outwardly
of
the
glorifying
of
him
:
the
visible
signe
of
which
is
adoration
verse
7.
The
ouerthrowing
of
wicked
Babylon
,
verse
.
8.
and
the
fall
of
euerie
one
of
the
vngodly
which
worship
the
beast
,
verse
9.
10.
11.
Finally
the
state
of
the
holy
seruants
of
God
both
present
,
verse
12.
and
to
come
,
most
blessed
,
according
to
the
promise
of
God
.
verse
13.
¶
Then
I
saw
[
5
](A16102-e10270-b)
5
This
Angell
is
a
type
or
figure
of
the
good
and
faithfull
seruaunts
of
God
,
whom
God
especially
from
the
time
of
that
Boniface
the
eighth
,
hath
raised
vp
to
the
publishing
of
the
Gospell
of
Christ
,
both
by
preaching
and
by
writing
.
So
God
first
,
neare
vnto
the
time
of
the
same
Boniface
vsed
Peter
Cassiodorus
an
Italian
;
after
,
Arnold
de
villa
noua
,
a
French
man
;
then
Ockam
,
Dante
,
Petrarch
;
after
that
Iohannes
de
rupe
caesa
a
Franciscane
;
after
againe
,
Iohn
Wickliffe
English-man
,
and
so
continually
one
or
another
,
vnto
the
restoring
of
the
truth
,
and
enlarging
of
his
Church
.
another
Angel
fly
through
the
mids
of
Heauen
,
hauing
an
euerlasting
Gospell
,
to
preach
vnto
them
that
dwell
on
the
earth
,
and
to
euery
nation
,
and
kinred
,
&
tongue
,
and
people
,
7
[
‖
](A16102-e10300-b)
‖
Psal.
145.
6.
Saying
with
a
loud
voyce
,
Feare
God
,
and
giue
glorie
to
him
:
for
the
houre
of
his
iudgement
is
come
:
and
worship
him
that
made
[
‖
](A16102-e10320-b)
‖
Act.
14.
15.
heauen
and
earth
,
&
the
sea
,
and
the
fountaines
of
waters
.
8
And
there
followed
another
Angel
,
saying
,
[
‖
](A16102-e10350-b)
‖
Esay
.
21.
9.
[
6
](A16102-e10370-b)
6
That
is
,
Babylon
is
destroyed
by
the
sentence
and
iudgement
of
God
:
the
execution
where
of
S.
Iohn
describeth
chap.
18.
And
this
voyce
of
the
ministers
of
Christ
hath
continued
since
the
time
that
Babylon
(
which
is
Rome
)
hath
by
deliberate
counsell
and
manifest
malice
oppugned
the
light
of
the
Gospell
offered
from
God
.
Babylon
that
great
citie
is
fallen
,
it
is
fallen
:
for
she
made
all
nations
to
drinke
of
the
wine
of
the
Ieremie
.
51.
8.
Chap.
18
2.
[
a
](A16102-e10410-b)
a
Of
her
fornication
,
whereby
God
was
prouoked
to
wrath
.
wrath
of
her
fornication
.
9
¶
And
the
third
Angel
followed
them
,
saying
with
a
loud
voyce
,
[
7
](A16102-e10430-b)
7
That
is
,
shall
not
worship
God
alone
,
but
shall
transferre
his
diuine
honour
vnto
this
beast
,
whether
he
do
it
with
his
heart
or
counterfaiting
in
shew
.
For
he
(
saith
Christ
)
that
denieth
me
before
men
,
him
will
I
deny
before
my
father
&
his
Angels
,
Matth.
10.
32.
And
this
is
that
voyce
of
the
holy
ministerie
,
which
at
this
time
is
verie
much
vsed
of
the
holie
and
faithfull
seruaunts
of
God
.
For
hauing
now
sufficiently
found
out
the
publicke
obstinacie
of
Babylon
,
they
labour
not
anie
longer
to
thunder
out
against
the
same
:
but
to
sa●e
some
particular
member
by
terror
(
as
Saint
iude
speaketh
)
and
to
plucke
them
out
of
the
publicke
flame
:
or
else
by
a
vehement
commiseration
of
their
estate
,
to
leade
them
away
;
they
set
before
them
eternall
death
,
into
which
they
rush
vnwares
,
vnlesse
in
goodtime
they
returne
vnto
God
:
but
the
godly
which
are
of
their
owne
flocke
,
they
exhort
vnto
patience
,
obedience
,
and
faith
in
the
Lord
Iesus
,
and
charge
them
to
giue
light
,
by
their
example
of
good
life
,
vnto
others
.
If
any
man
worship
the
beast
and
his
image
,
and
receiue
his
marke
in
his
forehead
,
or
on
his
hand
,
10
He
also
shal
drink
of
the
wine
of
the
wrath
of
God
,
euen
of
the
mere
wine
,
which
is
powred
into
the
cup
of
his
wrath
;
and
shal
be
tormented
with
fire
and
brimstone
in
the
sight
of
the
holy
Angels
,
and
in
the
sight
of
the
Lambe
.
11
And
the
smoke
of
their
torment
shal
ascend
vp
for
euermore
:
and
they
shall
haue
no
rest
day
nor
night
,
which
worshippe
the
beast
and
his
image
,
and
whosoeuer
receiueth
the
print
of
his
name
.
12
[
8
](A16102-e10480-b)
8
The
patience
,
sanctification
and
iustification
by
faith
:
the
consequents
whereof
are
,
rest
,
felicitie
,
and
glorie
eternall
,
in
the
he
auenly
fellowship
of
God
and
his
Angels
.
Here
is
the
patience
of
the
Saintes
here
are
they
that
keep
the
commandements
of
God
,
and
the
faith
of
Iesus
.
13
Then
I
heard
a
voyce
out
of
heauen
,
saying
vnto
me
,
Write
;
Blessed
from
henceforth
are
the
dead
which
die
[
b
](A16102-e10510-b)
b
That
is
,
for
the
Lord
.
in
the
Lord
,
Yea
,
saith
the
Spirit
for
they
[
‖
](A16102-e10520-b)
‖
Heb
4.
10.
rest
from
their
labors
,
&
their
[
c
](A16102-e10540-b)
c
By
workes
,
is
meant
the
reward
which
followeth
good
workes
.
works
follow
them
.
14
[
9
](A16102-e10560-b)
9
The
second
part
of
this
Chapter
,
as
I
said
verse
1.
Of
the
actes
&
doings
of
Christ
in
ouerthrowing
of
Antichrist
and
his
Church
,
by
the
spirit
of
his
diuine
mouth
:
seing
that
hauing
bene
called
backe
by
word
both
publiquely
and
priuately
vnto
his
dutie
,
and
admonished
of
his
most
certaine
ruine
:
he
yet
ceasseth
not
to
maintaine
and
protect
his
owne
adherents
that
they
may
do
him
seruice
:
and
to
afflict
the
godly
with
most
barbarous
persecutions
.
Of
those
things
which
Christ
doth
,
there
are
two
kindes
;
one
common
or
generall
,
in
the
rest
of
this
Chapter
;
another
particular
,
against
that
sauage
and
rebellious
beast
,
and
his
worshippers
,
in
the
15.
and
16.
Chapters
.
That
common
kinde
,
is
the
calamitie
of
warres
,
spread
abroad
through
the
whole
earth
,
&
filling
all
things
with
bloud
,
&
that
without
respect
of
any
person
.
This
is
figured
or
shadowed
out
in
two
types
,
of
the
haruest
and
vintage
.
Since
the
time
that
the
light
of
the
Gospell
began
to
shine
out
;
and
since
prophecie
or
preaching
by
the
grace
of
God
was
raised
vp
againe
,
how
horrible
warres
haue
bene
kindled
in
the
world
?
how
much
humane
flesh
hath
bene
throwne
to
the
earth
,
by
this
diuine
reaping
?
how
much
bloud
(
alas
for
woe
)
hath
ouer
flowne
for
these
three
hundred
yeares
almost
?
all
histories
do
crie
out
,
and
this
our
age
(
if
euer
before
)
is
now
in
horrour
,
by
reason
of
the
rage
of
that
sickle
which
Antichrist
calleth
for
.
In
this
place
is
the
first
type
,
that
is
,
of
the
haruest
.
¶
And
I
looked
,
and
behold
[
10
](A16102-e10570-b)
10
Declaring
his
fiercenesse
by
his
colour
,
like
vnto
that
which
is
in
the
white
or
milke
circle
of
heauen
.
a
white
cloud
;
and
vpon
the
cloud
sate
one
like
vnto
a
man
,
[
11
](A16102-e10580-b)
11
As
one
that
shall
raigne
from
God
,
and
occupie
the
place
of
Christ
in
this
miserable
execution
.
hauing
on
his
head
a
golden
crowne
,
and
in
his
hand
a
[
12
](A16102-e10590-b)
12
That
is
,
a
most
fit
and
commodious
instrument
of
diuine
execution
,
desitoving
all
,
by
hewing
and
thrusting
thorough
:
for
who
may
stand
against
God
?
sharpe
sickle
.
15
[
13
](A16102-e10610-b)
13
Christ
giueth
commaundement
,
in
this
verse
,
and
the
Angell
executeth
in
the
next
verse
.
And
another
Angell
came
out
of
the
Temple
,
crying
with
a
loud
voyce
to
him
that
sate
on
the
cloud
,
[
‖
](A16102-e10620-b)
‖
Ioel.
3.
13.
Thrust
in
thy
sickle
&
reape
:
for
the
time
is
come
for
thee
to
reape
:
for
the
[
‖
](A16102-e10640-b)
‖
Matth.
13.
39.
haruest
of
the
earth
is
ripe
.
16
And
he
that
sate
on
the
cloud
,
thrust
in
his
sickle
on
the
earth
,
and
the
earth
was
reaped
.
17
[
14
](A16102-e10680-b)
14
The
other
type
(
as
I
sayd
vers.
14
)
is
the
vintage
;
the
manner
whereof
is
one
with
that
which
went
before
,
if
thou
except
this
,
that
the
grape
gathering
is
more
exact
in
seeking
out
euery
thing
,
then
is
the
haruest
labour
.
This
is
therefore
a
more
grieuous
iudgement
,
both
because
it
succeedeth
the
other
,
and
be
cause
it
is
vnderstood
to
be
executed
with
greater
diligence
.
Then
another
Angell
came
out
of
the
temple
,
which
is
in
heauen
,
hauing
also
a
sharpe
sickle
.
18
And
another
Angell
came
out
from
the
altar
,
which
had
power
ouer
fire
;
and
cried
with
a
loud
cry
to
him
that
had
the
sharpe
sickle
,
&
said
;
Thrust
in
thy
sharp
sickle
,
&
gather
the
clusters
of
the
vineyard
of
the
earth
:
for
her
grapes
are
ripe
.
19
Therefore
the
Angell
thrust
in
his
sharpe
sickle
on
the
earth
,
&
cut
downe
the
grapes
of
the
vineyard
of
the
earth
,
and
cast
them
into
that
great
wine
presse
of
the
wrath
of
God
.
20
And
the
wine
presse
was
troden
without
the
Citie
,
[
15
](A16102-e10720-b)
15
That
is
,
it
ouerflowed
very
deepe
,
&
very
farre
&
wide
:
the
speach
is
hyperbolical
or
excessiue
,
to
signifie
the
greatnes
of
the
the
slaughter
.
And
these
be
those
pleasant
fruits
forsooth
,
of
the
contempt
of
Christ
,
and
desiring
of
Antichrist
rather
then
him
,
which
the
miserable
,
mad
,
and
blind
world
doth
at
this
time
reape
.
&
bloud
came
out
of
the
wine
presse
,
vnto
the
horse
bridles
,
by
the
space
of
a
thousand
and
six
hundreth
furlongs
.
CHAP.
XV.
1
The
seuen
Angels
hauing
the
seuen
last
plagues
.
3
They
that
conquered
the
beast
prayse
God
.
6
To
the
seuen
Angels
,
7
seuen
vialles
full
of
Gods
wrath
,
are
deliuered
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e10820-b)
1
This
is
that
other
place
of
the
actes
of
Christ
,
as
I
noted
before
14.
14.
Now
therefore
is
shewed
a
singular
worke
of
the
iudgement
of
God
,
belonging
to
the
ouerthrow
of
Antichrist
and
his
forces
:
of
which
diuine
worke
the
preparation
is
described
in
this
chapter
:
and
the
execution
,
in
the
next
.
The
preparation
is
first
set
downe
generally
and
in
type
,
in
this
verse
:
and
is
after
particucularly
set
forth
,
in
the
rest
of
the
chap.
[
2
](A16102-e10840-b)
2
Of
which
chap.
8.
&
9.
in
powring
forth
the
plagues
of
the
world
:
for
euen
these
plagues
,
do
for
the
most
part
agree
with
those
.
Angels
which
haue
the
seuen
last
plagues
:
for
by
them
is
fulfilled
the
wrath
of
God
.
2
[
3
](A16102-e10860-b)
3
There
are
two
parts
of
the
narration
:
one
the
consession
of
the
Saints
glorifying
God
,
when
they
saw
that
preparation
of
the
iudgements
of
God
,
vnto
the
4
ver.
another
the
vocation
,
instruction
,
&
confirmation
of
those
instruments
which
God
hath
ordained
for
the
execution
of
his
iugements
,
in
4.
other
verses
.
And
I
saw
[
4
](A16102-e10870-b)
4
This
part
of
the
vision
alludeth
vnto
that
sea
or
large
vessel
of
brasse
,
in
which
the
priests
washed
themselues
in
the
entrance
of
the
temple
:
for
in
the
entrance
of
the
heauenly
temple
(
as
it
is
called
vers.
5.
)
is
said
to
haue
bene
a
sea
of
glasse
,
most
lightsome
and
cleare
,
vnto
the
commoditie
of
choise
:
mixt
with
fire
,
that
is
,
as
containing
the
treasurie
of
the
iudgements
of
God
,
which
he
bringeth
forth
and
dispenseth
according
to
his
owne
pleasure
:
for
out
of
the
former
,
the
Priests
were
cleansed
of
old
:
&
out
of
this
the
vngodly
are
destroyed
now
,
chap.
4.
6.
as
it
were
a
glassie
sea
,
mingled
with
fire
;
and
[
5
](A16102-e10880-b)
5
That
is
,
the
godly
martyrs
of
Christ
,
who
shall
not
giue
place
euen
in
miracles
vnto
that
beast
:
of
these
see
before
chap.
13.
17.
and
14.
9.
10.
them
that
had
gotten
victorie
ouer
the
beast
,
and
his
image
,
and
his
marke
,
and
the
nomber
of
his
name
,
[
6
](A16102-e10890-b)
6
Glorifying
God
,
from
the
particular
obseruation
of
the
weapons
and
instruments
of
Gods
wrath
,
floting
in
that
sea
of
glasse
.
stand
at
the
glassie
sea
,
hauing
the
Harpes
of
God
,
3
And
they
sung
the
[
7
](A16102-e10910-b)
7
That
song
of
triumph
which
is
Exodus
152.
song
of
Moses
the
[
a
](A16102-e10920-b)
a
So
is
Moses
called
for
honours
sake
,
as
it
is
set
forth
Deut.
34.
10.
seruant
of
God
,
and
the
song
of
the
Lambe
,
saying
,
[
8
](A16102-e10940-b)
8
This
song
hath
two
partes
:
one
a
confession
,
both
particular
,
in
this
verse
,
and
generall
,
in
the
beginning
of
the
next
verse
:
another
,
a
narration
of
causes
belonging
to
the
confession
;
where
of
one
kinde
is
eternall
in
it selfe
,
and
most
present
vnto
the
godly
,
in
that
God
is
both
holy
,
and
alone
God
:
another
kinde
is
future
and
to
come
,
in
that
the
clect
taken
out
of
the
Gentiles
(
that
is
,
out
of
the
wicked
ones
and
vnbeleeuing
,
as
Chapter
11.
2.
)
were
to
be
brought
vnto
the
same
state
of
happinesse
,
by
the
magnificencie
of
the
iudgements
of
God
,
in
the
next
verse
.
Great
and
marucilous
are
thy
workes
ô
Lord
God
almightie
:
iust
and
true
are
thy
[
‖
](A16102-e10970-b)
‖
Psal.
145.
17.
[
b
](A16102-e10990-b)
b
Thy
doings
.
wayes
,
ô
King
of
Saintes
.
4
[
‖
](A16102-e11010-b)
‖
Iere.
107.
Who
shall
not
feare
thee
,
O
Lord
,
&
glorifie
thy
Name
:
for
thou
onely
art
holy
;
&
all
Nations
shall
come
and
worship
before
thee
:
for
thy
iudgements
are
made
manifest
.
5
[
9
](A16102-e11050-b)
9
The
second
part
of
the
narration
(
as
was
noted
,
verse
2
)
wherein
first
the
authoritie
of
the
whole
argument
and
matter
thereof
is
figured
by
a
forerunning
type
of
a
Temple
opened
in
heauen
,
as
Chapter
11.
19.
namely
that
all
those
things
are
diuine
and
of
God
,
that
proceede
from
thence
,
in
this
verse
;
Secondly
,
the
administers
,
or
executours
,
come
forth
out
of
the
Temple
,
verse
6.
Thirdly
,
they
are
furnished
with
instruments
of
the
iudgements
of
God
,
and
weapons
fit
for
the
manner
of
the
same
iudgements
,
verse
7.
Finally
,
they
are
confirmed
by
testimonie
of
the
visible
glorie
of
God
,
in
the
last
verse
.
A
like
testimonie
whereunto
was
exhibited
of
old
in
the
law
,
Exodus
40.
34.
And
after
this
,
I
looked
,
and
behold
,
the
temple
of
the
tabernacle
of
testimonie
was
open
in
heauen
.
6
And
the
seuen
Angels
came
out
of
the
temple
,
which
had
the
[
10
](A16102-e11070-b)
10
That
is
,
commandements
to
inflict
those
seuen
plagues
.
Here
is
the
figure
called
Metonymia
.
seuen
plagues
,
clothed
in
[
11
](A16102-e11080-b)
11
Which
was
in
old
time
a
signe
of
the
Kingly
or
Priestly
dignitie
.
pure
and
bright
linnen
,
and
hauing
their
breasts
[
12
](A16102-e11090-b)
12
This
girding
was
a
signe
of
diligence
;
and
the
girdle
of
gold
was
a
signe
of
sinceritie
,
and
trustines
in
taking
in
charge
the
commaundements
of
God
.
girded
with
golden
girdles
.
7
And
one
of
the
[
13
](A16102-e11110-b)
13
Of
these
before
chap.
4.
7.
foure
beastes
gaue
vnto
the
seuen
Angels
seuen
golden
vialles
,
full
of
the
wrath
of
God
,
who
liueth
for
euermore
.
8
And
the
Temple
was
filled
with
smoke
proceeding
from
the
maiestie
of
God
,
and
from
his
power
,
and
[
14
](A16102-e11130-b)
14
None
of
those
seuen
Angels
might
returne
,
till
he
had
performed
fully
the
charge
committed
vnto
him
,
according
to
the
decree
of
God
.
no
man
was
able
to
enter
into
the
Temple
,
till
the
seuen
plagues
of
the
seuen
Angels
were
fulfilled
.
CHAP.
XVI
.
2
and
17
The
Angels
powre
out
the
seuen
vialles
of
Gods
wrath
giuen
vnto
them
,
and
so
diuerse
plagues
arise
in
the
world
,
18
to
terrifie
the
wicked
,
19
and
the
inhabitants
of
the
great
Citie
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e11230-b)
1
In
the
former
Chapter
was
set
downe
the
preparation
vnto
the
worke
of
God
:
here
is
deliuered
the
execution
thereof
.
And
in
this
discourse
of
the
execution
,
is
a
generall
commaundement
,
in
this
verse
;
then
a
particular
recitall
in
order
of
the
execution
done
by
euery
of
the
seuen
Angels
,
in
the
rest
of
the
Chapter
.
This
speciall
execution
against
Antichrist
and
his
crewe
,
doth
in
manner
agree
vnto
that
which
was
generally
done
vpon
the
whole
world
,
Chapter
8.
and
9.
and
belongeth
(
if
my
coniecture
faile
me
not
)
vnto
the
same
time
.
Yet
herein
they
do
differ
one
from
another
,
that
this
was
particularly
effected
vpon
the
Princes
and
ringleaders
of
the
wickednesse
of
the
world
;
the
other
generally
against
the
whole
world
being
wicked
.
And
therefore
these
iudgements
are
figured
more
grieuous
then
those
.
2
[
2
](A16102-e11270-b)
2
The
historie
of
the
first
Angell
,
whose
plague
vpon
the
earth
,
is
described
almost
in
the
same
wordes
with
that
sixt
plague
of
the
Egyptians
.
Exod.
9.
9.
But
it
doth
signifie
a
spirituall
vlcer
,
and
that
torture
or
butcherie
of
conscience
feared
with
an
hote
yron
,
which
accuseth
the
vngodly
within
:
&
both
by
truth
of
the
word
(
the
light
whereof
God
hath
now
so
long
shewed
forth
)
and
by
bitternes
,
stirreth
vp
and
forceth
out
the
sword
of
Gods
wrath
.
The
first
Angell
therefore
went
,
&
powred
out
his
viall
vpon
the
earth
:
&
there
fell
a
noysome
,
and
a
grieuous
sore
vpon
the
men
,
which
had
the
[
3
](A16102-e11280-b)
3
See
chap.
13.
16.
marke
of
the
beast
,
and
vpon
them
which
worshipped
his
image
.
3
[
4
](A16102-e11300-b)
4
The
storie
of
the
second
Angell
,
who
troubleth
and
molesteth
the
seas
,
that
he
may
stir
vp
the
consciences
of
men
sleeping
in
their
wickednes
:
see
chapter
8.
8.
After
the
second
Angell
powred
out
his
viall
vpon
the
sea
,
and
it
[
a
](A16102-e11310-b)
a
It
was
turned
into
rotten
and
filthy
bloud
,
such
as
is
in
dead
bodies
.
became
as
the
bloud
of
a
dead
man
:
and
euery
liuing
thing
that
liued
in
the
sea
,
dyed
.
4
[
5
](A16102-e11330-b)
5
The
storie
of
the
third
Angel
,
striking
the
riuers
,
in
this
vers
.
who
proclaming
the
iustice
of
God
,
commendeth
the
same
by
a
most
graue
comparison
of
the
sins
of
men
with
the
punishment
of
God
:
which
is
common
to
this
place
,
and
that
which
went
before
.
Wherefore
also
this
praysing
is
attributed
vnto
the
Angell
of
the
waters
,
a
name
common
to
the
second
and
third
Angels
,
according
as
both
of
them
are
sayd
to
be
sent
against
the
waters
,
albeit
the
one
of
the
sea
,
the
other
of
the
riuers
,
in
two
verses
.
Then
the
third
Angell
powred
out
his
viall
vpon
the
riuers
and
fountaines
of
waters
;
and
they
became
bloud
.
5
And
I
heard
the
Angell
of
the
waters
say
,
Lord
,
thou
art
iust
,
Which
art
,
and
Which
wast
,
and
Which
shalt
be
;
because
thou
hast
iudged
these
things
.
6
For
they
shed
the
bloud
of
the
Saints
,
and
Prophetes
,
and
therefore
hast
thou
giuen
them
bloud
to
drinke
:
for
they
are
worthy
.
7
[
6
](A16102-e11370-b)
6
A
confirmation
of
the
prayse
before
going
,
out
of
the
sanctuarie
of
God
;
whether
immediatly
by
Christ
,
or
by
some
one
of
his
Angels
:
for
Christ
also
is
called
another
Angel
.
Chap.
7.
2.
3.
8.
and
10.
1.
And
I
heard
another
out
of
the
Sanctuarie
say
,
Euen
so
,
Lord
God
almightie
,
true
and
righteous
are
thy
iudgements
.
8
[
7
](A16102-e11390-b)
7
The
storie
of
the
fourth
Angell
,
who
throweth
a
plague
vpon
the
heauen
and
vpon
the
Sunne
,
of
which
Luke
21.
26.
the
effectes
whereof
are
noted
two
.
The
one
peculiar
,
that
it
shall
scorch
men
with
heate
,
in
this
verse
.
The
other
proceeding
accidentally
from
the
former
,
that
their
furie
shall
so
much
the
more
be
enraged
against
God
,
in
the
next
verse
:
when
yet
(
ô
wonderfull
mercie
and
pacience
of
God!
)
all
other
creatures
are
first
stricken
often
and
grieuously
by
the
hand
of
God
before
mankind
,
by
whom
he
is
prouoked
as
the
things
before
going
do
declare
.
And
the
fourth
Angell
powred
out
his
viall
on
the
Sunne
,
and
it
was
giuen
vnto
him
to
torment
men
with
heat
of
fire
,
9
And
men
boyled
in
great
heat
,
and
blasphemed
the
Name
of
God
,
which
hath
power
ouer
these
plagues
;
and
they
repented
not
,
to
giue
him
glorie
.
10
[
8
](A16102-e11420-b)
8
The
storie
of
the
fift
Angell
,
who
striketh
the
kingdome
of
the
beast
with
two
plagues
:
abroad
with
darknesse
;
&
within
with
biles
and
dolors
most
grieuous
,
throughout
his
whole
kingdome
:
that
thereby
he
might
wound
the
conscience
of
the
wicked
,
and
punish
that
most
peruerse
obstinacie
of
the
Idolaters
:
whereof
arose
perturbation
,
and
thence
a
furious
indignation
and
desperate
madnesse
,
raging
against
God
,
and
hurtfull
vnto
it selfe
.
Then
the
fift
Angel
powred
out
his
viall
vpon
the
throne
of
the
beast
,
&
his
kingdome
became
darke
,
and
they
gnawed
their
tongues
for
sorrow
:
11
And
blasphemed
the
God
of
heauen
for
their
paines
,
and
for
their
sores
,
&
repented
not
of
their
workes
.
12
[
9
](A16102-e11450-b)
9
The
storie
of
the
sixt
Angell
,
diuided
into
his
act
,
and
the
euent
thereof
.
The
act
is
,
that
the
Angell
did
cast
out
the
plague
of
a
most
glowing
heate
,
wherewith
euen
the
greatest
floudes
and
which
most
were
wont
to
swell
and
ouerflow
(
as
Euphrates
)
were
dried
vp
,
by
the
counsell
of
God
,
in
this
verse
.
The
euent
is
,
that
meere
madnesse
wherewith
the
wicked
are
enraged
,
that
they
may
scorne
the
iudgements
of
God
,
and
abuse
them
furiously
to
serue
their
owne
turne
,
and
to
the
executing
of
their
owne
wicked
outrage
.
Then
the
sixt
Angell
powred
out
his
viall
vpon
the
great
riuer
[
10
](A16102-e11460-b)
10
The
bound
of
the
spirituall
Babylon
,
and
the
fortresses
of
the
same
,
as
Chapter
9.
14.
Euphrates
;
&
the
[
11
](A16102-e11470-b)
11
So
the
Church
of
the
vngodly
,
and
kingdome
of
the
beast
is
sayd
to
be
left
naked
,
all
the
defences
thereof
,
in
which
they
put
their
trust
,
being
taken
away
from
it
.
water
thereof
was
dried
vp
,
[
12
](A16102-e11480-b)
12
That
is
,
that
euen
they
that
dwell
furthest
off
,
may
with
more
commoditie
make
hast
vnto
that
sacrifice
which
the
Lord
hath
appointed
.
that
way
might
be
prepared
for
the
Kings
that
should
come
from
the
East
.
13
And
I
saw
come
out
of
the
mouth
of
the
[
13
](A16102-e11500-b)
13
That
is
,
the
deuill
,
as
Chapter
12.
3.
Dragon
,
and
out
of
the
mouth
of
the
[
14
](A16102-e11510-b)
14
Whereof
Chapter
13.
1.
beast
,
&
out
of
the
mouth
of
that
[
15
](A16102-e11520-b)
15
That
is
,
of
that
other
beast
,
of
which
Chapter
13.
11.
for
so
he
is
called
also
Chapter
19.
20.
and
20.
10.
false
prophet
,
[
16
](A16102-e11530-b)
16
That
is
,
euerie
of
them
bent
their
whole
force
,
and
conspired
,
that
by
wonders
,
word
,
and
worke
they
might
bring
into
the
same
destruction
all
Kings
,
Princes
,
and
Potentates
of
the
world
,
cursedly
bewitched
of
them
by
their
spirites
,
and
teachers
of
the
vanitie
and
impuritie
of
the
beast
that
committed
fornication
with
the
Kings
of
the
earth
.
And
this
is
a
right
description
of
our
times
.
three
vncleane
spirites
[
17
](A16102-e11540-b)
17
Croaking
with
all
importunitie
,
and
continually
day
&
night
prouoking
&
calling
forth
to
armes
,
as
the
trumpets
and
furies
of
warre
:
as
is
declared
in
the
next
verse
.
like
vnto
frogges
.
14
For
they
are
the
spirites
of
deuils
,
working
miracles
,
and
go
vnto
the
Kings
of
the
earth
,
&
of
the
whole
world
,
to
gather
them
to
the
battell
of
that
great
day
of
God
Almightie
.
15
[
18
](A16102-e11570-b)
18
A
Parenthesis
for
admonition
,
in
which
God
warneth
his
holy
seruants
who
rest
in
the
expectation
of
Christ
,
alwayes
to
addresse
their
mindes
vnto
his
comming
and
to
looke
vnto
themselues
,
that
they
be
not
shamefully
made
naked
,
and
circumuented
of
these
vncleane
spirits
,
&
so
they
be
miserably
vnprepared
at
the
comming
of
their
Lord
,
so
Matth
24.
26
and
25.
13.
(
[
‖
](A16102-e11580-b)
‖
Chap.
3.
31.
Matth
24.
44.
Luke
.
12.
39.
Behold
,
I
come
as
a
theefe
.
Blessed
is
he
that
watcheth
and
keepeth
his
garments
,
least
he
walke
naked
,
and
men
see
his
filthines
.
)
16
[
19
](A16102-e11640-b)
19
Namely
the
Angell
,
who
holily
according
to
the
commaundement
of
God
,
was
to
doe
sacrifice
:
notwithstanding
that
those
impure
spirites
doe
the
same
wickedly
,
as
seruants
not
vnto
God
,
but
vnto
that
beast
,
that
hath
seuen
heades
.
He
therefore
gathered
them
together
into
a
place
,
called
in
Hebrew
[
20
](A16102-e11650-b)
20
That
is
(
to
say
nothing
of
other
expositions
)
the
mountaine
it selfe
,
or
mountaine
places
of
Megiddon
.
Now
it
is
certaine
by
the
holy
Scripture
,
that
Megiddon
is
a
Citie
and
territorie
in
the
Tribe
of
Manasses
,
bordering
vpon
Issacar
and
Asser
:
and
was
made
famous
by
that
lamentable
ouerthrow
of
king
Iosias
,
whereof
2.
Reg.
22.
30.
and
2.
Chronic.
35.
22.
and
Zach.
12.
11.
In
this
mountaine
countrey
God
saith
by
figure
or
type
,
that
the
kings
of
the
peoples
which
serue
the
beast
,
shall
meete
together
:
because
the
Gentiles
did
alwayes
cast
that
lamentable
ouerthrow
in
the
teeth
of
the
Church
of
the
Iewes
,
vnto
their
great
reproch
:
and
therefore
were
perswaded
,
that
that
place
should
be
most
fortunate
vnto
them
(
as
they
speake
)
and
infortunate
vnto
the
godly
.
But
God
here
pronounceth
,
that
that
reproch
of
the
Church
,
&
confidence
of
the
vngodly
,
shall
by
himselfe
be
taken
away
,
in
the
selfe
same
place
where
the
nations
perswaded
themselues
,
they
should
mightily
exsult
and
triumph
against
God
and
his
Church
.
Arma-gedon
.
17
¶
[
21
](A16102-e11670-b)
21
The
storie
of
the
seuenth
Angell
vnto
the
end
of
the
Chapter
,
in
which
first
is
shewed
by
signe
and
speach
,
the
argument
of
this
plague
,
in
this
verse
:
and
then
is
declared
the
execution
thereof
,
in
the
verses
following
.
Then
the
seuenth
Angel
powred
out
his
viall
into
the
[
22
](A16102-e11680-b)
22
From
whence
he
might
moue
the
heauen
aboue
,
and
the
earth
beneath
.
ayre
:
and
there
came
a
loude
voyce
out
of
the
Temple
of
heauen
[
23
](A16102-e11690-b)
23
That
is
,
from
him
that
sitteth
on
the
throne
,
by
the
figure
called
Metonymia
.
from
the
throne
,
saying
,
[
24
](A16102-e11710-b)
24
That
is
,
Babylon
is
vndone
,
as
is
shewed
verse
19.
and
in
the
Chapters
following
.
For
the
first
onset
(
as
I
might
say
)
of
this
denunciation
,
is
described
in
this
Chapter
:
and
the
last
,
conteining
a
perfect
victory
,
is
described
in
those
that
follow
.
It
is
done
.
18
[
25
](A16102-e11730-b)
25
Now
is
declared
the
execution
(
as
I
sayd
,
in
verse
17.
)
and
the
things
that
shall
last
come
to
passe
in
heauen
and
in
earth
,
before
the
ouerthrow
of
the
beast
of
Babylon
:
both
generally
,
vers.
18.
and
particularly
in
the
cursed
Citie
,
and
such
as
haue
any
familiaritie
therewith
,
in
the
three
last
verses
:
And
there
were
sounds
,
and
lightnings
and
thunders
,
and
there
was
a
great
earthquake
,
such
as
neuer
was
since
men
were
vpon
the
earth
,
I
say
so
mightie
an
earthquake
.
19
[
26
](A16102-e11750-b)
26
That
seat
or
standing
place
of
Antichrist
.
And
that
great
Citie
was
rent
into
three
partes
,
and
the
Cities
[
27
](A16102-e11760-b)
27
Of
all
such
as
cleane
vnto
Antichrist
,
and
sight
against
Christ
of
the
Nations
fell
and
that
great
[
28
](A16102-e11770-b)
28
That
harlot
,
of
whom
in
the
Chapter
next
following
.
Now
this
phrase
,
to
come
into
remembrance
,
is
after
the
common
vse
of
the
Hebrew
speach
;
borrowed
from
men
,
and
attributed
vnto
God
.
Babylon
came
in
remembrance
before
God
,
[
‖
](A16102-e11790-b)
‖
Iere.
25.
15.
that
he
might
giue
vnto
her
the
cup
of
the
wine
of
the
fiercenesse
of
his
wrath
.
20
And
euery
yle
fled
away
,
and
the
mountaines
[
29
](A16102-e11820-b)
29
That
is
,
were
seene
no
more
,
or
were
no
more
extant
.
A
borrowed
Hebraisme
.
were
not
[
b
](A16102-e11830-b)
b
Appeared
not
,
which
the
Hebrewes
vtter
after
this
sort
,
were
not
,
Gen.
5.
24.
found
.
21
[
30
](A16102-e11860-b)
30
The
maner
of
the
particular
execution
,
most
euidently
testifying
the
wrath
of
God
by
the
originall
and
greatnesse
thereof
:
the
euent
whereof
is
the
same
with
that
which
is
Chapter
9.
13.
and
which
hath
bene
mentioned
in
this
Chapter
,
from
the
execution
of
the
fourth
Angell
hetherto
:
that
is
to
say
,
an
incorrigible
pertinacie
of
the
world
in
their
rebellion
,
and
an
heart
that
cannot
repent
,
verse
9.
and
11.
And
there
fell
a
great
haile
,
as
it
were
of
the
weight
of
a
[
c
](A16102-e11870-b)
c
As
it
were
about
the
weight
of
a
talent
:
and
a
talent
was
threescore
pound
,
that
is
,
sixe
hundreth
groates
,
whereby
is
signified
a
marueilous
and
strange
kind
of
weight
.
talent
,
out
of
heauen
vpon
men
;
&
men
blasphemed
God
,
because
of
the
plague
of
the
haile
:
for
the
plague
thereof
was
exceeding
great
.
CHAP.
XVII
.
1
That
great
whore
is
described
,
2
with
whom
the
Kings
of
the
earth
committed
fornication
.
6
She
is
drunken
with
the
bloud
of
Saintes
:
7
The
mysterie
of
the
woman
and
the
beast
that
carrieth
her
expounded
:
11
their
destruction
.
14
The
Lambes
victorie
,
1
[
1
](A16102-e11990-b)
1
The
state
of
the
Church
militant
being
declared
,
now
followeth
the
state
of
the
Church
ouercomming
&
getting
victorie
,
as
I
shewed
before
in
the
beginning
of
the
tenth
chapter
.
This
state
is
set
forth
in
4.
Chap.
As
in
the
place
before
going
I
noted
,
that
in
that
history
the
order
of
time
was
not
alwayes
exactly
obserued
;
so
the
same
is
to
be
vnderstood
in
this
historie
;
that
it
is
distinguished
according
to
the
persons
of
which
it
treateth
;
and
that
in
the
seuerall
stories
of
the
persons
is
seuerally
obserued
the
time
thereof
.
For
first
is
deliuered
the
storie
of
Babylon
destroyed
,
in
this
and
the
next
chapter
,
(
for
this
Babylon
out
of
all
doubt
,
shal
perish
before
the
two
beasts
and
the
dragon
.
)
Secondly
is
deliuered
the
destruction
of
both
the
two
beasts
,
chap.
19.
And
lastly
of
the
dragon
,
chap.
20.
In
the
storie
of
the
spirituall
Babylon
are
distinctly
set
forth
,
the
state
therof
in
this
chapter
and
the
ouerthrow
done
from
God
,
chap.
18.
In
this
verse
&
that
which
followeth
,
is
a
transition
or
passage
vnto
the
first
argument
,
consisting
of
a
particular
calling
of
the
Prophet
(
as
often
heretofore
)
&
a
generall
proposition
.
[
a
](A16102-e12010-b)
a
The
sentence
that
is
pronounced
against
this
harlot
.
the
[
2
](A16102-e12020-b)
2
That
is
,
that
damnable
harlot
,
by
a
figure
called
bypal
large
For
S.
Iohn
as
yet
had
not
seene
her
.
Although
another
interpretation
may
be
borne
;
yet
I
like
this
better
.
damnation
of
that
great
whore
that
sitteth
vpon
many
waters
;
2
With
whom
haue
committed
fornication
the
Kings
of
the
earth
,
&
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
are
made
drunken
with
the
wine
of
her
fornication
.
3
[
3
](A16102-e12060-b)
3
Henceforth
is
propounded
the
type
of
Babylon
,
and
the
state
thereof
,
in
4.
verses
.
After
,
a
declaration
of
the
type
,
in
the
rest
of
this
Chap.
In
the
type
are
described
2.
things
,
the
beast
(
of
whom
chap.
13
)
in
the
3.
verse
:
and
the
woman
that
sitteth
vpon
the
beast
,
vers.
4.
5.
6.
The
beast
in
processe
of
time
hath
gotten
somewhat
more
then
was
expressed
in
the
former
vision
First
in
that
it
is
not
read
before
that
he
was
apparelled
in
scarlet
,
a
robe
imperiall
and
of
triumph
.
Secondly
,
in
that
this
is
full
of
names
of
blasphemie
:
the
other
caried
the
name
of
blasphemy
only
in
his
heads
.
So
God
did
teach
that
this
beast
is
much
increased
in
impietie
and
vniustice
,
and
doth
in
this
last
age
,
triumph
in
both
these
more
insolently
and
proudly
then
euer
before
.
So
he
caried
me
away
into
the
wildernes
by
the
Spirit
,
&
I
saw
a
woman
sit
vpon
a
[
b
](A16102-e12070-b)
b
A
skarlet
colour
,
that
is
,
with
a
red
and
purple
garment
:
and
surely
it
was
not
without
cause
that
the
Romish
clergie
were
so
much
delighted
with
this
colour
.
skarlet
coloured
beast
,
full
of
names
of
blasphemie
,
which
had
seuen
heads
,
and
ten
hornes
.
4
And
[
4
](A16102-e12090-b)
4
That
harlot
,
the
spirituall
Babylon
,
which
is
Rome
.
She
is
described
by
her
attire
,
profession
,
and
deeds
.
the
woman
was
[
5
](A16102-e12100-b)
5
In
attire
:
most
glorious
,
triumphant
,
most
rich
,
and
most
gorgious
.
arayed
in
purple
and
skarlet
,
and
glittering
with
golde
,
and
precious
stones
,
and
pearles
;
[
6
](A16102-e12110-b)
6
In
profession
:
the
nourisher
of
all
,
in
this
verse
;
and
teaching
her
mysteries
vnto
all
,
verse
5.
setting
forth
all
things
most
magnificently
:
but
in
deed
most
pernitious
,
besotting
miserable
men
with
her
cup
,
and
bringing
vpon
them
a
deadly
giddinesse
.
and
had
a
cup
of
gold
in
her
hand
,
full
of
the
abominations
,
&
filthinesse
of
her
fornication
;
5
[
7
](A16102-e12130-b)
7
Deceiuing
with
the
title
of
religion
,
and
publike
inscription
of
mystery
:
which
the
beast
in
times
past
did
not
beare
.
And
in
her
forehead
a
name
written
,
A
Mysterie
;
[
8
](A16102-e12140-b)
8
An
exposition
:
in
which
Saint
Iohn
declareth
what
manner
of
woman
this
is
.
that
great
Babylon
,
that
mother
of
the
whoredomes
,
and
abominations
of
the
earth
.
6
[
9
](A16102-e12160-b)
9
In
deedes
;
She
is
red
with
blood
,
and
sheddeth
it
most
licentiously
;
and
therefore
is
coulored
with
the
blood
of
the
saincts
:
as
on
the
contrarie
part
,
Christ
is
set
forth
imbrued
with
the
blood
of
his
enimies
,
Esay
63.
1.
And
I
saw
the
woman
drunken
with
the
bloud
of
the
Saints
,
and
with
the
bloud
of
the
Martyrs
of
Iesus
:
&
when
I
saw
her
,
[
10
](A16102-e12170-b)
10
A
passage
vnto
the
second
part
of
this
chapter
,
by
occasion
giuen
of
Saint
Iohn
,
as
the
words
of
the
Angell
doe
shew
,
in
the
next
verse
.
I
wondred
with
great
maruell
.
7
[
11
](A16102-e12190-b)
11
The
second
part
or
place
,
as
I
said
verse
1.
The
enarration
of
the
vision
,
promised
in
this
verse
,
and
deliuered
in
the
verse
following
.
Now
there
is
deliuered
first
an
enarration
of
the
beast
,
and
his
storie
,
vnto
the
14.
verse
:
After
,
of
the
harlot
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
Then
the
Angel
said
vnto
me
,
Wherfore
maruellest
thou
?
I
will
shew
thee
the
mysterie
of
the
woman
,
and
of
the
beast
that
beareth
her
,
which
hath
seuen
heads
,
and
ten
hornes
.
8
[
12
](A16102-e12210-b)
12
The
storie
of
the
beast
hath
a
triple
description
of
him
.
The
first
is
a
distinction
of
this
beast
from
all
that
euer
haue
bene
at
any
time
:
which
distinction
is
contained
in
this
verse
:
The
second
is
a
deliniation
or
painting
out
of
the
beast
by
things
present
,
by
which
he
might
euen
at
that
time
be
knowne
of
the
godly
:
and
this
deliniation
is
according
to
his
heads
,
verse
9.
10.
11.
The
third
is
an
historicall
foretelling
of
thinges
to
come
,
and
to
be
done
by
him
:
and
these
are
ascribed
vnto
his
hornes
,
vers.
12.
13.
14.
This
beast
is
that
Empire
of
Rome
,
of
which
I
spake
chapter
13.
11.
according
to
the
mutations
&
chaunges
whereof
,
which
then
had
alreadie
happened
,
the
holy
ghost
hath
distinguished
and
set
out
the
same
.
The
Apostle
distinguisheth
this
beast
from
all
others
in
these
wordes
:
The
beast
which
thou
sawest
,
was
and
is
not
.
For
so
I
expound
the
words
of
the
Apostle
for
euidencie
sake
:
as
I
will
further
declare
in
the
notes
following
.
The
beast
that
thou
hast
seene
,
[
13
](A16102-e12230-b)
13
The
meaning
is
,
that
beast
which
thou
sawest
before
(
chapter
13.
1.
)
&
which
yet
thou
hast
now
seene
,
was
,
was
(
I
say
)
euen
from
Iulius
Cęsar
,
in
respect
of
beginning
,
rising
vp
,
station
,
glorie
,
dominion
,
manner
and
stocke
,
from
the
house
of
Iulius
:
and
yet
is
not
now
the
same
,
if
thou
looke
vnto
the
house
and
stocke
:
for
the
dominion
of
this
familie
,
was
translated
vnto
another
,
after
the
death
of
Nero
;
from
that
other
vnto
a
third
,
from
the
third
vnto
a
fourth
,
and
so
forth
,
was
varied
and
altered
by
innumerable
changes
.
Finally
,
the
Empire
is
one
,
as
it
were
one
beast
:
but
exceedingly
varied
by
kinreds
,
families
,
and
persons
It
was
therefore
(
saith
Saint
Iohn
)
in
the
kindreds
or
house
of
Iulius
:
and
now
it
is
not
in
that
kindred
,
but
translated
vnto
another
.
was
,
and
is
not
:
[
14
](A16102-e12240-b)
14
As
if
he
should
say
,
Also
this
same
that
is
,
shall
shortly
not
be
:
but
shall
ascend
out
of
the
depth
,
or
out
of
the
sea
(
as
was
said
chapter
13.
1.
)
that
is
,
shall
be
a
new
stocke
from
amongst
the
nations
without
difference
:
and
shall
in
the
same
state
go
vnto
destruction
,
or
ruine
,
and
perish
:
and
so
shall
successiuely
new
Princes
or
Emperours
come
,
and
go
,
arise
and
fall
,
the
bodie
of
the
beast
remaining
still
,
but
tossed
with
so
manie
and
often
alterations
;
as
no
man
can
but
maruell
that
this
beast
was
able
to
stand
and
hold
out
,
in
so
many
mutations
.
Verely
no
Empire
that
euer
was
,
tossed
with
so
many
changes
,
and
as
it
were
with
so
many
tempests
of
the
sea
,
euer
continued
so
long
.
and
shall
ascend
out
of
the
bottomles
pit
,
and
shall
go
into
perdition
,
and
the
inhabitants
of
the
earth
shall
wonder
(
whose
names
are
not
written
in
the
booke
of
life
from
the
foundation
of
the
world
)
[
15
](A16102-e12250-b)
15
That
is
,
as
manie
as
haue
not
learned
the
prouidence
of
God
,
according
to
the
faith
of
the
sainctes
shall
maruell
at
these
grieuous
and
often
changes
:
when
they
shall
consider
,
the
selfe
same
beast
,
which
is
the
Romaine
Empire
,
to
haue
bene
,
not
to
be
,
and
to
be
,
&
still
molested
with
perpetuall
mutation
;
and
yet
in
the
same
to
stand
and
continue
.
This
,
in
mine
opinion
,
is
the
most
simple
exposition
of
this
place
,
confirmed
by
euent
of
the
things
themselues
.
Although
the
last
change
also
,
by
which
the
Empire
,
that
before
was
ciuile
,
became
Ecclesiasticall
,
is
not
obscurely
signified
in
these
words
:
of
which
two
,
the
first
exercised
crueltie
vpon
the
bodies
of
the
sainctes
:
the
other
also
vpon
their
soules
:
the
first
by
humaine
order
and
policie
,
the
other
vnder
the
colour
of
the
law
of
God
,
and
of
religion
,
raged
and
imbrued
it selfe
with
the
blood
of
the
godly
.
when
they
behold
the
beast
that
was
,
and
is
not
,
and
yet
is
.
9
[
16
](A16102-e12270-b)
16
An
exhortation
preparing
vnto
audience
,
by
the
same
argument
,
with
that
of
Christ
:
He
that
hath
eares
to
heare
,
let
him
heare
.
Wherefore
for
mine
owne
part
,
I
had
rather
reade
in
this
place
,
Let
there
be
here
a
minde
,
&c.
So
the
Angel
passeth
fitly
vnto
the
seconde
place
of
this
description
.
Here
is
the
minde
that
hath
wisdome
.
The
[
c
](A16102-e12310-b)
c
Verie
children
know
,
what
that
seuen
hilled
citie
is
,
which
is
so
much
spoken
of
,
&
wherof
Virgil
thus
reporteth
,
And
compassed
seuen
towers
within
one
wall
:
that
citie
it
is
,
which
,
when
Iohn
wrote
these
things
,
had
rule
ouer
the
Kings
of
the
earth
:
It
was
,
and
is
not
,
and
yet
it
remaineth
to
this
day
,
but
it
is
declining
to
destruction
.
seuen
heads
,
are
[
17
](A16102-e12340-b)
17
This
is
the
painting
out
of
the
beast
by
things
present
(
as
I
said
before
)
whereby
S.
Iohn
endeuoured
so
to
describe
the
same
,
that
he
might
both
be
knowne
of
the
godly
in
that
age
,
and
be
further
obserued
and
marked
of
posteritie
afterwards
.
This
delineation
hath
one
type
,
that
is
,
his
heads
;
but
a
double
description
or
application
of
the
type
:
one
permanent
from
the
nature
of
it selfe
:
the
other
changeable
,
by
the
working
of
men
.
The
description
permanent
,
is
by
the
seuen
hills
,
in
this
verse
;
the
other
that
fleeteth
,
is
from
the
seuen
kings
,
verse
10.
11.
And
here
it
is
worthie
to
be
obserued
,
that
one
type
hath
sometimes
two
or
more
applications
:
as
seemeth
good
vnto
the
holy
Ghost
to
expresse
either
one
thing
by
diuerse
types
,
or
diuerse
things
by
one
type
.
So
I
noted
before
,
of
the
seuen
spirits
chap.
1.
4.
Now
this
woman
that
sitteth
vpon
seuen
hilles
,
is
the
citie
of
Rome
,
called
in
time
past
of
the
Graecians
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
i.
of
seuen
tops
or
creasts
,
&
of
Varro
septiceps
,
i.
of
seuen
heads
(
as
here
)
of
her
seuen
heads
;
and
of
others
septemcollis
.
i.
standing
vpon
seuen
hilles
.
seuen
mountaines
,
whereon
the
woman
sitteth
:
10
[
18
](A16102-e12390-b)
18
The
beginning
of
these
kings
or
Emperours
is
almost
the
same
with
the
beginning
of
the
Church
of
Christ
,
which
I
shewed
before
chap.
11.
1.
Namely
from
the
yeare
35.
after
the
passion
of
Christ
,
what
time
the
Temple
and
Church
of
the
Iewes
was
ouerthrowne
.
In
which
ye
are
it
came
to
passe
by
the
prouidence
of
God
,
that
that
saving
,
The
beast
was
,
and
is
not
,
was
fulfilled
before
that
the
destruction
of
the
Iewes
immediatly
following
,
came
to
passe
.
That
was
the
yeare
from
the
building
of
the
citie
of
Rome
809.
from
which
yeare
S.
Iohn
both
numbreth
the
Emperors
which
thitherto
had
bene
,
when
he
wrote
these
things
;
and
foretelleth
of
two
others
next
to
come
:
and
that
with
this
purpose
,
that
when
this
particular
prediction
or
foretelling
of
things
to
come
,
should
take
effect
,
the
truth
of
all
other
predictions
in
the
Church
,
might
be
the
more
confirmed
.
Which
signe
God
of
old
mentioned
in
the
Law
,
Deuter.
18.
and
Ieremie
confirmed
.
chap.
28.
8.
They
are
also
seuen
Kings
,
[
19
](A16102-e12410-b)
19
Whose
names
are
these
:
the
first
Seruivs
Sulpttius
Galba
,
who
was
the
seuenth
Emperor
of
the
people
of
Rome
;
the
second
Marcus
Saluius
Otho
;
the
third
,
Aulus
Vitellius
;
the
fourth
,
Titus
Flauius
Vespasianus
;
the
sift
,
Titus
Vespasianus
his
sonne
,
of
his
owne
name
.
fiue
are
fallen
,
[
20
](A16102-e12470-b)
20
Flauius
Domitian
sonne
of
the
first
Vespasian
.
For
in
the
later
ende
of
his
dayes
S.
Iohn
wrote
these
things
:
as
witnesseth
Irenaeus
lib.
5.
aduersus
haereses
.
&
one
is
,
[
21
](A16102-e12520-b)
21
Nerua
.
The
Empire
being
now
translated
from
the
familie
of
Flauius
.
This
man
raigned
only
one
yeare
,
foure
moneths
,
and
nine
days
,
as
the
historie
writers
do
tell
.
and
another
is
not
yet
come
:
&
when
he
commeth
,
he
must
continue
a
short
space
.
11
[
22
](A16102-e12550-b)
22
This
is
spoken
by
the
figure
synecdoche
,
as
much
to
say
,
as
that
head
of
the
beast
which
was
and
is
not
,
because
it
is
cut
off
,
&
Nerua
in
so
short
time
extinguished
.
How
manie
heads
there
were
,
so
many
beasts
there
seemed
to
be
in
one
.
See
the
like
speech
in
the
third
verse
of
the
thirteenth
chapter
.
And
the
beast
that
was
,
and
is
not
,
is
[
23
](A16102-e12560-b)
23
Nerua
Traianus
,
who
him selfe
in
diuerse
respects
is
called
here
the
seuenth
&
the
eighth
.
the
eight
,
and
is
[
24
](A16102-e12570-b)
24
Though
in
number
&
order
of
succession
he
be
the
eighth
,
yet
he
is
reckened
together
with
one
of
these
heads
,
because
Nerua
and
he
were
one
head
.
For
this
man
obtained
authoritie
together
with
Nerua
,
and
was
Consull
with
him
,
when
Nerua
left
his
life
.
one
of
the
seuen
,
[
25
](A16102-e12580-b)
25
Namely
to
molest
with
persecutions
the
churches
of
Christ
,
as
the
histories
do
record
,
and
I
haue
briefly
noted
chap.
2.
10.
and
goeth
vnto
destruction
.
12
[
26
](A16102-e12600-b)
26
The
third
place
of
this
description
,
as
I
sayd
verse
8.
is
a
propheticall
prediction
of
things
to
come
which
the
beast
should
do
;
as
in
the
words
following
&
Iohn
doth
not
obscurely
signifie
,
saying
,
which
haue
not
yet
receiued
the
kingdome
&c.
For
there
is
an
antithesis
or
opposition
betweene
these
kings
,
and
those
that
went
before
.
And
first
the
persons
are
described
,
in
this
verse
;
then
their
deedes
,
in
the
two
verses
following
.
And
the
ten
hornes
which
thou
sawest
,
are
[
27
](A16102-e12620-b)
27
That
is
,
arising
with
their
kingdomes
,
out
of
that
Romaine
beast
:
at
such
time
as
that
politicall
Empire
began
by
the
craft
of
the
Popes
greatly
to
fall
.
ten
Kings
,
which
yet
haue
not
receiued
the
kingdome
,
but
shall
receiue
power
,
as
Kings
[
28
](A16102-e12630-b)
28
Namely
,
with
that
second
beast
,
whom
we
called
before
a
false
prophet
,
which
beast
ascending
out
of
the
earth
,
got
vnto
him selfe
all
the
authoritie
and
power
of
the
first
beast
,
and
exerciseth
the
same
before
his
face
,
as
was
said
chapter
14.
11.
12.
For
when
the
politicall
Empire
of
the
West
began
to
bow
downewards
,
there
both
arose
those
ten
Kings
,
and
the
second
beast
tooke
the
oportunitie
offered
,
to
vsurpe
vnto
him selfe
all
the
power
of
the
former
beast
.
These
kings
long
ago
,
many
haue
numbred
and
described
to
be
ten
,
and
a
great
part
of
the
euents
plainely
testifieth
the
same
in
this
our
age
.
at
one
houre
with
the
beast
.
13
[
29
](A16102-e12650-b)
29
That
is
,
by
consent
or
agreement
:
that
they
may
conspire
with
the
beast
,
and
depende
vppon
his
becke
.
Their
storie
is
deuided
into
three
parts
,
counselles
,
actes
,
and
euents
.
The
counsels
some
of
them
consist
in
communicating
of
iudgements
and
affections
:
and
some
in
communicating
of
power
,
which
they
are
sayd
to
haue
giuen
vnto
this
beast
,
in
this
verse
.
These
haue
all
one
mind
,
and
shall
giue
their
power
,
and
authoritie
vnto
the
beast
.
14
These
shall
fight
with
the
[
30
](A16102-e12670-b)
30
With
Christ
and
his
church
,
as
the
reason
following
doth
declare
:
and
here
are
mentioned
the
facts
and
euentes
which
followed
for
Christ
his
sake
,
and
for
the
grace
of
God
the
Father
towards
those
that
are
called
,
elected
,
and
are
his
faithfull
ones
in
Christ
.
Lambe
,
&
the
Lambe
shall
ouercome
them
:
[
‖
](A16102-e12680-b)
‖
Chap.
19.
16.
1.
Tim.
6.
15.
for
he
is
the
Lord
of
Lords
,
and
King
of
Kings
:
and
they
that
are
on
his
side
,
called
,
and
chosen
,
and
faithfull
.
15
[
31
](A16102-e12720-b)
31
This
is
the
other
member
of
the
enarration
,
as
I
said
ver.
7.
belonging
vnto
the
harlot
,
shewed
in
the
vision
,
ver.
3.
In
this
historie
of
the
harlot
,
these
three
things
are
distinctly
propounded
;
what
is
her
magnificencie
,
in
this
verse
,
what
is
her
fall
,
&
by
whom
it
shall
happen
vnto
her
,
in
the
2.
verses
following
:
&
lastly
,
who
that
harlot
is
,
in
the
last
ver.
This
place
which
by
order
of
nature
should
haue
bene
the
first
,
is
therefore
made
the
last
,
because
it
was
more
fit
to
be
ioyned
with
the
next
chapter
.
After
he
sayd
vnto
me
,
The
waters
which
thou
sawest
,
where
the
whore
sitteth
,
[
32
](A16102-e12730-b)
32
That
is
,
as
vnconstant
and
variable
as
are
the
waters
.
Vpon
this
foundation
sitteth
this
harlot
as
a
queene
,
a
vaine
person
vpon
that
which
is
vaine
.
are
peoples
,
&
multitudes
,
and
nations
,
and
tongues
.
16
And
the
[
33
](A16102-e12750-b)
33
The
ten
kings
,
as
vers.
12.
The
accomplishment
of
this
fact
&
euent
is
dayly
increased
in
this
our
age
,
by
the
singular
prouidence
and
most
mightie
gouernment
of
God
.
Wherfore
the
facts
are
propounded
in
this
verse
;
&
the
causes
of
them
in
the
verses
following
.
ten
hornes
which
thou
sawest
vpon
the
beast
,
they
shall
hate
the
whore
,
and
shall
make
her
desolate
and
naked
,
and
shall
eate
her
flesh
,
and
burne
her
with
fire
.
17
[
34
](A16102-e12770-b)
34
A
reason
rendred
from
the
chiefe
efficient
cause
,
which
is
the
prouidence
of
God
,
by
which
alone
saint
Iohn
by
inuersion
of
order
affirmeth
to
haue
come
to
passe
,
both
that
the
kings
should
execute
vpon
the
harlot
that
which
pleased
God
;
&
which
he
declared
in
the
verse
next
before
going
:
&
also
that
by
one
consent
&
counsel
they
should
giue
their
kingdome
vnto
the
beast
&c.
ver.
13.
14.
for
as
these
being
blinded
haue
before
depended
vpon
the
becke
of
the
beast
that
lifteth
vp
the
harlot
,
so
it
is
said
that
afterwards
it
shal
come
to
passe
,
that
they
shal
turne
back
,
and
shal
fal
away
from
her
,
when
their
hearts
shal
be
turned
into
better
state
by
the
grace
&
mercy
of
God
.
For
God
hath
put
in
their
hearts
to
fulfill
his
decree
,
and
to
be
of
one
consent
,
&
to
giue
their
kingdome
vnto
the
beast
,
vntill
the
wordes
of
God
be
fulfilled
.
18
And
the
woman
which
thou
sawest
,
is
that
[
35
](A16102-e12790-b)
35
That
is
,
Rome
,
that
great
city
,
or
only
citie
(
as
Lustinian
calleth
it
)
the
king
&
head
wherof
was
then
the
Emperor
,
but
now
the
Pope
,
since
that
the
condition
of
the
beast
was
changed
.
great
citie
,
which
hath
dominion
ouer
the
Kings
of
the
earth
.
CHAP.
XVIII
.
2
The
horrible
destruction
of
Babylon
is
set
out
.
11.
16.
18.
The
marchants
of
the
earth
,
who
were
enriched
with
the
pompe
and
luxuriousnesse
of
it
,
weepe
and
waile
:
20
But
all
the
elect
reioyce
for
that
iust
vengeance
of
God
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e12880-b)
1
The
second
place
(
as
I
sayd
before
17
1
)
of
the
historie
of
Babylon
,
is
of
the
wofull
fall
and
ruine
of
that
whore
of
Babylon
.
This
historicall
praediction
concerning
her
,
is
threefold
.
The
first
a
plaine
&
simple
foretelling
of
her
ruine
,
in
three
verses
;
the
second
a
figuratiue
prediction
by
the
circumstances
,
thence
vnto
the
20.
verse
.
The
third
,
a
confirmation
of
the
same
by
signe
or
wonder
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
[
2
](A16102-e12910-b)
2
Either
Christ
the
eternall
word
of
God
the
Father
,
(
as
often
elsewhere
)
or
a
created
Angel
and
one
deputed
vnto
this
seruice
,
but
thoroughly
furnished
with
greatnes
of
power
,
&
with
light
of
glorie
as
the
ensigne
of
power
.
Angell
come
downe
from
out
of
heauen
hauing
great
power
;
so
that
the
verie
earth
was
lightned
with
his
glorie
.
2
And
he
cried
our
mightily
with
a
loude
voice
,
[
3
](A16102-e12930-b)
3
The
prediction
or
foreshewing
of
her
ruine
,
containing
both
the
fall
of
Babylon
,
in
this
verse
;
and
the
cause
thereof
vttered
by
way
of
allegorie
concerning
her
spirituall
and
carnall
wickednesses
,
that
is
,
her
most
great
impietie
and
vniustice
,
in
the
next
verse
:
her
fall
is
first
simplie
declared
of
the
Angell
,
and
then
the
greatnes
thereof
is
shewed
here
by
the
euents
;
when
he
saith
it
shal
be
the
seate
and
habitation
of
diuels
,
of
wild
beasts
,
and
of
cursed
foules
,
as
of
old
Esay
.
13.
21.
and
often
elsewhere
.
saying
,
[
‖
](A16102-e12940-b)
‖
Chap.
14.
8.
Esa.
21.
9.
Ierem.
51.
8.
It
is
fallen
,
it
is
fallen
,
Babylon
that
great
citie
,
and
is
become
an
habitation
of
deuils
,
and
the
hold
of
all
foule
spirits
,
and
a
cage
of
euerie
vncleane
and
hatefull
byrd
.
3
Because
all
nations
haue
drunken
of
the
wine
of
the
wrath
of
her
fornication
,
&
the
Kings
of
the
earth
haue
committed
fornication
with
her
,
and
the
marchants
of
the
earth
are
waxed
rich
by
the
abundance
of
her
voluptuousnesse
.
4
[
4
](A16102-e13010-b)
4
The
second
prediction
,
which
is
of
the
circumstances
of
the
ruine
of
Babylon
:
of
these
there
are
two
kindes
:
one
going
before
it
,
as
that
beforehand
the
godly
are
deliuered
,
vnto
the
ninth
verse
:
the
other
following
vpon
her
ruine
,
namely
the
lamentation
of
the
wicked
,
and
reioycing
of
the
godly
,
vnto
the
twentith
verse
.
And
I
heard
another
voice
from
heauen
say
,
[
5
](A16102-e13020-b)
5
Two
circumstances
going
before
the
ruine
,
are
commanded
in
this
place
,
one
is
,
that
the
godly
depart
out
of
Babylon
:
as
I
mentioned
chap.
12.
to
haue
bene
done
in
time
past
,
before
the
destruction
of
Ierusalem
:
this
charge
is
giuen
here
,
&
in
the
next
verse
.
The
other
is
that
euery
one
of
them
occupie
themselues
in
their
own
place
,
in
executing
the
iudgements
of
God
,
as
it
was
commanded
the
Leuits
of
old
,
Exod.
32.
27.
and
that
they
sanctifie
their
hands
vnto
the
Lord
,
ver.
6
7.
8.
Go
out
of
her
,
my
people
,
that
ye
be
[
6
](A16102-e13030-b)
6
Of
this
commandement
there
are
two
causes
:
to
auoid
the
contagion
of
sinne
,
and
to
shun
the
participation
of
those
punishments
that
belong
thereunto
.
not
partakers
of
her
sinnes
,
and
that
ye
receiue
not
of
her
plagues
.
5
For
the
heape
of
her
sinnes
doth
[
a
](A16102-e13050-b)
a
He
vseth
a
word
which
signifieth
the
folowing
of
sinnes
one
after
another
.
&
rising
one
of
another
in
such
sort
that
they
grew
at
length
to
such
an
heape
,
that
they
came
vpeuen
to
heauen
.
reach
vp
vnto
heauen
,
&
God
hath
remembred
her
iniquities
.
6
[
7
](A16102-e13070-b)
7
The
prouocation
of
the
godly
,
&
the
commandement
of
executing
the
iudgements
of
God
,
stand
vpon
three
causes
,
which
are
here
expressed
:
the
vniust
wickednesse
of
the
whore
of
Babylon
,
in
this
verse
;
her
cursed
pride
opposing
it selfe
against
God
,
which
is
the
fountaine
of
all
euill
actions
,
vers
7.
and
her
most
iust
damnation
by
the
sentence
of
God
,
vers.
8.
Reward
her
,
euen
as
she
hath
rewarded
you
;
&
giue
her
double
according
to
her
works
:
and
in
the
cup
that
she
hath
filled
to
you
,
fill
her
double
.
7
So
much
as
she
hath
glorified
her self
,
and
liued
in
pleasure
,
so
much
giue
ye
to
her
of
torment
and
sorow
:
because
she
saith
[
b
](A16102-e13100-b)
b
With
herselfe
.
in
her
heart
,
I
sit
as
a
queene
,
and
am
[
c
](A16102-e13110-b)
c
I
am
full
of
people
&
mightie
.
no
widow
,
and
shall
[
d
](A16102-e13120-b)
d
I
shall
tast
of
none
.
see
no
mourning
.
8
Therefore
shall
her
plagues
come
in
[
e
](A16102-e13140-b)
e
Shortly
,
and
at
one
instant
.
one
day
,
death
,
and
sorow
,
and
famine
;
and
she
shal
be
burnt
with
fire
:
for
the
Lord
God
which
condemneth
her
is
mightie
.
9
Then
[
8
](A16102-e13160-b)
8
The
circumstances
following
the
fall
of
Babylon
,
or
the
consequents
thereof
(
as
I
distinguished
them
vers.
4.
)
are
two
.
Namely
the
lamentation
of
the
wicked
,
vnto
the
19.
verse
:
and
the
reioycing
of
the
godly
,
vers.
20.
This
most
sorowfull
lamentation
,
according
to
the
persons
of
them
that
lament
;
hath
three
members
,
the
first
whereof
is
the
mourning
of
the
kings
and
mightie
men
of
the
earth
,
in
two
verses
:
The
second
is
,
the
lamentation
of
the
marchants
that
traffique
bv
land
,
thence
vnto
the
16.
verse
;
The
third
is
,
the
wailing
of
those
that
merchandize
by
sea
,
vers.
16.
17.
18.
In
euerie
of
these
the
cause
&
maner
of
their
mourning
is
described
in
order
,
according
to
the
condition
of
those
that
mourne
:
with
obseruation
of
that
which
best
agreeth
vnto
them
.
the
Kings
of
the
earth
shal
bewaile
her
,
and
lament
for
her
,
which
haue
committed
fornication
,
and
liued
in
pleasure
with
her
,
when
they
shall
see
the
smoke
of
her
burning
,
10
And
shall
stand
a
farre
of
for
feare
of
her
torment
,
saying
,
Alas
,
alas
,
that
great
citie
Babylon
,
that
mightie
citie
:
in
one
houre
is
thy
iudgement
come
.
11
[
9
](A16102-e13190-b)
9
The
lamentation
of
those
that
trade
by
land
,
as
I
distinguished
immediatly
before
.
Also
the
marchants
of
the
earth
shal
weepe
&
waile
ouer
her
:
for
no
man
buyeth
their
ware
any
more
:
12
The
ware
of
gold
and
siluer
,
and
of
precious
stone
,
and
of
pearles
,
and
of
fine
linnen
,
and
of
purple
,
&
of
silke
,
&
of
skarler
,
and
of
all
maner
of
Thyne
wood
,
&
of
all
vessels
of
yuorie
,
and
of
all
vessels
of
most
precious
wood
,
and
of
brasse
,
and
of
yron
,
and
of
marble
,
13
And
of
cinamon
,
and
odours
,
&
ointments
,
and
franckensence
,
&
wine
,
&
oile
,
&
fine
floure
,
and
wheate
,
and
beasts
,
and
sheepe
,
and
horses
,
and
charets
,
and
seruants
,
and
soules
of
men
.
14
[
10
](A16102-e13230-b)
10
An
apostrophē
or
turning
of
the
speach
,
by
imitation
,
vsed
for
more
vehemencie
,
as
if
those
merchants
,
after
the
maner
of
mourners
,
should
in
passionate
speech
speake
vnto
Babylon
,
though
now
vtterly
fallen
and
ouerthrown
.
So
Esa.
12.
9.
and
in
manie
other
places
.
And
the
[
f
](A16102-e13240-b)
f
By
this
is
meant
that
seaso
,
which
is
next
before
the
fall
of
the
leafe
,
at
what
season
frutes
ripen
,
and
the
word
signifieth
such
fruites
as
are
longed
for
.
apples
that
thy
soule
lusted
after
,
are
departed
from
thee
;
and
all
things
which
were
fat
and
excellent
,
are
departed
from
thee
;
and
thou
shalt
find
them
no
more
.
15
The
marchants
of
these
things
which
were
waxed
rich
by
her
,
shall
stand
a
farre
of
from
her
,
fo
feare
of
her
torment
,
weeping
and
wayling
,
16
And
saying
,
Alas
,
alas
,
that
great
citie
,
that
was
clothed
in
fine
linnen
and
purple
,
and
skarlet
,
and
glittered
with
gold
,
and
precious
stone
,
&
pearles
!
That
in
one
houre
are
so
great
riches
come
to
desolation
.
17
[
11
](A16102-e13280-b)
11
The
maner
of
mourning
vsed
by
them
that
trade
by
sea
.
Also
euerie
shipmaster
,
and
all
the
people
that
occupie
ships
,
and
shipmen
,
and
whosoeuer
trafficke
on
the
sea
shall
stand
a
farre
off
;
18
And
cry
,
when
they
see
the
smoke
of
her
burning
,
saying
,
what
city
was
like
vnto
this
great
city
?
19
And
they
shall
cast
dust
on
their
heads
,
&
cry
weeping
,
and
wayling
,
and
say
;
Alas
,
alas
,
that
that
great
citie
,
wherein
were
made
rich
all
that
had
ships
on
the
sea
by
her
costlinesse
,
is
in
one
houre
made
desolate
.
20
[
12
](A16102-e13330-b)
12
The
other
consequent
vppon
the
ruine
of
Babylon
,
is
the
exultation
or
reioycing
of
the
godly
in
heauen
and
in
earth
,
as
was
noted
verse
,
9.
O
heauen
,
reioyce
ouer
her
,
and
ye
holy
Apostles
and
Prophets
;
because
God
hath
punished
her
,
to
be
reuenged
for
your
sakes
.
21
[
13
](A16102-e13350-b)
13
The
thirde
prediction
(
as
I
sayd
verse
1.
)
standing
of
a
signe
,
and
the
interpretation
thereof
;
the
interpretation
therof
is
in
2.
sorts
,
first
by
a
simple
propounding
of
the
thing
it self
,
in
this
verse
;
&
then
by
declaration
of
the
euents
,
in
the
verses
folowing
.
Then
a
mightie
Angell
tooke
vp
a
stone
like
a
great
milstone
,
[
‖
](A16102-e13360-b)
‖
Ier.
51.
63.
and
cast
it
into
the
sea
,
saying
,
So
shall
that
great
citie
Babylon
be
cast
with
violence
,
and
shall
be
found
no
more
.
22
[
14
](A16102-e13390-b)
14
The
euents
are
two
,
&
one
of
them
opposit
vnto
the
other
for
amplification
sake
;
There
shal
be
(
saith
he
)
in
Babylon
no
mirth
nor
ioy
at
all
,
in
this
and
the
next
verse
:
but
all
heauie
and
lamentable
things
,
from
the
bloudie
slaughters
of
the
righteous
,
&
the
vengeance
of
God
comming
vpon
it
for
the
same
.
And
the
voyce
of
harpers
,
&
musicians
,
&
of
pipers
,
&
trumpetters
shal
be
heard
no
more
in
thee
;
&
no
crafts-man
,
of
whatsoeuer
craft
he
be
,
shal
be
found
any
more
in
thee
:
and
the
sound
of
a
milstone
shall
be
heard
no
more
in
thee
.
23
And
the
light
of
a
candle
shall
shine
no
more
in
thee
and
the
voyce
of
the
bridegrome
&
of
the
bride
shal
be
heard
no
more
in
thee
:
for
thy
marchants
were
the
great
men
of
the
earth
:
and
with
thine
inchantments
were
deceiued
al
nations
.
24
And
in
her
was
found
the
[
15
](A16102-e13430-b)
15
That
is
,
shed
by
bloudie
massacres
,
and
calling
for
vengeance
.
bloud
of
the
Prophets
,
[
16
](A16102-e13440-b)
16
That
is
,
proued
and
found
out
,
as
if
God
had
appointed
a
iust
enquirie
concerning
the
impietie
,
vnnaturalnesse
,
and
vniustice
of
these
men
.
and
of
the
Saints
,
&
of
all
that
were
slaine
vpon
the
earth
.
CHAP.
XIX
.
1
The
heauenly
company
praise
God
,
for
auenging
the
bloud
of
his
seruants
,
on
the
whore
.
9
They
are
written
blessed
,
that
are
called
to
the
Lambes
supper
.
10
The
Angell
will
not
be
worshipped
.
11
That
mightie
King
of
kings
appeareth
from
heauen
.
19
The
battell
,
20
wherein
the
beast
is
taken
,
21
and
cast
into
the
burning
lake
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e13570-b)
1
This
chapter
hath
in
summe
two
partes
:
one
transitorie
or
of
passage
vnto
the
things
that
follow
,
vnto
the
tenth
verse
:
an
other
historical
of
the
victory
of
Christ
gotten
against
both
the
beasts
,
vnto
the
ende
of
the
chapter
:
which
I
sayd
was
the
second
historie
of
this
argument
chapter
17.
1.
The
transition
hath
two
places
;
one
of
praising
God
for
the
ouerthrowe
done
vnto
Babylon
in
foure
verses
:
and
another
likewise
of
praise
,
and
propheticall
,
for
the
comming
of
Christ
into
his
kingdome
,
and
his
most
royall
mariage
with
his
Church
,
thence
vnto
the
10.
vers
.
The
former
praise
hath
three
branches
,
distinguished
after
the
auncient
manner
of
those
that
sing
:
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
that
is
,
an
inuitation
or
prouokement
in
two
verses
:
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
a
response
or
answere
,
in
the
third
verse
:
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
a
close
or
ioyning
together
in
harmonie
:
all
which
I
thought
good
of
purpose
to
distinguish
in
this
place
,
least
any
man
should
with
Porphyrius
,
or
other
like
dogges
obiect
vnto
S.
Iohn
or
the
heauenly
Church
,
a
childish
and
idle
repetition
of
speach
.
AFter
these
things
I
heard
a
great
voice
of
a
great
multitude
in
heauen
,
saying
,
[
a
](A16102-e13610-b)
a
Praiseye
the
Lord
.
[
2
](A16102-e13620-b)
2
The
proposition
of
praise
with
exhortation
in
this
verse
,
and
the
cause
thereof
,
in
the
next
verse
.
Hallelu-iah
,
saluation
,
and
glorie
,
and
honour
,
and
2
For
true
and
righteous
are
his
iudgements
:
for
he
hath
condemned
that
great
whore
,
which
did
corrupt
the
earth
with
her
fornication
,
and
hath
auenged
the
bloud
of
his
seruaunts
at
her
hand
.
3
And
againe
they
said
,
[
3
](A16102-e13680-b)
3
The
song
of
the
Antiphonie
or
response
,
containing
an
amplification
of
the
praise
of
God
,
from
the
perpetuall
and
most
certaine
testimonie
of
his
diuine
iudgement
:
as
was
done
at
Sodome
and
Gomorrha
.
Genes
19.
Hallelu-iah
:
&
her
smoke
rose
vp
for
euermore
.
4
And
the
foure
and
twentie
Elders
,
and
the
foure
beasts
fel
downe
,
and
worshipped
God
that
sitteth
on
the
throne
,
saying
,
Amen
,
Hallelu-iah
.
5
[
4
](A16102-e13710-b)
4
The
second
place
of
praise
(
as
I
said
vers.
1.
)
which
first
is
commaunded
from
God
in
this
verse
:
and
then
is
in
most
ample
manner
pronounced
of
the
creatures
,
both
because
they
see
that
kingdome
of
Christ
,
to
come
,
which
most
they
desire
verse
.
6
,
also
because
they
see
that
the
Church
is
called
forth
to
be
brought
home
into
the
house
of
her
husband
by
holy
mariage
,
vnto
the
fellowship
of
his
kingdome
vers.
7.
8.
Wherefore
S.
Iohn
is
commaunded
to
write
into
a
booke
the
Epiphonema
,
or
acclamation
ioyned
with
a
diuine
testimonie
vers.
9.
Then
a
voyce
came
out
of
the
[
5
](A16102-e13720-b)
5
Out
of
the
Temple
from
God
.
as
11.
19.
throne
,
saying
,
Praise
our
God
,
all
ye
his
seruants
,
and
ye
that
feare
him
,
both
small
and
great
.
6
And
I
heard
[
6
](A16102-e13740-b)
6
Without
the
Temple
in
heauen
.
like
the
voice
of
a
great
multitude
,
and
as
the
voyce
of
many
waters
,
and
as
the
voice
of
strong
thundrings
,
saying
,
Hallelu-iah
:
for
the
Lord
that
almighty
God
doth
now
reigne
.
7
Let
vs
be
glad
and
reioyce
,
and
giue
glory
to
him
:
for
the
marriage
of
the
Lambe
is
come
,
and
his
wife
hath
[
7
](A16102-e13760-b)
7
Namely
,
vnto
that
holy
marriage
,
both
her selfe
in
person
in
this
verse
,
&
also
furnished
of
her
spouse
with
marriage
gifts
princely
&
diuine
,
is
adorned
and
prepared
,
in
the
next
verse
.
prepared
her selfe
.
8
And
to
her
is
granted
,
that
she
should
be
arayed
with
[
8
](A16102-e13780-b)
8
As
an
ensigne
of
kingly
and
priestly
dignitie
:
which
dignitie
Christ
bestoweth
vpon
vs
,
chap.
1.
6.
pure
fine
linnen
and
shining
;
for
the
fine
[
9
](A16102-e13790-b)
9
This
is
a
gift
giuen
by
the
husband
for
marriage
sake
,
and
a
most
choise
ornament
which
Christ
bestoweth
vpon
vs
as
vpon
his
spouse
.
linnen
is
the
[
b
](A16102-e13800-b)
b
Good
workes
which
are
liuely
testimonies
of
faith
.
righteousnes
of
the
Saints
.
9
[
10
](A16102-e13820-b)
10
Namely
the
Angell
,
as
appeareth
by
the
next
verse
.
Then
he
said
vnto
me
,
Write
,
[
‖
](A16102-e13830-b)
‖
Matth.
22.
2.
Blessed
are
they
which
are
called
vnto
the
supper
of
the
marriage
of
the
Lambe
.
And
he
said
vnto
me
,
These
words
of
God
are
true
.
10
[
11
](A16102-e13870-b)
11
The
particular
storie
of
this
verse
is
brought
in
by
occasion
,
and
as
it
were
besides
the
purpose
,
that
Saint
Iohn
might
make
a
publike
example
of
his
owne
infirmitie
,
and
of
the
modest
sanctimonie
of
the
Angell
,
who
both
renounced
for
him selfe
the
diuine
honors
,
and
recalled
all
the
seruants
of
God
,
vnto
the
worship
of
him
alone
:
as
also
22.
8.
And
I
fel
down
before
his
feet
,
[
‖
](A16102-e13880-b)
‖
Chap.
22.
2.
to
worship
him
:
but
he
said
vnto
me
,
See
thou
do
it
not
:
I
am
thy
fellow
seruant
,
&
of
thy
brethren
,
which
haue
the
[
c
](A16102-e13900-b)
c
Which
are
commanded
to
beare
witnesse
of
Iesus
.
testimonie
of
Iesus
.
Worship
God
:
for
the
testimonie
of
[
d
](A16102-e13910-b)
d
For
Iesus
is
the
marke
that
all
the
prophecies
shoote
at
.
Iesus
is
the
spirit
of
prophecie
.
[
12
](A16102-e13930-b)
12
The
second
place
of
this
Chapter
(
as
I
said
verse
1.
)
is
of
the
victorie
gotten
by
Christ
against
both
the
beasts
:
in
which
first
Christ
is
described
as
one
readie
to
sight
,
vnto
the
16.
verse
:
then
is
shewed
the
battell
to
be
begunne
,
thence
vnto
the
18.
verse
:
lastly
is
set
forth
the
victorie
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
In
this
place
do
shine
forth
most
excellent
properties
of
Christ
,
as
our
heauenly
iudge
and
reuenger
,
according
to
his
person
,
companie
,
effectes
and
names
After
I
saw
[
13
](A16102-e13940-b)
13
Properties
belonging
to
his
person
,
that
he
is
heauenly
,
iudge
,
faithfull
,
true
,
iust
,
in
this
verse
:
searching
out
all
things
,
ruling
ouer
all
,
to
be
searched
out
of
none
,
verse
12.
the
triumpher
,
and
the
verie
essentiall
word
of
God
,
verse
13.
heauen
open
,
&
behold
,
a
white
horse
,
&
he
that
sate
vpon
him
,
was
called
,
faithfull
and
true
,
and
he
that
iudgeth
and
fighteth
righteously
.
12
And
his
eyes
were
as
a
flame
of
fire
;
and
on
his
head
were
many
crownes
:
and
he
had
a
name
written
,
that
no
man
knew
but
him selfe
.
13
And
he
was
clothed
with
a
garment
dipt
in
blood
,
and
his
name
is
called
,
THE
WORD
OF
GOD
.
14
[
14
](A16102-e14000-b)
14
The
company
or
retinue
of
Christ
,
holy
,
innumerable
,
heauenly
,
iudiciall
,
royall
and
pure
.
And
the
hostes
which
were
in
heauen
,
followed
him
vpon
white
horses
,
clothed
with
fine
linnen
white
and
pure
.
15
[
15
](A16102-e14020-b)
15
The
effects
of
Christ
prepared
vnto
battel
,
that
with
his
mouth
he
striketh
the
Gentiles
,
ruleth
and
destroyeth
.
And
out
of
his
mouth
went
forth
a
sharp
sword
,
that
with
it
he
should
smite
the
heathen
:
for
he
shall
[
‖
](A16102-e14030-b)
‖
Psalm.
2.
9.
rule
them
with
a
rod
of
iron
:
and
,
he
it
is
that
shall
tread
the
wine
presse
of
the
fiercenesse
and
wrath
of
almightie
God
.
16
[
16
](A16102-e14060-b)
16
The
name
agreeing
vnto
Christ
according
to
the
former
properties
,
expressed
after
the
manner
of
the
Hebrewes
.
And
he
had
vpon
his
garment
,
and
vpon
his
thigh
a
name
written
,
[
‖
](A16102-e14070-b)
‖
Chap.
17.
14.
1
Tim.
6.
15.
THE
KING
OF
KINGS
,
AND
LORD
OF
LORDS
.
17
[
17
](A16102-e14110-b)
17
The
second
member
,
as
I
said
verse
11.
A
reprochfull
calling
forth
of
his
enimies
vnto
battaile
:
in
which
not
themselues
(
for
why
should
they
be
called
forth
of
the
king
of
the
world
,
or
prouoked
being
his
subiects
:
for
that
were
not
comly
)
but
in
their
hearing
,
the
birds
of
the
aire
are
called
to
eate
their
carkasses
.
Then
I
saw
a
certaine
Angel
stand
in
the
[
18
](A16102-e14120-b)
18
That
is
openly
&
in
sight
of
all
:
as
Num.
25.
4.
and
2
Sam.
12.
11.
sunne
,
who
cryed
with
a
loud
voyce
,
saying
to
all
the
soules
that
did
flie
through
[
19
](A16102-e14130-b)
19
That
is
,
through
this
inferior
heauen
,
&
which
is
nearer
vnto
vs
:
an
Hebrew
phrase
.
the
midst
of
heauen
,
Come
,
and
gather
your selues
together
vnto
the
supper
of
the
great
God
,
18
That
ye
may
eate
the
flesh
of
kings
,
and
the
flesh
of
hie
Captaines
,
and
the
flesh
of
mightie
men
,
and
the
flesh
of
horses
,
and
of
them
that
sit
on
them
,
and
the
flesh
of
all
freemen
,
&
bondmen
,
and
of
small
and
great
.
19
[
20
](A16102-e14160-b)
20
The
third
member
(
as
was
said
vers.
11.
)
of
the
victorie
obtained
by
Christ
.
Vnto
this
appertaineth
two
things
,
his
buckling
with
the
beast
,
and
his
forces
,
in
this
verse
:
and
the
euent
most
magnificent
,
described
after
the
manner
of
men
in
the
verses
following
.
All
these
things
are
plaine
.
After
I
saw
the
beast
,
&
the
Kings
of
the
the
earth
,
and
their
hostes
gathered
together
to
make
battell
against
him
that
sate
on
the
horse
,
and
against
his
armie
.
20
And
the
beast
[
21
](A16102-e14180-b)
21
Namely
that
beast
with
seuen
heads
,
of
which
before
,
chap.
13.
1.
and
17
3.
was
taken
,
and
with
him
that
[
22
](A16102-e14190-b)
22
That
is
,
that
beast
with
two
heads
,
of
which
13.
11
Looke
more
ch.
16.
14.
false
prophet
that
wrought
miracles
before
him
,
whereby
he
deceiued
them
that
receiued
the
beasts
marke
,
and
them
that
worshipped
his
image
:
These
both
were
cast
aliue
into
a
lake
of
fire
,
burning
with
brimstone
.
21
And
the
remnant
were
slaine
with
the
sword
of
him
that
sate
vpon
the
horse
,
which
commeth
out
of
his
mouth
;
&
all
the
foules
were
filled
with
their
flesh
.
CHAP.
XX.
1
The
Angell
2
bindeth
Satan
for
a
thousand
yeares
:
8
Being
loosed
,
he
stirreth
vp
Gog
and
Magog
,
that
is
,
priuie
and
open
enemies
,
against
the
Saints
,
11
but
the
vengeance
of
the
Lord
cutteth
off
their
insolencie
.
12
The
bookes
are
opened
,
by
which
the
dead
are
iudged
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e14310-b)
1
Now
followeth
the
3.
place
,
of
the
propheticall
historie
,
which
is
,
of
the
victorie
wherby
Christ
ouercame
the
dragon
,
as
I
noted
chap.
17.
1.
This
place
must
necessarily
be
ioyned
with
the
end
of
the
12.
chapter
,
and
be
applied
vnto
the
iust
vnderstanding
thereof
.
This
chapter
hath
2.
parts
:
one
of
the
dragon
ouercome
,
vnto
the
10.
verse
:
the
other
of
the
resurrection
and
last
iudgement
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
The
storie
of
the
dragon
is
double
.
First
of
the
first
victorie
,
after
which
he
was
bound
by
Christ
:
vnto
the
6.
verse
.
The
second
is
of
the
last
victorie
,
whereby
he
was
throwne
downe
into
euerlasting
punishment
,
thence
vnto
the
10.
vers.
This
first
historie
happened
in
the
first
time
of
the
Christian
Church
,
when
the
dragon
throwne
downe
from
heauen
by
Christ
,
went
about
to
molest
the
newe
birth
of
the
Church
in
the
earth
.
chap.
12.
17.
18.
For
which
cause
I
gaue
warning
that
this
storie
of
the
dragon
,
must
be
annexed
vnto
that
place
.
[
2
](A16102-e14330-b)
2
That
is
,
of
hell
,
whither
God
threw
downe
the
Angels
which
had
sinned
,
and
bound
them
in
chaines
of
darkenesse
to
be
kept
vnto
damnation
.
2.
Pet.
2.
4.
Iud.
6.
of
the
bottomlesse
pit
,
and
a
great
chaine
in
his
hand
.
2
And
he
tooke
the
dragon
that
old
serpent
,
which
is
the
deuill
and
Satan
,
and
he
bound
him
for
[
3
](A16102-e14350-b)
3
The
first
wher
of
(
continuing
this
history
with
the
end
of
the
12.
chap.
)
is
the
36.
yere
from
the
passion
of
Christ
,
when
the
church
of
the
Iews
being
ouerthrown
Satan
assayed
to
inuade
the
Christian
Church
gathered
of
the
Gentiles
,
and
to
destroy
part
of
her
seede
chap.
12.
17.
The
thousandth
yeare
falleth
precisely
vpon
the
times
of
that
wicked
Hildebrand
,
who
was
called
Gregorie
the
seuenth
,
a
most
damnable
Nicromancer
and
sorcerer
,
whom
Sathan
vsed
as
an
instrument
,
when
he
was
losed
out
of
bonds
,
thence
forth
to
annoye
the
Saincts
of
God
with
most
cruell
persecutions
,
and
the
whole
world
with
dissentions
,
and
most
bloudie
warres
:
as
Benno
the
Cardinall
reporteth
at
large
.
And
this
is
the
first
victorie
gotten
ouer
the
dragon
in
the
earth
.
a
thousand
yeares
.
3
And
he
cast
him
into
the
bottomlesse
pit
,
which
he
shut
vp
,
and
sealed
vpon
him
,
that
he
might
deceiue
the
people
[
4
](A16102-e14370-b)
4
Namely
with
that
publique
and
violent
deceipt
which
he
attempted
before
.
chap.
12.
and
which
after
a
thousand
yeares
(
alacke
for
woe
)
he
most
mightilie
procured
in
the
Christian
world
.
no
more
,
til
the
thousand
yeares
were
fulfilled
:
for
after
that
he
must
be
loosed
for
[
5
](A16102-e14380-b)
5
Which
being
once
expired
,
the
second
battaile
and
victorie
shall
be
;
of
which
verse
.
7.
8.
a
litle
season
.
4
[
6
](A16102-e14400-b)
6
A
description
of
the
common
state
of
the
Church
of
Christ
in
earth
,
in
that
space
of
a
thousand
yeares
,
for
which
the
deuill
was
in
bonds
:
in
which
,
first
the
authoritie
,
life
,
and
common
honour
of
the
godlie
is
declared
,
vers.
4.
secondlie
newnesse
of
life
is
preached
vnto
others
by
the
Gospell
,
after
that
space
vers
5
finallie
he
concludeth
with
promises
.
vers.
6.
Then
I
saw
[
a
](A16102-e14410-b)
a
For
iudgement
was
committed
to
them
,
as
to
members
ioyned
to
the
head
:
not
that
Christ
,
office
was
giuen
ouer
to
them
[
7
](A16102-e14420-b)
7
This
was
a
type
of
the
authoritie
of
the
good
and
faithfull
seruants
of
God
in
the
Church
:
taken
from
the
manner
of
men
.
thrones
:
and
they
sate
vpon
them
,
and
iudgement
was
giuen
vnto
them
;
and
I
saw
the
soules
of
them
that
were
[
8
](A16102-e14440-b)
8
Of
the
Martyrs
,
which
suffered
in
those
first
times
.
beheaded
for
the
witnesse
of
Iesus
,
and
for
the
word
of
God
,
and
which
did
[
9
](A16102-e14450-b)
9
Of
the
Martyrs
which
suffered
after
that
both
the
beasts
were
now
risen
vp
.
chap.
13.
for
there
these
things
are
expounded
.
not
worship
the
beast
,
neither
his
image
,
neither
had
taken
his
marke
vpon
their
foreheads
,
or
on
their
hands
:
and
they
shall
liue
,
and
raigne
with
Christ
a
thousand
yeare
.
5
[
10
](A16102-e14470-b)
10
Whosoeuer
shall
lye
dead
in
sinne
,
and
not
know
the
truth
of
God
.
But
the
rest
of
the
dead
men
[
11
](A16102-e14480-b)
11
They
shall
not
be
renewed
with
that
newnesse
of
life
by
the
inlightning
of
the
Gospell
of
the
glorie
of
Christ
.
For
this
is
the
first
resurrection
,
by
which
the
soules
of
the
godlie
do
rise
from
their
death
.
In
the
second
resurrection
their
bodies
shall
rise
againe
.
shall
not
liue
againe
,
vntil
the
thousand
yeares
be
finished
:
this
is
the
first
resurrection
.
6
Blessed
and
holy
is
he
,
that
hath
part
in
the
first
resurrection
:
for
on
such
the
[
12
](A16102-e14510-b)
12
That
wherby
both
bodie
and
soule
,
that
is
,
the
whole
man
is
addicted
and
deliuered
vnto
eternall
death
.
So
chap.
2.
11.
second
death
hath
no
power
:
but
they
shall
be
the
Priestes
of
God
and
of
Christ
,
[
13
](A16102-e14520-b)
13
A
returne
vnto
the
intended
historie
by
resuming
the
words
which
are
in
the
end
of
the
4.
verse
.
and
shall
raigne
with
him
a
thousand
yeare
.
7
[
14
](A16102-e14540-b)
14
The
second
historie
,
of
the
latter
victorie
of
Christ
,
as
was
said
vers.
1.
in
which
are
summarily
described
the
worke
,
ouerthrow
,
and
eternall
punishment
of
Sathan
.
And
when
the
[
15
](A16102-e14550-b)
15
Of
which
I
spake
verse
2.
Then
therefore
shall
be
giuen
vnto
him
libertie
to
rage
against
the
Church
,
and
to
molest
the
Saints
for
the
sinnes
of
men
;
vnto
whom
the
faithfull
shall
haue
associated
them selues
more
then
was
meete
,
tasting
with
them
of
their
impuritie
of
doctrine
and
of
life
.
thousand
yeares
are
expired
,
Satan
shal
be
loosed
out
of
his
prison
,
8
[
16
](A16102-e14570-b)
16
The
worke
or
act
of
Sathan
(
which
is
the
first
member
as
I
distinguished
in
the
verse
before
going
)
to
deceiue
the
whole
world
,
euen
vnto
the
vttermost
nations
thereof
:
to
arme
them
against
the
people
of
God
,
in
this
verse
,
and
to
besiege
and
oppresse
the
Church
,
with
his
whole
strength
,
in
the
verse
following
.
And
shall
go
out
to
deceiue
the
people
,
which
are
in
the
foure
quarters
of
the
earth
:
euen
[
‖
](A16102-e14590-b)
‖
Ezek.
39.
2.
Gog
&
Magog
,
to
gather
them
together
to
battell
,
whose
number
is
,
as
the
sand
of
the
sea
.
9
They
went
vp
therefore
into
the
[
b
](A16102-e14630-b)
b
As
if
he
said
,
insomuch
that
the
whole
face
of
the
earth
,
how
great
soeuer
it
is
,
was
filled
.
plaine
of
the
earth
,
and
they
compassed
the
tents
of
the
Saints
about
,
&
the
beloued
citie
:
but
[
17
](A16102-e14640-b)
17
The
wrath
of
God
,
consuming
the
aduersaries
,
and
ouerthrowing
all
their
enterprises
,
Heb.
10.
27.
And
this
is
the
second
member
,
mentioned
vers.
7.
the
ouerthrow
of
Sathan
.
fire
came
down
from
God
out
of
heauen
,
&
deuoured
them
.
10
[
18
](A16102-e14660-b)
18
The
third
member
is
,
eternall
destruction
against
those
that
are
ouercome
:
as
I
noted
in
the
same
place
.
And
the
diuel
that
deceiued
them
,
was
cast
into
a
lake
of
fire
&
brimstone
,
where
that
beast
and
that
false
prophet
was
;
and
they
shal
be
tormented
day
and
night
for
euermore
.
11
[
19
](A16102-e14690-b)
19
The
second
part
of
this
Chapter
,
in
which
is
described
the
iudge
,
in
this
verse
,
and
the
last
iudgement
in
the
verses
following
.
Then
I
saw
a
great
[
20
](A16102-e14700-b)
20
That
is
,
a
tribunall
seate
most
princelike
and
glorious
:
for
so
doth
the
Greeke
word
also
signifie
.
white
throne
,
and
[
21
](A16102-e14710-b)
21
That
is
,
Christ
,
before
whom
when
he
commeth
vnto
iudgement
,
heauen
and
earth
shall
perish
for
the
greatnesse
of
his
maiestie
,
2.
Pet.
3.
7.
10.
&c.
one
that
sate
on
it
,
from
whose
face
fled
away
both
the
earth
and
heauen
,
and
their
place
was
no
more
found
.
12
And
I
saw
the
dead
,
both
great
and
small
stand
before
[
22
](A16102-e14730-b)
22
That
is
,
Christ
the
iudge
.
2.
Cor.
5.
10.
God
:
and
the
[
23
](A16102-e14740-b)
23
As
it
were
our
bookes
of
reckening
or
accompts
:
that
is
,
the
testimonie
of
our
conscience
,
and
of
our
workes
,
which
by
no
meanes
can
be
auoyded
.
This
is
spoken
after
the
maner
of
men
.
bookes
were
opened
;
and
[
‖
](A16102-e14750-b)
‖
Chap.
3.
5.
and
21.
27.
Philip.
4.
3.
another
booke
was
opened
,
which
is
the
booke
[
24
](A16102-e14800-b)
24
The
booke
of
the
eternall
decree
of
God
,
in
which
God
the
Father
hath
elected
in
Christ
according
to
the
good
pleasure
of
his
will
,
those
that
shall
be
heires
of
life
.
This
also
is
spoken
according
to
the
maner
of
men
.
of
life
;
and
the
dead
were
iudged
by
those
things
,
which
were
written
in
the
bookes
,
according
to
their
workes
.
13
[
25
](A16102-e14820-b)
25
This
is
a
preuention
or
an
answere
vnto
an
obiection
:
for
happily
some
man
will
say
,
but
they
are
dead
,
whom
the
sea
,
death
,
and
the
graue
hath
consumed
:
how
shall
they
appeare
before
the
iudge
?
Saint
Iohn
answereth
,
by
resurrection
from
death
,
whereunto
all
things
(
howsoeuer
repugnant
)
shall
minister
and
serue
at
the
commandement
of
God
,
as
Dan.
12.
And
the
sea
gaue
vp
the
dead
,
which
were
in
her
;
and
death
and
hell
deliuered
vp
the
dead
,
which
were
in
them
:
and
they
were
iudged
euerie
man
according
to
their
workes
.
14
[
26
](A16102-e14840-b)
26
The
last
enimie
which
is
death
shal
be
abolished
by
Christ
(
that
he
may
no
more
make
any
attempt
against
vs
)
1.
Cor.
15.
26.
and
death
shall
feed
vpon
the
reprobate
in
hell
for
euermore
;
according
to
the
righteous
iudgement
of
God
,
in
the
next
verse
.
And
death
&
hell
were
cast
into
the
lake
of
fire
:
which
is
the
second
death
.
15
And
whosoeuer
was
not
found
written
in
the
booke
of
life
,
was
cast
into
the
lake
of
fire
.
CHAP.
XXI
.
2
He
describeth
new
Hierusalem
descending
from
heauen
.
9
The
bride
the
Lambes
wife
,
12
and
the
glorious
building
of
the
citie
,
19
garnished
with
precious
stones
:
22
whose
temple
the
Lambe
is
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e14960-b)
1
Now
followeth
the
second
part
of
the
historie
propheticall
,
(
as
I
said
chap.
1.
&
11.
1.
)
Of
the
future
estate
of
the
church
in
heauen
after
the
last
iudgement
,
vnto
the
5.
verse
of
the
next
chapter
.
In
this
are
two
thinges
briefly
declared
:
The
station
,
seate
,
or
place
thereof
verse
.
1.
Then
her
state
and
condition
,
in
the
verses
following
.
Before
the
state
of
the
church
describe
〈◊〉
set
downe
the
state
of
the
whole
world
:
that
there
shal
be
a
new
heauen
and
a
new
earth
,
as
Esay
65.
17.
and
66.
12.
and
2.
Pet.
3.
19.
and
this
is
the
seate
or
place
of
the
church
,
in
which
righteousnes
shall
dwell
.
[
‖
](A16102-e14980-b)
‖
Esay
65.
17.
and
66.
22.
a
new
heauen
,
&
a
new
earth
:
for
the
[
‖
](A16102-e15010-b)
‖
2.
Pet.
3.
13.
first
heauen
,
&
the
first
errth
were
passed
away
;
and
the
sea
was
no
more
.
2
[
2
](A16102-e15040-b)
2
The
state
of
this
glorious
Church
,
is
first
described
generally
vnto
the
8.
verse
,
and
then
specially
and
by
partes
,
in
the
verses
following
.
The
generall
description
consisteth
in
a
vision
shewed
a
farre
of
,
verse
2.
and
in
speach
spoken
from
heauen
.
In
the
generall
these
things
are
common
;
that
the
church
is
holy
,
new
,
the
workmanship
of
God
,
heauenly
,
most
glorious
,
the
spouse
of
Christ
,
and
partaker
of
his
glorie
,
in
this
verse
.
And
I
Iohn
saw
that
holy
citie
the
new
Ierusalem
come
downe
from
God
out
of
heauen
,
prepared
as
a
bride
trimmed
for
her
husband
.
3
[
3
](A16102-e15060-b)
3
The
church
is
described
by
speach
first
of
an
Angell
in
two
verses
,
then
of
God
himselfe
,
in
foure
verses
.
The
Angels
speach
describeth
the
glorie
of
the
church
by
the
most
familiar
cohabitation
of
God
therewith
,
by
communication
of
all
manner
good
things
according
to
the
couenant
,
in
this
verse
:
and
by
remouing
or
putting
farre
away
of
all
euill
things
,
in
the
verse
following
.
And
I
heard
a
great
voyce
out
of
heauen
,
saying
,
Behold
,
the
Tabernacle
of
God
is
with
men
,
and
he
will
dwell
with
men
:
and
they
shall
be
his
people
,
and
God
himself
shall
be
with
them
,
their
God
.
4
[
‖
](A16102-e15090-b)
‖
Chap.
7.
17.
Esay
.
25.
8.
And
God
shall
wipe
all
teares
from
their
eyes
:
and
there
shal
be
no
more
death
,
neither
sorow
,
neither
crying
;
neither
shall
there
be
anie
more
paine
:
because
the
first
things
are
passed
.
5
[
4
](A16102-e15130-b)
4
In
the
speach
of
God
himselfe
describing
the
church
,
is
first
a
certaine
exordium
or
entrance
,
verse
5.
Then
followeth
a
magnificent
description
of
the
church
,
by
the
present
and
future
good
things
of
the
same
,
in
three
verses
following
.
In
the
exordium
God
chalengeth
vnto
himself
the
restoring
of
all
the
creatures
,
of
which
verse
1.
and
witnesseth
the
calling
of
Saint
Iohn
vnto
the
writing
of
these
things
,
in
this
verse
.
And
he
that
sate
vpon
the
throne
,
said
,
[
‖
](A16102-e15140-b)
‖
Esay
.
43.
19.
2.
Cor.
5.
17.
Behold
,
I
make
all
things
new
:
and
he
said
vnto
me
,
Write
:
for
these
wordes
are
faithfull
and
true
.
6
And
he
sayd
vnto
me
,
¶
[
5
](A16102-e15180-b)
5
The
description
of
the
Church
is
of
three
sorts
;
by
abolishing
of
old
things
:
by
the
being
of
present
things
in
God
,
that
is
,
of
things
eternall
:
and
by
the
communication
of
all
good
thinges
with
the
godly
,
verse
6.
If
so
be
they
shal
striue
manfully
,
vers.
7.
But
the
reprobate
are
excluded
from
thence
,
verse
8.
they
were
;
I
am
Alpha
and
Omega
,
the
beginning
and
the
end
.
I
7
He
that
ouercommeth
,
shall
inherite
all
things
,
and
I
will
be
his
God
,
and
he
shall
be
my
sonne
.
8
But
the
fearefull
and
vnbeleeuing
,
and
the
abominable
,
and
murtherers
,
and
whoremongers
,
and
sorcerers
,
and
idolaters
,
and
all
liars
shall
haue
their
[
a
](A16102-e15240-b)
a
Their
lot
,
and
inheritance
as
it
were
.
part
in
the
lake
,
which
burneth
with
fire
&
brimstone
,
which
is
the
second
death
.
9
[
6
](A16102-e15260-b)
6
A
transition
vnto
the
particular
describing
of
the
heauenly
church
:
by
the
expresse
calling
of
Saint
Iohn
in
this
verse
,
and
his
rapting
vp
by
the
Spirite
,
in
confirmation
of
the
truth
of
God
,
in
the
verse
following
.
Then
there
came
vnto
me
one
of
the
seuen
Angels
,
which
had
the
seuen
vials
full
of
the
seuen
last
plagues
;
and
he
talked
with
me
saying
,
Come
:
I
will
shew
thee
the
bride
,
the
Lambs
wife
.
10
And
he
caried
me
away
in
the
spirite
to
a
great
and
[
7
](A16102-e15280-b)
7
He
meaneth
the
place
and
stately
seate
of
the
church
,
shadowed
out
in
a
mountaine
.
and
high
mountaine
,
and
shewed
me
[
8
](A16102-e15290-b)
8
A
type
of
that
church
which
is
one
,
ample
or
catholike
,
holy
,
celestiall
,
built
of
God
,
in
this
verse
:
and
glorious
,
in
the
verse
following
.
This
type
propounded
generally
,
is
after
particularly
declared
verse
12.
&c.
that
great
citie
,
that
holy
Ierusalem
,
descending
out
of
heauen
from
God
;
11
Hauing
the
glorie
of
God
:
and
her
shining
was
like
vnto
a
stone
most
precious
,
as
a
Iasper
stone
,
that
is
cleare
as
crystall
,
12
[
9
](A16102-e15320-b)
9
A
particular
description
(
as
I
noted
verse
2.
)
of
the
celestiall
church
:
first
by
the
essentiall
partes
of
the
same
)
vnder
the
similitude
of
a
cittie
,
vnto
verse
22.
Secondly
by
forraine
accidents
,
vnto
the
end
of
the
chapter
.
Thirdly
by
the
effectes
in
the
beginning
of
the
next
chapter
.
the
essentiall
parts
,
are
noted
the
matter
and
the
forme
in
the
whole
worke
;
of
these
the
superficies
and
foundation
of
the
wall
are
intire
partes
(
as
they
vse
to
be
called
:
)
which
parts
are
first
described
in
figure
,
vnto
the
fourteenth
verse
,
and
afterwards
more
exactly
.
And
it
had
a
great
wall
and
high
,
and
had
[
10
](A16102-e15330-b)
10
According
to
the
number
of
the
tribes
,
of
which
chapter
7.
For
here
the
outward
part
is
attributed
vnto
the
old
testament
,
and
the
foundation
vnto
the
new
testament
.
twelue
gates
,
and
at
the
gates
[
11
](A16102-e15340-b)
11
He
meaneth
the
Prophets
,
who
are
the
messengers
of
God
,
&
watchmen
of
the
Church
.
twelue
Angels
,
and
names
written
,
which
are
the
names
of
the
twelue
tribes
of
the
children
of
Israell
.
13
On
the
East
part
there
were
three
gates
,
and
on
the
North
side
three
gates
;
on
the
South
side
three
gates
,
and
on
the
West
side
three
gates
.
14
And
the
wall
of
the
citie
had
[
12
](A16102-e15400-b)
12
That
is
,
foundation
stones
,
according
to
the
number
of
the
gates
,
as
is
shewed
verse
19.
twelue
foundations
;
and
in
them
the
Names
of
the
twelue
Apostles
of
the
Lambe
.
15
[
13
](A16102-e15420-b)
13
A
transition
vnto
a
more
exquisite
description
of
the
parts
of
the
church
,
by
finding
out
the
measure
of
the
same
,
by
the
Angel
that
measured
them
.
Also
he
that
talked
with
me
,
had
a
golden
reede
,
to
measure
the
citie
withall
,
and
the
gates
thereof
,
and
the
wall
thereof
.
16
[
14
](A16102-e15440-b)
14
The
measure
and
forme
most
equall
:
in
two
verses
.
And
the
citie
lay
[
b
](A16102-e15450-b)
b
A
foure
squared
figure
hath
equall
sides
,
and
oueright
corners
,
and
therefore
the
Graecians
call
by
this
name
those
things
that
are
steadie
,
and
of
continuance
,
and
perfect
.
foure
square
,
and
the
length
is
as
large
as
the
bredth
of
it
;
and
he
measured
the
citie
with
the
reede
,
vnto
twelue
thousand
furlongs
:
and
the
length
,
and
the
bredth
,
and
the
height
of
it
are
equall
.
17
And
he
measured
the
wall
thereof
,
an
[
c
](A16102-e15470-b)
c
Which
number
is
twelue
multiplied
by
twelue
.
hundreth
fortie
and
foure
cubites
,
by
the
measure
of
a
man
,
that
is
,
of
the
[
d
](A16102-e15480-b)
d
He
addeth
this
,
because
the
Angell
had
the
shape
of
a
man
.
Angell
.
18
[
15
](A16102-e15500-b)
15
The
matter
most
pretious
and
glittering
,
which
the
presence
of
God
maketh
most
glorious
.
And
the
building
of
the
wal
of
it
was
of
Iasper
:
and
the
citie
was
pure
gold
,
like
vnto
cleare
glasse
.
19
And
the
foundations
of
the
wall
of
the
citie
were
garnished
with
all
maner
of
precious
stones
:
the
first
foundation
was
Iasper
:
the
second
of
Saphire
:
the
third
of
a
Chalcedonie
:
the
fourth
of
an
Emeraude
:
20
The
fift
of
a
Sardonix
:
the
sixt
of
a
Sardius
,
the
seuenth
of
a
Chrysolite
:
the
eight
of
a
Beryl
:
the
ninth
of
a
Topaze
:
the
tenth
of
a
Chrysoprasus
:
the
eleuenth
of
a
Iacynth
:
the
twelfth
of
an
Amethyst
.
21
And
the
twelue
gates
were
twelue
margarites
,
and
euerie
gate
is
of
one
margarite
,
and
the
[
e
](A16102-e15580-b)
e
By
streete
,
he
meaneth
the
brodest
place
of
the
citie
.
streete
of
the
citie
is
pure
gold
,
as
the
shining
glasse
.
22
And
I
saw
no
temple
therein
:
for
the
Lord
God
almightie
&
the
Lamb
are
the
Temple
of
it
.
23
[
16
](A16102-e15620-b)
16
The
second
forme
of
particular
description
(
as
I
said
v.
12.
)
from
forrein
&
outward
accidents
:
which
are
these
,
Light
from
God
himselfe
,
in
this
ver.
glorie
from
men
,
verse
24.
perfect
securitie
from
all
harme
,
verse
25.
Finally
such
truth
and
incorruption
of
glorie
(
verse
26.
)
as
can
beare
and
abide
with
it
,
nothing
that
is
inglorious
,
verse
the
last
.
[
‖
](A16102-e15630-b)
‖
Esa.
60.
19.
And
this
citie
hath
no
need
of
the
sunne
,
neither
of
the
moone
to
shine
in
it
:
for
the
glorie
of
God
did
light
it
:
and
the
Lambe
is
the
light
of
it
.
24
[
‖
](A16102-e15660-b)
‖
Esa.
60.
3.
And
the
people
which
are
saued
,
shall
walke
in
the
light
of
it
:
and
the
Kings
of
the
earth
shall
bring
their
glorie
and
honor
vnto
it
.
25
[
‖
](A16102-e15690-b)
‖
Esa.
60.
11.
And
the
gates
of
it
shall
not
be
shut
by
day
:
for
there
shall
be
no
night
there
.
26
And
the
glorie
,
and
honor
of
the
Gentiles
shall
be
brought
vnto
it
.
27
And
there
shall
enter
into
it
nothing
that
infecteth
,
neither
whatsoeuer
worketh
abomination
,
or
speaketh
lyes
:
but
they
onely
which
are
written
in
the
Lambes
[
‖
](A16102-e15730-b)
‖
Esa.
3.
5.
and
20.
12.
Phil.
4.
3.
booke
of
life
.
CHAP.
XXII
.
1
The
riuer
of
water
of
life
is
shewed
,
2
and
the
tree
of
life
.
6.
7.
Then
followeth
the
conclusion
of
this
prophecie
,
8
where
Iohn
declareth
,
that
the
things
herin
contained
are
most
true
:
13
And
now
the
third
time
repeateth
these
words
,
All
things
come
from
him
,
who
is
the
beginning
and
the
end
.
1
[
1
](A16102-e15880-b)
1
Here
is
absolued
and
finished
the
description
of
the
ecclestiall
Church
(
as
I
shewed
before
,
chapter
21.
12.
)
by
the
effects
in
fiue
verses
,
and
then
this
booke
is
concluded
,
in
the
rest
of
the
chapter
.
The
effects
proceeding
from
God
who
dwelleth
in
the
Church
,
are
these
:
the
euerlasting
grace
of
God
,
in
this
verse
;
the
eternall
liuing
of
the
godly
,
as
chap.
2.
7.
the
eternall
frutes
which
the
godly
bring
foorth
vnto
God
,
them selues
,
and
others
,
verse
2.
freedome
and
immunitie
from
all
euill
,
God
him selfe
taking
pleasure
in
his
seruaunts
,
and
they
likewise
in
their
God
,
verse
3.
The
beholding
and
sight
of
God
:
and
sealing
of
the
faithfull
for
all
eternitie
,
verse
4.
the
light
of
God
,
and
an
euerlasting
kingdome
and
glorie
,
verse
5.
AFter
he
shewed
me
a
pure
riuer
of
liuing
water
,
cleare
as
cristall
,
proceeding
out
of
the
throne
of
God
,
and
of
the
Lambe
.
2
And
in
the
midst
of
the
open
place
thereof
,
and
on
either
side
of
the
riuer
,
was
the
tree
of
life
,
bearing
twelue
manner
of
fruites
;
and
bringing
forth
fruite
euerie
moneth
,
and
leaues
to
heale
the
nations
with
.
3
And
there
shal
be
no
more
any
cursed
thing
;
but
the
throne
of
God
and
of
the
Lambe
shall
be
in
it
;
and
his
seruants
shall
serue
him
:
4
And
they
shall
see
his
face
;
and
his
Name
shal
be
in
their
foreheads
.
5
[
‖
](A16102-e15930-b)
‖
Esa.
60.
19.
And
there
shal
be
no
night
there
,
and
they
need
no
candle
,
neither
light
of
the
sunne
:
for
the
Lord
God
giueth
them
light
;
and
they
shall
reigne
for
euermore
.
6
[
2
](A16102-e15960-b)
2
This
whole
booke
is
concluded
&
made
vp
,
by
a
confirmation
,
and
a
salutation
.
The
confirmation
hath
3
places
;
The
words
of
the
Angell
vnto
the
15.
verse
;
the
wordes
of
Christ
verse
16.
17
and
the
obtestation
made
by
Saint
Iohn
from
druine
authoritie
,
thence
vnto
the
twentith
verse
.
By
the
speach
of
the
Angell
this
prophecy
is
confirmed
,
vnto
the
eight
verse
:
and
then
he
speaketh
of
the
vse
of
this
booke
,
in
the
verses
following
.
The
prophecie
is
first
confirmed
by
the
Angell
from
the
nature
thereof
,
that
it
is
faithfull
and
true
:
Secondly
from
the
nature
of
the
efficient
cause
,
both
principall
which
is
God
,
and
instrumentall
,
which
is
the
Angel
in
this
verse
.
Thirdly
,
from
the
promises
of
God
concerning
his
comming
to
effect
al
these
things
,
and
concerning
our
saluation
,
verse
7.
Fourthly
from
the
testification
of
Saint
Iohn
himselfe
,
verse
8.
The
rest
of
the
speach
of
the
Angel
tending
to
the
same
end
,
Saint
Iohn
interrupted
or
brake
off
,
by
his
vnaduised
act
of
worshiping
him
,
in
the
same
verse
:
which
the
Angel
forbidding
,
teacheth
him
that
adoration
must
be
giuen
not
to
him
,
but
onely
to
God
:
〈◊〉
for
himselfe
,
that
he
is
of
such
nature
and
office
,
as
he
may
not
be
adored
:
which
thing
also
was
in
like
manner
done
chap.
19.
10.
And
he
said
vnto
me
,
These
words
are
faithfull
and
true
:
and
the
Lord
that
God
of
the
holy
Prophets
hath
sent
his
Angell
to
shew
vnto
his
seruants
the
things
which
must
shortly
be
fulfilled
.
7
Behold
,
I
come
shortly
.
Blessed
is
he
that
obserueth
the
wordes
of
the
prophecie
of
this
booke
.
8
And
I
Iohn
am
he
which
sawe
and
heard
these
things
:
and
when
I
had
heard
and
seene
,
[
‖
](A16102-e16000-b)
‖
Chap.
19.
10.
I
fell
downe
to
worship
before
the
feete
of
the
Angell
which
shewed
me
these
things
.
9
But
he
sayd
vnto
me
,
See
thou
do
it
not
:
for
I
am
thy
fellow
seruant
and
of
thy
brethren
the
Prophets
,
&
of
them
which
obserue
the
words
of
this
booke
:
worship
thou
God
.
10
[
3
](A16102-e16050-b)
3
The
Angell
returneth
vnto
his
former
speech
:
in
which
he
teacheth
the
vse
of
this
book
both
towardes
our selues
in
this
&
the
next
verse
:
and
in
respect
of
God
for
declarations
of
his
truth
,
thece
vnto
the
fifteenth
verse
.
Moreouer
he
said
vnto
me
,
[
4
](A16102-e16060-b)
4
That
is
,
propound
this
prophecie
openly
vnto
all
,
&
concoale
no
part
of
it
The
contrary
whereunto
is
commaunded
Esa.
8.
16.
and
Dan.
8.
26.
Seale
not
vp
the
words
of
the
prophecie
of
this
booke
:
for
the
time
is
at
hand
.
11
[
5
](A16102-e16080-b)
5
An
obiection
preuented
.
But
there
will
be
some
that
will
abuse
this
occasion
vnto
euill
,
and
will
wrest
this
scripture
vnto
their
owne
destruction
,
as
Peter
saith
.
What
then
?
saith
the
Angell
,
the
mysteries
of
God
must
not
therefore
be
concealed
,
which
it
hath
pleased
him
to
communicate
vnto
vs
.
Let
them
be
hurtfull
vnto
others
,
let
such
be
more
and
more
vile
in
them selues
,
whome
this
scripture
doth
not
please
:
yet
others
shall
be
further
conformed
thereby
vnto
righteousnesse
and
true
holinesse
.
The
care
and
information
of
these
may
not
be
neglected
,
because
of
the
voluntarie
and
malicious
offence
of
others
.
He
that
doth
hurt
,
let
him
do
hurt
stil
:
and
he
which
is
filthie
,
let
him
be
filthie
still
:
and
he
that
is
righteous
,
let
him
be
righteous
still
:
and
he
that
is
holy
,
let
him
be
holy
still
.
12
[
6
](A16102-e16100-b)
6
The
second
place
belonging
vnto
the
vse
of
this
booke
,
as
I
sayde
verse
10.
Also
(
sayth
God
by
the
Angell
)
though
there
should
be
no
vse
of
this
booke
vnto
men
:
yet
it
shall
be
of
this
vse
vnto
me
,
that
it
is
a
witnesse
of
my
trueth
,
vnto
my
glorie
;
who
will
come
shortly
to
giue
and
execute
iust
iudgement
,
in
this
verse
;
who
haue
taught
that
all
these
things
haue
their
being
in
me
,
in
the
thirteenth
verse
;
and
haue
denounced
blessednesse
vnto
my
seruaunts
in
the
Church
,
verse
14
;
and
reprobation
vnto
the
vngodly
,
verse
15.
And
behold
,
I
come
shortly
;
and
my
reward
is
with
me
,
[
‖
](A16102-e16110-b)
‖
Rom
26.
to
giue
euerie
man
according
as
his
worke
shall
be
.
13
I
am
[
‖
](A16102-e16140-b)
‖
Chap.
18
17.
&
21.
6.
Esa.
41.
48
12.
4.
and
44
6.
Alpha
and
Omega
,
the
beginning
&
the
end
,
the
first
and
the
last
.
14
Blessed
are
they
,
that
do
his
commaundements
;
[
7
](A16102-e16200-b)
7
The
bleslednesse
of
the
godly
,
set
downe
by
their
title
and
interest
thereunto
;
and
their
frute
in
the
same
.
that
they
may
haue
interest
in
the
tree
oflife
,
and
may
enter
in
through
the
gates
into
the
citie
.
15
But
without
shal
be
all
dogges
,
and
enchanters
,
&
whoremongers
,
and
murtherers
,
and
idolaters
,
and
whosoeuer
loueth
or
maketh
lyes
.
16
[
8
](A16102-e16240-b)
8
The
second
place
of
confirmation
(
as
I
sayd
vers.
6.
)
is
the
speech
of
Christ
ratifying
the
vocation
of
S
,
Iohn
,
and
the
authoritie
of
his
calling
&
testimonie
,
both
from
the
condition
of
his
owne
person
,
being
God
and
man
,
in
whom
all
the
promises
of
God
are
Yea
&
Amen
.
2.
Cor.
1.
20.
and
also
from
the
testification
of
other
persons
:
as
by
the
acclamation
of
the
holy
ghost
,
who
here
is
as
it
were
an
honourable
assistant
of
the
marriage
:
of
the
Church
as
the
spouse
:
and
of
euerie
of
the
godly
as
members
:
and
finally
from
the
thing
present
,
that
of
their
own
knowledge
&
accord
,
they
are
called
forth
vnto
the
participation
of
the
good
things
of
God
,
vers.
17.
I
Iesus
haue
sent
mine
Angell
,
to
testifie
vnto
you
these
things
in
the
Churche
:
I
am
that
roote
and
that
of
spring
of
Dauid
,
and
that
bright
morning
starre
.
17
Both
the
Spirite
and
the
bride
say
,
Come
.
And
let
him
that
heareth
say
,
Come
:
and
let
him
that
is
a
thirst
,
come
:
and
[
‖
](A16102-e16260-b)
‖
Esa.
55.
2.
let
whosoeuer
will
,
take
of
the
water
of
life
freely
.
18
[
9
](A16102-e16290-b)
9
The
obtestation
of
S.
Iohn
(
which
is
the
third
place
of
the
confirmation
,
as
was
noted
ver.
6.
)
ioyned
with
a
curse
or
execration
,
to
preserue
the
truth
of
this
booke
entire
&
vncorrupted
,
in
two
verses
.
For
I
protest
vnto
euery
man
that
heareth
the
words
of
the
prophesie
of
this
booke
;
If
any
man
shall
ad
vnto
these
things
,
God
shall
ad
vnto
him
the
plagues
,
that
are
written
in
this
booke
:
19
And
if
any
man
shall
take
away
from
the
words
of
the
booke
of
this
prophecie
,
God
shall
take
away
his
part
out
of
the
booke
of
life
,
and
out
of
the
holy
citie
,
&
out
of
those
things
which
are
written
in
this
booke
.
20
[
10
](A16102-e16320-b)
10
A
diuine
confirmation
or
sealing
of
the
obtestation
:
first
from
Christ
auouching
the
same
,
and
denouncing
his
comming
against
all
those
that
shall
put
their
sacrilegious
hands
thereunto
:
then
from
S.
Iohn
him selfe
,
who
by
a
most
holy
prayer
calleth
Christ
to
take
vengeance
of
them
.
He
which
testifieth
these
things
,
saith
,
Surely
;
I
come
quickely
,
Amen
.
Come
therefore
Lord
Iesus
.
21
[
11
](A16102-e16340-b)
11
The
salutation
Apostolicall
,
which
is
the
other
place
of
the
conclusion
,
as
I
sayd
vers.
6.
and
is
the
end
almost
of
euerie
Epistle
:
which
we
wish
vnto
the
Church
,
and
to
all
the
holy
and
elect
members
therof
,
in
Christ
Iesus
our
Lord
,
vntill
his
comming
to
iudgement
.
Come
Lord
Iesus
and
do
it
.
Amen
,
againe
Amen
.
The
grace
of
our
Lord
Iesus
Christ
be
with
you
all
.
Amen
.
God
onely
be
honor
and
glorie
.
FINIS
.
Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
Notes for div A16102-e1560
Notes for div A16102-e2540
Notes for div A16102-e3460
Notes for div A16102-e4190
Notes for div A16102-e4620
Notes for div A16102-e5150
Notes for div A16102-e5660
Notes for div A16102-e6190
Notes for div A16102-e6570
Notes for div A16102-e7250
Notes for div A16102-e7580
Notes for div A16102-e8450
Notes for div A16102-e9050
Notes for div A16102-e10040
Notes for div A16102-e10730
Notes for div A16102-e11140
Notes for div A16102-e11880
Notes for div A16102-e12800
Notes for div A16102-e13450
Notes for div A16102-e14210
Notes for div A16102-e14860
Notes for div A16102-e15770